Home

INVENTORY CONTROL

1. TZ 78 79 60 81 B2 Sais 84 85 86 87 More Info Maintain Image 91 Item Rev 92 Routing Rev 93 Low Level 94 Scrap 00 95 Item Source P 96 PO Delete 100 00 97 98 IMC Code 99 Duplicate 14 First 4 Previous b Next Last Comments Miew Comments Item Motes Help Run Exit IC 26 Next Generation Inventory Control Screen 3 Release NGS 6 30 IM Item Master Maintenance Item No 125 Description Tape 125 new item desc 1 4 STREAMING TAPE Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 Screen 4 108 List Price 109 Alt Unit List 0 00000 110 Alt Unit Surch 0 00000 111 Price Matrix Cd 112 Auto Subst Cd 113 Auto Subst Itm 114 110 00000 0 00000 RATE TABLE 116 Commission 00 117 Discount 00 118 Insurance 0 00 119 Handling 00 120 Adv Allow 00 121 Rebate 00 122 123 Update current record More Info Maintain Image 127 128 Fam Price Code 129 Price Memo 1 0 00000 130 131 Sort Group 132 Reprice Code 133 134 Suggest Retail 135 Pricing UM 136 Prc UM Conv 1 00000 138 139 140 141 142 200 00000 Duplicate I4 First 4 Previous b Next Last Comments Miew Comments Item Motes Help Run Exit IC 27 Next Generation Inventory C
2. f an image with the same 2 exists choose to Overwrite He enter or Use the existing image or E Cancel A Image file already exists in the upload directory Release NGS 6 30 IC 56 Next Generation Inventory Control RIM RELATED ITEM MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Related Item Maintenance program is to allow the user to define an Item ID and attach to it Related Item ID s If the primary item is entered in the sales order program upon completion a window will open displaying the related item list to offer related items for sales RIM acts as a sales stimulator for your order entry operator to push sales of items that typically work in conjunction with another product For example a customer orders paint A window can open that contains items such as brushes paint trays paint trimmers etc along with a message that the operator can read to the customer about the items Procedure From the menu enter RIM RIM Related Item Maintenance Our Item ID Item Description Update Item Description 2 Remove Related Item ID Query Related Item Desc Related Item Desc 2 View Duplicate Prompt Msg Line 1 Prompt Msg Line 2 Import Help Memo 1 Information Memo 2 Information Exit Program Add records OYE Select from the Menu options Use the Add button to add a new record Use the Update button to
3. ITEM PRODUCT MASTER MAINTENANCE STANDARD COMMENTS 40 Ql Grisin ITEM QUANTITY INPUT 42 ITEM SERIAL LOT NUMBER PATTERN 2 45 ITEM USAGE HISTORY 48 INOTE ITEM NOTE MAINTENANCE 0 0c cece eee HMM meme 49 IPICM ITEM PICTURE MAINTENANCE css IH 51 RIM RELATED ITEM MAINTENANCE csssssI HMM mme 57 INTERCHANGEABLE ITEM 59 IVCM oo ITEM VALID CUSTOMER 61 UPCLOAD UPG UPLOAD PROGRAM enean uisu earns ee dal Riu 64 ITEM SUBSTITUTION emen eene nennen nnne 65 SELECTING ITEM SUBSTITU TIONS ooo Ie tht e eR 65 AUTOMATIC ITEM SUBSTITUTIONS MH HH emm emen mereri 65 SUBSTITUTION CODES acezek ze rper erg eiecit deleti e e nere Vni une 66 iiti ITEM SUBSTITUTION MAINTENANCE css 67 BRANCH MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS esee nnne nnne nnn nennen nens 69 BAM BRANCH XREF CONTROL MAINTENANCE 69 ICMB 22 ITEM B
4. Prod Line xref Start Date Usage History rear Per End Date Actual Usage Override Usage Exit Program Note Multple Overrides Update existing records To override usage history select the U pdate option at the bottom of the screen Then while scrolling through the usage periods user may press O ptions window which offers user options to maintain usage history query into overrides of the history or peg back to source of the usage Release NGS 6 30 IC 48 Next Generation Inventory Control INOTE Introduction ITEM NOTE MAINTENANCE The purpose of the Item Note Maintenance program is to maintain any special notations regarding items These notes will display according to the program they are defined for Procedure From the menu enter INOTE Item Notes Maintenance Begin Date End Date Itern Id Item Desc Item Xref Update Purge Flag Remove Program ncs Page Seq Tran Type List Ring Menu Duplicate Title View Note 1 Help Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Last Updated E Updated by Exit Program Add records The following fields may be entered ITEM ID PROGRAM NAME PAGE SEQUENCE TRANSACTION TYPE Release NGS 6 30 Enter the item ID The search can also be done by item descriptions or item cross reference or by ALL Enter the program name that this note shoul
5. Update Customer Xref Cust Valid Item Cd Remove Duplicate Our Item ID Our Item Desc Query Our Item Desc 2 View Our Item Xref Memo 1 Information Memo 2 Information Memo 3 Information Exit Program Memo 4 Information Add records OYE Select from the Menu options Use the Add button to add a new record Use the Update button to update existing records Use the Remove button to remove records Use the Duplicate record to duplicate a record Use the Query button to query records Use the View button to view records Use the Help button to view help on this program Use the Run button to execute another program Use the Exit Program button to exit the program When duplicating from one customer to another wildcards for the items may be used If a RETURN or is used in the From our item ID field then all items will be duplicated Release NGS 6 30 IC 87 Next Generation Inventory Control The following fields may be entered CUSTOMER ID CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER XREF CUSTOMER VALID ITEM CODE OUR ITEM ID OUR ITEM DESC OUR ITEM DESC 2 OUR ITEM XREF MEMO 1 INFORMATION MEMO 2 INFORMATION Select VIEW to choose the sort and output options Release NGS 6 30 Enter the Customer ID This table allows the user the ability to define a list of items for a customer In the customer master user can set the valid items flag t
6. Enter the following fields ITEM G L ACCOUNT Enter the ID for this particular Item G L Account Group GROUP ID Field length is 8 characters ITEM G L Enter the description for the Item G L Account Group ACCOUNT GROUP Field length is 15 characters DESCRIPTION Release NGS 6 30 IC 10 Next Generation Inventory Control ISAC ITEM SALES ANALYSIS CATEGORY MAINTENANCE Introduction The ISAC program is one of the programs on the Item Validation Code Menu and is used for building or maintaining the Item Sales Analysis Category Codes file This file allows the user to define up to 4 levels of codes that may be put in the item master for various selection or reporting purposes Procedure From the menu enter ISAC F ISAC Sales Analysis Category Maintenance S A Category S A Category Description Category Level 1 2 3 or 4 Web Flag Memo 1 Memo 2 Memo 3 Memo 4 Memo 5 Memo 6 Memo 7 Add records The following fields may be entered to build or maintain the Item Sales Analysis Category Codes S A CATEGORY Enter the sales analysis category type code in this field The user may establish TYPE codes as needed Field length is 8 characters S A CATEGORY Enter the sales analysis description associated with the S A Category Type DESCRIPTION code Field length is 15 characters CATEGORY LEVEL Enter the level code in this field Valid entries are 1 2 3 or 4 WEB FLAG E
7. Release NGS 6 30 IC 304 Next Generation Inventory Control IPAI ITEM PRICE AVAILABILITY INQUIRY Introduction The purpose of the Item Price Availability program is for the user to look at specific pricing for items and available inventory balances The user may enter just the item and view information that is for all customers or may enter a specific customer along with the item to view any special pricing parameters that might be set up for that particular customer Procedure From the menu enter IPAI f IPAI Item Price Availability Query Acf option 074 Item Customer controls the Item ID 1 Customer opening of an D 2 item selection xe o Eu 7 Branch z Comments window This Conv Related Item A window will give the user more WES gt Branch On Hand On Order Sales Order Available List Price Qty per Pack detail selection SS Sa pi m S O NETT options Enter Search Criteria for ITEM ID OVE Release NGS 6 30 IC 305 Next Generation Inventory Control To select a customer click on the Find button or press the letter F f IPAI Item Price Availability Query Item Item ID LOTGJM Desci LOT ITEM CS EA Desc2 i Xref Conv 10 00000 Related Item Branch On Hand On Order Sales Order Available z o cs o ol o 1f Customer Customer Name Xref Branch List
8. 32 410001 1 Inventory Transaction Entry Detail Fields Release NGS 6 30 IC 233 Next Generation Inventory Control FROM BRANCH Enter the branch ID you are transferring inventory from ADJ QUANTITY Enter the inventory quantity you are transferring as a negative number The on hand quantity for the from branch will display on the bottom of the screen MAT COST The material unit cost will display on the screen At the MAT COST field you may use the lookup button to maintain material labor overhead or outside costs for the item The following window will open r ITE Total Cost Window Enter Casts Material Cost 32 41000 Labor Cost 0 00000 Overhead Cost 0 00000 Outside Cost 0 00000 Total Cost 32 41000 Enter Material Cost If you do not wish to allow an update to the costs set ACF option inv012 to a value of 1 ACF option inv012a controls the transfer from branch unit cost DEPARTMENT Enter the department you wish to post the shipping branch inventory to ITEM ACCT GRP This will default to the item account group code in the item master record TO BRANCH Enter the branch ID you are transferring inventory to ADJ QTY The system will set this field to the same value as the from branch MAT COST The material unit cost will display on the screen At the MAT COST field you may use the lookup button to maintain material labor overhead or outside costs for the item as desc
9. The number of VIXM recoras that will be updated will be displayed Type proceed to continue with the update Release NGS 6 30 Warning 2 Item Costs are outside of the normal over and under variance limits defined Proceed with Rollover of ALL Items Anyway 112 The system will proceed to update the VENDORS COST the Vendor Item Cross Reference Table with the NEW MATERIAL COST for all items in this control with a corresponding record for the item in the Vendor Item Cross Reference Table for Vendor ID ABC1000 Only the Vendors Cost VIXM Field 01 will be updated no other fields including quantity break costs will be updated If a Cost Conversion Factor is defined for the vendor item VIXM Field 09 the system will apply the cost conversion factor to the new material cost to arrive at the vendor cost Number of Vendor Item Xref records to be updated Enter PROCEED to continue with the update Enter Control No 1 PROCEED IC 191 Next Generation Inventory Control Select VIEW to choose the sort and output options Item Future Cost Maintenance View Sort By Options By Control ID By Item ID By Control ID By Product Group By Item ID By Control ID By Item Xref By Control ID By Product Group By Item Xref By Item ID By Item Xref By Product Group By Item By Product Group By Item Xref Enter no of spaces betwe
10. component and zeroed out on the component No recosting will occur PRICE MATRIX Enter the Price Matrix code With Pricing Code H price at header you CODE may override the Price Matrix Code from the Item Master record by entering a value in this field If you leave this field blank then the Price Matrix Code from the Item Master record will be used ITEM FAMILY Enter the Item Family Matrix code With Pricing Code H price at header CODE you may override the Item Family Code from the Item Master record by entering a value in this field If you leave this field blank then the Item Family code from the Item Master record will be used COMMENTS A Y in this field indicates there are comments for this kit A N in this field indicates there are no comments for this kit If Y is present the user will have the option to insert comment lines of description that are related directly to this kit DESC OVERRIDE Enter the Description Override flag If set to N for No then the IM program will automatically update the Description Description2 and XREF fields in the Kit Header record whenever the corresponding fields are changed in the item record No means the user has not overridden the description or xref fields If set to Y for Yes the IM program will not update these fields because the user has overridden them REVIEW Enter the QUOTE ORDER BILL component line detail review flag This field Release NGS 6 30 IC 339 Next Generatio
11. lt Line lt Feed lt 13 gt lt 10 gt ASCII Characters All character fields must be left justified Decimal fields must be in decimal format XXXXXX XX Signed numeric fields must contain the sign in front of the number Decimal point must be included and contain at least one digit to the left two digits to the right of the decimal point i e 2323 25 Blanks before any numbers are assumed to be positive Example of ASCII file item id ifcsttmp nmatcst ifcsttmp nlabcst ifcsttmp novhdcst ifcsttmp noutcst i fcsttmp nincmat ifcsttmp ninclab ifcsttmp noinvcvhd ifcsttmp nincout ifcsttmp ITEMA 600 00 500 00 400 00 300 00 200 00 100 00 90 00 80 00 ITEMB 900 00 800 00 700 00 600 00 500 00 400 00 30 00 20 00 Release NGS 6 30 IC 175 Next Generation Inventory Control Excel File Requirements Decimal fields must be formatted as Numeric and the appropriate number of decimal places Character fields must be formatted as Text Example of Excel file fle Edt View Insert Format Took Data Window Hep 335 ELS 0 iJ 7G 5 9 Bi j Reply with Changes End Revie tern id otra nimatest nlsbcst noutcst festtmp festim esting nomevhd fcstimp nincout esting 00 00 50000 00 00 200 000 DO MEME 10000 500 00 3m S t Release NGS 6 30 IC 176 Next Generation Inventory Control Release
12. BILL program will search the CMT table in the following sequence Customer Sold To ID Customer Ship To ID and Item ID Customer Sold To ID Customer Ship To ID and Price Matrix ID Customer Sold To ID Customer Ship To ID and Product Group ID Customer Sold To ID Customer Ship To ID and ISAC 4 ID Pons When a match is found the system will then choose the appropriate item master matrix code and place it into either the Order detail record or the Invoice detail records prior to the system calculating the selling price This feature allows the user to maintain a higher level price matrix to control selling prices After this code substitution the system will then perform all the standard price calculations for the combination of customer and item The following fields may be accessed CUST SOLD TO Enter a valid Customer Sold To ID CUST SHIP TO Enter a valid Customer Ship To ID or ALL for all ship to id s ITEM MATCH CLASS Enter a valid Item Match Class Code Acf option 0e047 determines whether this code will be a valid Item ID Item Price Matrix Code Product Group ID or ISAC 4 ID CUST MATRIX Enter the new Customer Matrix Code that that will be used by the Order and OVERRIDE Bill programs to calculate the selling price for the transaction The value of this entry will be used by the system to replace the Customer Matrix value that would come from the Customer Master file This new value is then used with the value of the Item Matrix to
13. Enter the inventory balance that is to be maintained On Hand Quantity to adjust the on hand balance increase or decrease based on quantity entered Adjustment In transit to adjust the in transit balance Quantity Adjustment On Hand Quantity to replace the on hand balance with quantity entered Replacement On Hand Quantity to transfer inventory from one branch to another branch A Warning Message Transfer will occur if the branch transfer quantity exceeds the on hand quantity or the available quantity at the branch Recover to rebuild a batch of transactions Release NGS 6 30 IC 195 Next Generation Inventory Control Transactions Exit Program Exits the program On Hand ITE Inventory Transaction Entry Quantity Adjustment Division z Trans Date option 1 is Department t selected the Control Number Authorization following Transaction Type Reference window will Item Number Stk UM open Description Alt UM Cross Reference Branch Whse Bin Loc Lot Serial Adj Qty UM Mat Cost In transit CEI ITE Inventory Transaction Entry Quantity Adjustment im Division FP Trans Date y D rt t If option 2 is 2 Jected the Control Number Authorization pi Transaction Type Reference ollow n boe A Item Number Stk UM open Descrip
14. Inventory Control CMT COLUMN MATRIX TABLE MAINTENANCE Introduction The CMT program is a preprocessing step that takes place prior to the PMT pricing logic in the system It ONLY substitutes the customer matrix class field in the item detail record for any matching combination that is met in the table ALL SYSTEM PRICING IS STILL PERFORMED BASED ON THE PMT HIERARCHY The column matrix table maintenance CMT program is designed to provide an additional method of pricing the orders invoices The CMT program gives the user the ability to choose from multiple PMT records when the end user may have multiple prices for multiple products The column pricing logic takes place before the standard Price Matrix logic In order to utilize Column Matrix Pricing rules a user must have Price Matrix Table records set up on their system There are two levels of maintaining column matrix records 1 by Customer Shipto 2 by Customer Match Class When using option 2 the user will be able to add records by one of the following Customer Match Class methods determined by acf option 047 a By Sold to Ship to b By Customer Type Code c By Customer Matrix Code d By CSACD Code Once a user has selected the level as described above they must then select the Item Match Class the column matrix record is being added for The Item Match Class will be based on one of the following methods determined by acf option 047 a By Item ID b By Item Pri
15. Item Xref Item Type Cd Desc Desc 2 Incremental Cost into New Item Cost Calculation REPLACE or ADD Options Calculate and REPLACE new item costs with new inc cost amounts not zero No calc required REPLACE new item costs with new inc costs not zero Calculate and ADD new inc costs into new item cost automatically Calculate new incremental costs but DO MOT ADD into new item costs Mo calculations required ADD current new inc costs into new item costs Proceed Enter PROCEED to begin calculating incremental costs Enter Select Criteria For Control Number Select the Set Selected Items to User Defined Costs SET_COSTS option Control No Product Group Item ID Item Src Cd Item Item Type Cd Desc Desc2 SET New Material Cost Enter Amount SET New Labor Cost Enter Amount SET New Overhead Cost Enter Amount SET New Enter Amount SET Mew Inc Material Enter Amount SET New Inc Labor Enter Amount SET New Inc Overhead Enter Amount SET New Inc Outside Enter Amount Proceed Enter PROCEED to begin the SET COST processing Enter Select Criteria For Control Number The SET COSTS option allows the user to set any one of the new item future cost values to an amount entered by the user This routine may be used to zero out costs or set fixed cost amounts on the items selected Release NGS 6 30 IC 194 Next Generation Inventory Control
16. KITS CAN BE MADE FROM THE COMPONENTS AVAILABLE Release NGS 6 30 IC 311 Cancel Next Generation Inventory Control OTHER OPTIONS AVAILABLE IN THE HEADER PORTION OF THE WINDOW Special Buttons f IPAI Item Price Availability Query on the top Item Customer portion of the Item ID TAPE 125 PG 4 Custmer ALL1000 window are Desci 125 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE Name ALL SUPPLY S CORPORATION Desc 2 1 4 STREAMING TAPE xref 003 g Related Item Kraf patres Branch B On Order Find Conv 5 00000 Related Item On Hand Clear Comments Cust Order Branch On Hand On Order Sales Order Available List Price 3 3 Bx 2 9 10 0000 BX 01 100 2 EA 2 2 00000 EA Itern Comments Last Sales Item Notes Date 08 09 200ce SELL 10 00 Help To select item RELATED ITEMS Allows the user to view any related items FIND Allows the user to find and select a customer CLEAR CUST Allows the user to clear a selected customer Release NGS 6 30 IC 312 Next Generation Inventory Control ITPA ITEM TIME PHASED AVAILABILITY QUERY Introduction The Item Time Phased Availability program displays the availability of an item based on the current On Hand Quantity less orders plus expected replenishment from Purchase Orders The time phase calculation is based on the Sales Order required Date and on the Purchase Order Wanted Dat
17. M TM Description PURCHASE RCPTS SS Source Parameters Used General Ledger Posting Account t Exit qO Division L Department 1 ce G L Account No 1120 15 Em INVENTORY IN TRANSIT Division Department Bank em Branch Bill Method Trans Type Item Acct Group Cust Acct Group Tax ID POS Type Cust Tax Class Sell Branch Tr From Branch Tr To Branch N v vj N vj N v IN 2 Please note that if you have multiple parameter fields set to a value of Y record for each variable for each transaction type must be added Release NGS 6 30 IC 220 Next Generation Inventory Control If you are creating branch transfers from the inventory transaction entry ITE program you will need to do the following in GLPAR 1 In the GLPAR program select G L Posting Parameters Maintenance option Update the ITR program seq 39 Set flag to a Y in field Tran Type in Use GLPAR G L POSTING PARAMETERS MAINTENANCE ITR SEQUENCE 39 GLPAR G L Control Parameters Maintenance Program Mame Inventory A R Control Parameters Maintenance Sequence Number 39 Description INVENTORY RCPTS Division in Use Dept in Use Bank in Use Branch in Use Bill Meth in Use Trans Type in Use Item Acct Grp in
18. Price Cost Factor 100 00000 Assign Item Status Creation Method UPC UM Next record Release NGS 6 30 IC 288 Next Generation Inventory Control Vendor NSIM Vendor Non stock Item Maintenance non stock item Vendor ID ANDE3O Andersen Windows Y 1 Vendor Item ID Non Stock Template 31000000 E Screeni Screen 2 Vendor Item Information Our Formatted Item Information Item Desci BEAD THERRATONE RAIL 5 8 CP2 BEAD THERRATONE RAIL Item Size 1 Item Xref 14000077 Item Size 2 Matrix Class record Prod Category Bypass Code Unit Factor Pack Qty Material Cost 2 43540 Labor Cost 0 00000 Volume 0 01000 Overhead Cost 0 00000 Weight 0 00000 Outside Cost 0 00000 Generate Item N y Remove TOTAL 2 43540 List Price 4 10000 GYR Release NGS 6 30 IC 289 Next Generation Inventory Control After entering the item id and the system determines it is a vendor non stock item based on acf oe107 the following screen will display The user may select the item to be used on this transaction A Item Master Non Stock Item Selection vendor UPC Interchange Vendor Item ID Description 1 Size 1 Size2 Gen Formatted Item ID Description 1 ANDE3O 1400077 BEAD THERRATONE RAIL 5 8 CPZ N 311400077 AW CP2 BEAD THERRATONE Based on the security set up the user has the ability to override the item id and the descript
19. 03 29 2006 2 10218 56359 03 29 2006 2 c200 Excp Req No x 56340 x 56341 Want De 04 17 20 04 17 20 Description component 1 1 EA Mike s test item 1 EA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUE ORAC DECOR MEDALLION 10 1 4 2 EA 04 03 21 IC 248 Process Mark Exception Approve Detail u Exit VR Next Generation Inventory Control Flag Exceptions Approve Remaining Window 3 APR Approve Purchase Transfer REquisitions SEE Click Exit and No of pending Requisitions Process to mark and then OK button to exit window and process approved requisitions No of exceptions Cancel No of requisitions to be processed Options it Continue excluding requisitions Exit without processing Flag Exceptions Approve Remaining Window 4 e Information Approve requisition process completed at 14 50 03 on Wed Mar 29 2006 Upon completion of the approval process the following information window will display Click OK to complete process fe d ALL approved requisitions must be processed by program pogen to generate Purchase Orders Once approved branch transfer requisitions can be converted to branch transfer purchase orders along with the creation of the corresponding branch transfer sales orders Release NGS 6 30 IC 249 Next Generation Inventory Control BRANCH TRANSFER PURCHASE ORDER GENERATION Once the selected branch transfer requisitions
20. 1 Automatic Selection of Records From ITEM File Into the ITEM FUTURE LIST PRICE File 2 nto The ITEM FUTURE LIST PRICE File 3 Item Future List Price File Maintenance Exit Program Upload ASCII f IFLP Item Future List Price Changes Automatic Upload Options Excel File option Message The System Will Proceed To Upload Records From The Specified Directory And File Names Into The Item Future List Price Table From PC io From Main System Enter the Directory Path Enter the Data File Name price dat Item Selection Criteria Prime Vendor Match Upload Item To Field Options 1 Item ID 2 Item Cross Reference 3 Item Description 1 4 Item Description 2 5 Item Memo 1 6 Item Memo 2 7 Item Memo 3 8 Item Memo 4 9 UPC Interchange ID 10 Vendor Part ID VIXM Vendor ID Proceed Enter the CONTROL NUMBER Enter PROCEED to begin ITEM FUTURE LIST PRICE Ascii File Upload Release NGS 6 30 IC 144 Next Generation Inventory Control From PC If the user is loading an Excel file click on the lookup button in the From PC section and select the excel sheet to be loaded From Main If the user is loading an ASCII file enter the directory path and the file name in System the From Main System section Prime Vendor To restrict the items that will be uploaded from the sheet to a specific Vendor When a value is entered in this field the system
21. 12 Promo Rate 13 Memo Price 1 14 Memo Price 2 15 Enter Item Matrix Class to duplicate FROM then press Return Duplicate Option s Confirmation 2 Window Copy Item Class 9366 9DUP33 Proceed Duplicate Option Results Window Release NGS 6 30 IC 125 Next Generation Inventory Control f the VIEW mode is selected choose the sort and output options o F PMT Price Matrix Table View Sort By Options Cancel Customer Class by Item Class Help Output To Options Output to S creen Printer H old File or E X cel IS Release NGS 6 30 IC 126 Next Generation Inventory Control If the MASS REM 6 Mass Remove option is selected Mass Remove by The user can select F to remove i Item Matrix Customer Matrix records by either the customer or tem matrix code Mass Remove f PMT Price Matrix Table Maintenance Option Selection Screen SSS Item Matrix Class Customer Matrix Class Screen 1 Screen 2 01 Description 16 Sell Price 02 Pricing Usage CD 17 03 Selling Price 18 Qty Break Option 04 Alt Sell Price 19 Qty Break Value gt 05 Price Adj Amt 06 Price Adj Amt 07 Pricing U M LVL Qty Break 08 Pricing U M Conv 1 09 Promo Usage CD 10 Start Date 11 Promo End Date 2 12 Promo Rate 13 Memo Price 1
22. By Requisition Date By Item By Requisition Date By Branch By Item By Buyer BY Product Line By Item By Buyer By Xref By Item By Buyer By Branch By Product Line By Item By Buyer By Vendor By Product Line By Item By Branch By Buyer By Product Line By Item By Vendor By Product Line By Item By Vendor By Xref By Item By Vendor By Item By Requisition No By Vendor By Customer By Item By Requisition No Release NGS 6 30 IC 245 Next Generation Inventory Control Approve all pending ena requisitions 6 iy Choose Requisition Type for Approval Window 2 Non Product Line Item Requ so Upon completion of the approval process W 7777 the following ae processing information window ee d will display Click OK to complete process No Of Requisitions 2 Information Approve requisition process completed at 14 52 51 on Wed Mar 29 2006 re d ALL approved requisitions must be processed by program pogen to generate Purchase Orders rm rV thud Microsoft Word start gt Munics 66 251 124 41 R Review Individual Requisitions The user may scroll through each requisition and approve those they wish The system will display the following windows Release NGS 6 30 IC 246 Next Generation Inventory Control Review CT individual Approve Purchase Transfer Requisitions requisition
23. Code 5 The total last cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over last cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The last cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 6 The total average cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over average cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The average cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 7 The higher of the total average cost or the total last cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over the higher of the total average cost or the total last cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 8 The selling price in the matrix file will be the selling price on the order invoice If quantity breaks are in the matrix and the quantity being ordered shipped qualifies for quantity break discounts then the value or will be utilized to arrive at a selling price If the quantity ordered shipped exceeds the last quantity break lev
24. Comparative Pricing Selection Option This option will enable the system to find the lowest sell price for an item This is accomplished by providing the user the ability to specify which PMT records the system should read next and then performing a price comparison to determine and use the lowest price available In order for the system to perform this check for the lowest sale price ACF option oe103 must be set to a value of 1 When a user has PMT records set up there is a standard hierarchy that is followed when selecting a particular PMT record to be used It searches the PMT table in following sequence CUSTOMER ID and ITEM ID CUSTOMER ID and ITEM MATRIX CLASS CUSTOMER ID and ITEM MATRIX CLASS ALL ITEM ID and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS ITEM ID and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS ALL ITEM MATRIX CLASS and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS ITEM MATRIX CLASS ALL and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS ITEM MATRIX CLASS and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS ALL a match is found it will search any further use the price from that record The lowest price may not always be found on the first matched record there may be a lower price further down in the search sequence Suppose the PMT is set up as follows Item Matrix Customer Matrix Price Quantity Quantity Class Class Price item 123 cust 1234 22 123 25 10 20 ALL ALL 30 12 25 Relea
25. Example An item may be stocked by the EA but priced per hundred In this example the Stock U M would be EA and the Price U M could be C with the pricing conversion factor set to 01000 QUANTITY ORDERED 2500 STOCK U M EA PRICE U M PRICE CONVERSION 01000 SELLING PRICE 20 00000 EXTENSION 500 00 Release NGS 6 30 IC 137 Next Generation Inventory Control IFLP ITEM FUTURE LIST PRICING Introduction The Item Future List Pricing program permits the user to create a control file of item records where a new future list price may be stored and rolled over into the item master file on demand The user has the option to manually build records in this file or to automatically move data from the current item list price file into the item future list price file or import records from an ASCII or Excel file The user will be able to view and correct all input errors prior to uploading the data to the master file Please review acf options inv080 inv081 inv082 inv088 ar050a iflp before using this program Procedure From the menu enter IFLP Click radial button 2 Upload Import ASCII Excel File into The ITEM FUTURE LIST PRICE File to mark selected 3 Item Future List Price File Maintenance option and click Exit Program OK to execute Click radial button f IFLP Item Future List Price Changes Automatic Select Options to mark selected options and click OK to execute User Options To Ca
26. Generate Flag N Do Not Generate in batch Y Generate in the next batch Item has been generated Do not allow change of the formatted item id E Item could not be generated Item Maintenance Error codes 0000 Successful 0001 Item Id NULL 0002 Duplicate Item ID or Itemplan ID 0008 Invalid format for oelinectl_item Other values SQL error codes Flag for removal Enter Y or N Enter Our Formatted item ID Enter Our Formatted Item Description 1 Enter Our Formatted Item Description 2 Enter Our Formatted Item Cross Reference Enter Our Formatted Item Price Matrix Class Enter the Bypass Code Enter the Unit Factor Enter the Pack Quantity Enter the Material Unit Cost Enter the Labor Unit Cost Enter the Overhead Unit Cost Enter the Outside Unit Cost IC 275 Next Generation Inventory Control Screen 2 Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional It
27. However the quantity on that line will be included with other lines of the same family in order to ascertain the correct family discount Release NGS 6 30 IC 128 Next Generation Inventory Control From the menu enter FMT f FMT Family Pricing Matrix Item Family Cd Family Price Method E Update Break Value Code xp Cust Family Cd Break Rate Code Remove Query Break Value Break Rate Duplicate Level 1 Level 2 JL View Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Default Record Level 7 _ Level 8 Exit Program Add records QV ITEM FAMILY CODE Enter the item family code assigned to this record This code may be up to 8 characters CUSTOMER Enter the customer family code assigned to this record This code may be up FAMILY CODE to 10 characters FAMILY PRICE Enter the Family Pricing Method code The system offers several pricing usage METHOD codes that can be utilized to arrive at a selling price The following information describes each code and what routine will be utilized under that code to calculate price FAMILY PRICE METHOD CODE FAMILY PRICING ROUTINE 1 Family Pricing Method Code 1 indicates that Family Pricing is based on achieving certain break levels In this option the break value will replace the selling price for items qualifying for this family price 2 Family Pricing Method Code 2 indicates that Family Pricing is b
28. KIT AVAILABILITY INQUIRY Introduction The Kit Availability Inquiry program allows the user to review Kit component availability with an indication of how many kits can be produced at a given point in time From the main menu enter King Select the Query button from the main menu to determine component availability for a kit After the branch code and the Order Quantity are entered the system will indicate the component quantities required for the number of kits Procedure From the main f KINO Kit Availability Inquiry menu enter the OPTIONS KINQ program Kit ID Branch Description 1 Description Description 2 Order Quantity xref Kit Unit Cost eee Exit Program Component Details Component Description Query selected records Select QUERY to determine component Kit ID TRADEIN Branch 1 se availability for a Description 1 Enter Model of Trade In Here Description Branch 1 Cancel kit After the Description 2 Enter Description of Trade In Order Quantity o Branch Code and xref Kit Unit Cost 92 32 the Order Component Details Quantity are Component Description Kit Qty Req d Qty Qty Avail Qty Short entered the system will indicate the component quantities required for the number of kits 11 KITS CAN BE MADE FROM THE COMPONENTS AVAILABLE Release NGS 6 30 IC 347 Next Generation Inventory Control Displaying of Kit unit cost is controlled by acf opt
29. Next Generation Inventory Control F Print report A Output report to Click print option desired System will proceed to next window POGEN Window 4 Processing Requisition No 56341 Vendor 2222000 Branch 3 Product Line 254 Item MIKETEST9 No Of Reqs Processed Transaction Type Purchase Order No PO Line No No Of PO Lines Generated No Of POs Generated stinger x DC Batson Microsoft P Munics 66 251 124 41 R WRQ Reflectio Gi menu On the 4th window you will see a Transaction Type of TP signifying a branch transfer PO The total number of PO requisitions processed the total number of PO Lines generated and the total number of PO s generated will be displayed Click OK to continue to complete the POGEN process This process will create the transfer purchase order for the RECEIVING branch and the transfer sales order for the SHIPPING branch for all items selected Once these transfer purchase orders sales orders are created the tracking of inventory and the POR receiving functions are exactly the same procedure as the Manual procedure Release NGS 6 30 IC 252 Next Generation Inventory Control ORDER ENTRY BRANCH TRANSFERS In this procedure the system will allow the user at the time of order entry to create all the related orders needed to do a Branch Transfer on items where there is insufficient stock to fill the requirement This procedure is use
30. PRGEN Window 6 F Product Line Report Options Report Options j Print surplus stock at other branches l Cancel Print usage history Number of periods of usage history to print 6 Sort Options By Buyer Item ID By Buyer Prod Grp Item ID By Buyer Receiving Branch Item ID By Buyer Sending Branch Receiving Branch Item ID By Receiving Branch Item ID By Receiving Branch Buyer Item ID By Sending Branch Receiving Branch Item ID By Sending Branch Receiving Branch Buyer Item ID On the 6 window click to check information you wish to print on the report Click to mark desired sort option Click OK button to proceed to next window PHGEN Window 7 F Output report A Output report to On the 7 window select the report output option The system will then proceed to next window Release NGS 6 30 IC 243 Next Generation Inventory Control PRGEN Window 8 Recycle Bin HAAR E Ox Main Menu ones TEE ESguisition Type Options Processing Purchase Requisitions Only Branch 2 User Shortcuts cs Excet Microsoft Excel w Microsoft Word j SE Y Munics 66 251 124 41 R G WRO Reflectio F ment the 8 window the system will process items selected and create branch transfer purchase requisitions for all the items that will need to be transferred Click OK
31. Processing Options Create supplementary requisitions to add to existing requisitions Delete ONLY Requisitions for selected items and generate new requisitions Enter Search Criteria For Branch On the 2nd window enter your selection criteria for the item s you wish to transfer You will need to enter a Branch ID or an asterisk for all Branches You must then select the processing option Enter 1 to create supplementary requisitions for item s selected both Release NGS 6 30 IC 240 Next Generation Inventory Control demand and replenishment If this option is chosen the system will create new requisitions for the items All requisitions previously created will remain as they are Enter 2 to delete previously created requisitions for ONLY items selected both demand and replenishment If this option is chosen the system will create new requisitions for selected items ONLY for the entire quantity required quantity on old requisitions quantity calculated in this process All requisitions previously created will be deleted Click OK button to proceed to next window PRGEN e PRGEN Auto generate Purchase Transfer Requisitions Window 3 Starting Purchase Requisition Number 56355 Purchase Requisition Date Processing Options For Demand Action Items Without Reviewing Line Buy For Demand Action Items And Review Line Buy For Demand AND Recommended Action Items Percentage of
32. Stock Inventory is checked on components of this modular kit lt is feasible to place other kits on this module which will control inventory checking This type of item is usually a non inventory item and the sole purpose is to be able to group items in this module 2 Prompt Single Item This type of item is simply used as a method to prompt for a choice of items defined for this prompt Only one selection is permitted under this prompt 3 Prompt Multiple Items This type code permits user to select as many items as desired for this kit Release NGS 6 30 IC 341 Next Generation Inventory Control This is useful when more than one option is permitted within a set of options 4 Modular Multi Level Kit check inventory on header not component Inventory is checked on header of this modular kit SCAN FLAG The Scan Flag field indicates whether the kit components or kit header will be scanned for this kit Valid values are 0 1 or NULL 0 or NULL Allow scan of the components only 1 Allow scan of the kit header Lot serial bin w arehouse controlled components will be scanned This feature is restricted as follows 1 Kit Type Allow able Values 1 1 2 3 4 Release NGS 6 30 IC 342 Next Generation Inventory Control KITM KIT MAINTENANCE DETAIL After you have entered the Kit Header you enter the Kit Detail The Line No field is valued automatically Use the Insert button to
33. Use Item Master LAST material cost A Use Item Master AVERAGE material cost S Use Item Master STANDARD material cost B Use Transfer To BRANCH material cost X Use Transfer From BRANCH material cost N No Automatic Cost to be brought into detail NOTE If the Item entered has a Vendor Item Xref record then that cost will override this default option POR PO Transfer Receipt Cost Update Flag This option defines whether the cost should be recalculated and updated when a branch transfer PO receipt is entered Y System will recalculate and override PO unit extended cost at the time the Transfer PO is received N System will NOT recalculate and override PO unit extended cost at the time the Transfer PO is received Note This option works in conjunction with ACF option po036 and will set unit cost based on the value found in this option BTRM Multiple User Validation Option for Create PO Function This option will define what key fields will control multiple users in the Create PO function of the Branch Transfer Requisition Maintenance BTRM program 1 Use the Requisition Branch and From Branch fields in the BTRM program to validate if multiple user s are trying to create purchase orders for the same branch Using this option buyer may create purchase orders for other buyers requisitions 2 Use a window entry of Requisition Branch From Branch and Buyer ID to validate if multiple user s are trying to create
34. amt The last cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 12 The total average cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 00 over average cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The average cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 13 The higher of the total average cost or the total last cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 00 over the higher of the total average cost or the total last cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 14 This method code is reserved for future use Code 15 The total standard cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over standard cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The standard cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 16 The total standard cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selli
35. f Detail Level Inventory On Hand LOT SERIAL This option is Warehouse Bin Lot Ser On Hand used to view lot LOT1 100 and serial LOT2 50 Cancel number items Release NGS 6 30 IC 308 Next Generation Inventory Control Customer Orders CUST_ORDER Req Date Order Date Customer Order No Sales Order Committed TT Allows the user 07 21 2005 07 20 2005 ALL1000 000064 1 0 OR to view branch 08 23 2005 08 22 2005 ALL1000 000270 0 OR 09 20 2005 09 19 2005 ALL1000 000415 10 0 OR sales order quantity Use the Zoom option to view order detail information A Substitution SUBSTITUE Allows the user Item 150 150 MEG CARTRIDGE TAPE to view a Branch si substitute item as the following Substitute Item Description List Price Avl to Sell uM screen indicates MIKETEST Mike s test item 101 00 244 EA TAPE 60 60 MEG CARTRDIGE TAPES 127 50 633 BX Release NGS 6 30 IC 309 Next Generation Inventory Control VENDOR f VNSIM Vendor Non stock Item Maintenance NONSTOCK If the entered CINE E item is a Vendor Vendor ID ABCLOOO AUTOMATIC SWITCH Non Stock Item Vendor Item ID o101998C NMon Stock Template MARVALUETEST this will display Screen i Screen 2 the Vendor Non Stock Item Vendor Item Information Our Formatted Item Information Maintenance Item 10 101398 VNSIM screen Item Desc 1 LINER GRAY OAK HEAD JAMB REPL DP WDH46
36. general ledger This function may be run from menu by typing ITR The user should be aware that no general ledger updates for inventory adjustments have been made Should the Inventory Transaction Register ITR be run now Y N v Note If Inventory to GL interface is not active based on acf option inv001 then acf option inv099 will control whether to prompt the user to run the ITR program Upon selecting Y to run the inventory transaction register the following window will be displayed Release NGS 6 30 IC 236 Next Generation Inventory Control Enter desir ed ITR Inventory Transaction Register selections and click OK to Message continue with The following program will execute the Inventory Transaction Register OK ITR updating All current inventory transactions will be collected by control number sequence number the order in which they were actually entered Cancel summary of transaction types will be given at the end of each control number Help Control Date 03 23 2006 Control No 979 Division 1 Department 1 Enter the amount of lines between details 0 C Page Break on new Control Output To Option Output Register to S creen P rinter H old File or E xit The system will default the values in the Control Date Control No Division and Department fields User must enter the following field values Enter the amount of lines Enter the number of blank lin
37. multiple programs were chosen Help This is used to access the help files This is used to execute or run another program without exiting the current program u This is used to Exit the program ro m Exit Field Descriptions Item ID This table is used to control what items can be purchased via the B2B website This field contains the Next Generation Item ID from the ITEM table Prod Grp See Mass Update below Allow ed This Flag is used in the B2B and Sales Direct Link Modules and determines whether or not an item is allowed to be sold on the web The WEBSHOP program accesses this field Allow ed Enter Y if item may be sold on the WEB Enter N if item may not be sold on the WEB Image Enter the image file for this item This is the BIG picture to be displayed on the B2B website for this item If blank the program searches for the item ID gif 1 then jpeg or jpg next Images MUST BE LOADED in the usr HTTPServer htdocs company images directory Thumbnail Enter the thumbnail file for this item The small picture to be displayed on the B2B website for this item If blank the program searches for the itemID t gif 1 then jpeg or jpg Spec File Enter the Spec html or html file for this item These are the technical specs for this item Specs MUST BE LOADED in the usr HTTPServer htdocs company specs directory JavaScript Allows the user to write a java script that can altar the
38. rollover all items in the control variance limits defined are outside of the normal over and under To proceed with rollover select print Cost Rollover Register e New Cost Rollover Enter Control No T EE 27 Records Exist in Control Oi Print Cost Rollover Register Exit without Updating Item Files Release NGS 6 30 IC 188 Next Generation Inventory Control Output must be sent to the printer or hold file in order to proceed with the update Select Update Costs to File to proceed with the update The system will display the following upon selecting the update option f the user responds N to this prompt miscron ICRAR PURGE will read the value in acf option 092 to determine when to purge the records Release NGS 6 30 f Output Report Q Output report to Screen New Cost Rollover Enter Control No 2 Records Exist in Control Print Cost Rollover Register Exit without Updating Item Files f Purge gt Do you wish to purge the records in this control no IC 189 Next Generation Inventory Control f rollover option 4 6 a eT eee s selected the user must enter a single Rollover Options valid Vendor ID 1 Roll costs into item branch and item master records 2 Roll costs into item branch cost records only 3 Roll costs into item master cost records only 4 Roll
39. selected Item Master Selection Help Release NGS 6 30 IC 157 Next Generation Inventory Control f option 1 for Matrix selection s chosen f MFPM Selection Screen to Automatically Select Matrix for future Price Changes Sec Item Matrix Class Customer Matrix Class Description Promo Usage CD Pricing Usage CD Promo Start Date Selling Price Promo End Date Alt Sell Price Promo Rate Price Adj Amt Memo Price 1 Price Adj Amt ui Memo Price 2 Pricing U M Qty Break Value Pricing U M Conv Qty Break Option Control No Proceed Enter PROCEED to begin Matrix Future Price file updating The user will be given the opportunity to search the matrix file to establish the records to be moved to the future matrix file Enter the desired field s on which to search then press Enter Next the system will prompt for a control number to be assigned to this batch of records Enter PROCEED Creating Matrix Future Price file to begin creating the future matrix file Creating Control No PROCEED to MATFUTPR File Working on Item Class YBM TEST Cust Class ALL 23 Recordis Added Updated Release NGS 6 30 IC 158 Next Generation Inventory Control If Matrix Future Price Maintenance Program or option 2 from the primary screen are selected Release NGS 6 30 Matrix Future Price file creation has complete
40. 0 00000 14 00000 0 00000 28 01 TESTBLACK 93GG2300BLA I CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK 14 00000 0 00000 14 00000 0 00000 28 01 1 1 1 1 1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 TEST2010 5 93GGZ300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEU 6 10 00000 0 63442 0 53277 0 25969 11 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 TESTBLACK 936G2300BLA OCTO7 CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEU EI Record 1 of 98 14 00000 0 00000 14 00000 0 00000 28 01 The Print option Report allows the user to get E a hard copy of the Le ae cription 1 Prod Nev pec Nav Labor Nev New Outside ev Old Ma pas selected records a KR pe en mazso 1pcmcc is mus zene 00 o maiz Irenee o0 Ya0802 Irenee 10 naiz Irenee zo misio as mins ircmec zo 12307 rence 14347 is miss rence 1s n 300 masio 1rcmcc mu 20 Page Control Pret fied Text Prev Wert First Page 1 of Jump to Print Pages from Save tore nex Prev te A Copies 1 Browser view Release NGS 6 30 IC 185 Next Generation Inventory Control The Excel option allows the user to export the selected records to an excel file Open File My Recent Documents Desktop E My Documents glis xls glpr xls hvac2 xls hvac xls BI hvacartb xls hvacstr1 xls hvacstrorg xls B 3imdit52506 xls imdi xls imdiak xls 29
41. 14 Memo Price 2 15 Enter Item Matrix Class to REMOYE then press Return Confirmation Window Mass Remove 1 Matrix records will be removed for Item Class 93GG 23 Item records exist for Item Class 93GG 0 Kit hdr det records exist for Item Class 9366 You MUST review these records and check any sales orders in the system prior to doing the mass remove Proceed with Mass Remove Release NGS 6 30 IC 127 Next Generation Inventory Control FMT FAMILY MATRIX TABLE MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Family Matrix Table Maintenance program is to allow the user to establish automatic pricing in programs ORDER and BILL for items based on the summation of several line items belonging to the same family Many times price breaks are offered to a customer if a certain ordering level is achieved Family pricing allows the user to offer price breaks by summing up what was sold for all the items belonging to a specific item family If a certain user defined criteria is met the customer would be entitled to family pricing Procedure Family pricing is only activated when user is in ADD mode of ORDER entry or in program BILL when doing a one step invoice where no sales order was entered Family pricing will not take place if user is in UPDATE mode of an existing ORDER Data must be present in the Customer Family Code field of the Order Invoice records These fields will be utilized to access records in th
42. 6 30 IC 156 Next Generation Inventory Control MFPM MATRIX FUTURE PRICING MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of this program is to allow the user to manually or automatically create future matrix price records by a user defined control batch which can be rolled into the standard matrix file on demand by the user The user may prepare for matrix price changes that are known in advance by building these records to be rolled over into the normal matrix file maintained in program PMT Multiple price schedules can be maintained through the use of a user assigned control number A major advantage of assigning a control number to a batch of these future matrix price records is that the user can automatically temporarily create a frozen batch of future price matrix records from the normal matrix price file Then create another batch of future matrix records which might be a special set of prices offered for a certain period of time At the appropriate time the user rolls the special prices into the matrix file in order to kick off the special offering When the time expires on the special offering the user simply copies the original frozen batch of prices back into the matrix file which will make the special offering obsolete Procedure From the menu MFPM Matrix Future Price Maintenance enter MFPM Matrix Future Price File Maintenance Exit Program OVER If Option 1 is e Item Matrix Class Selection PRI ES
43. Code i PENDING Replenishment Controls Grouping Code Help Create Auto SO Y Is Line Buy Exit GYR Flag Exceptions and Approve the Remaining Requisitions The user may flag individual requisitions they do not wish to approve The system will display the following windows Release NGS 6 30 IC 247 Next Generation Inventory Control Flag Exceptions Approve Remaining Widow 7 User must select sort option Click OK button to proceed to next window Flag Exceptions Approve Remaining Window 2 User must mark the requisitions they do not wish to approve Click Process to approve all requisitions not marked Release NGS 6 30 APR Approve Purchase Transfer Requisitions Sort By Options i By IMC Code By Item By Branch By Product Line By Item By Requisition No By Requisition Date By Item By Requisition Date By Branch By Item By Buyer BY Product Line By Item By Buyer By Xref By Item By Buyer By Branch By Product Line By Item By Buyer By Vendor By Product Line By Item By Branch By Buyer By Product Line By Item By Vendor By Product Line By Item By Vendor By Xref By Item By Vendor By Item By Requisition No By Vendor By Customer By Item By Requisition No f APR Approve Purchase Transfer Requisitions Req Date Branch Item ID 03 28 2006 3 MIKECP1 03 28 2006 3 MIKETEST9
44. Cost Unit Wt Vol Status options Acct Grp Itern Desci Desc2 PO Alt Cnv Job No Cmnts ITPA 2013444 J a 50 0 00000 2 OT 0 LIMIT SWITCH PLATES 104 51000 0 00000 N E APPROVED OVE Repeat and Accept This option accepts the current item and allows user to enter another item to be transferred When this option is selected the system will assign a purchase requisition number to each line item entered Accept This option accepts the current item and will bring user to the next step in the BTRM process Update This option allows the user to update the item information ITPA This option is used to go to the Item Time Phased Availability ITPA program IQQ This option is used to go to the Inventory Quantity Inquiry IQQ program ICUT This option is used to go to the Branch Inventory Controls ICUT program REQM This option is used to go to the Requisition Maintenance REQM program Exit This option is used to exit the entry screen Current item entered will not be saved Release NGS 6 30 IC 226 Next Generation Inventory Control Once all items that are required for transfer have been entered the user may proceed to the next step Creating the Transfer Purchase Order Select f BTRM Branch Transfer Requisition Maintenance CREA PO option Req Branch 3 Div E3 Buyer 2 PO Type Frm Branch 1 a ne Auto So v Group Cd TN NOTE If the ar etails A uto SO field Req
45. Details U M Alt i Alt 2 Cony Factor 4lt U M 2 to Stock Rounding Factor Exit Program Press Return to UPDATE existing records QVE If the UPDATE mode is selected enter Item ID Xref or Product Group and press ENTER so the system may search for the desired record s PROMPT Enter U pdate N ext Previous H elo or E xit The system will now bring user into the Qty Input Control field Valid entries for this field are O 1 2 3 or 4 If O is selected which is the typical method for entering quantity enter quantity as follow s 1 Whole stocking units 50 Example A 2 Stocking and partial units 50 3 Example B 3 Partial units 3 Example C The alternate conversion factor for the item must be properly set to define how many partial units of quantity belong to a whole stocking unit The above example A indicates 50 cases ordered B indicates 50 cases and 3 pieces of a case and C indicates 3 pieces ordered Release NGS 6 30 IC 42 Next Generation Inventory Control If the Quantity Input Control field is set to 1 the user has the ability to enter quantities in a secondary unit of measure and have it calculate a primary stocking unit quantity A rounding factor of 49999 may be utilized to force rounding any partial quantity up to the next highest quantity If a rounding factor of 0 00000 is used the rounding routine will calculate partial quantities up or down to the nearest whole quantity It is important to
46. Generation Inventory Control Material Labor Overhead and Outside Click on the lookup button a the cost field If the EXIT e Process Current Transactions PROCESS Options option is selected the following Exit without Processing window will open If the user enters option Continue with the Inventory Transaction Processing the program will proceed to update the data entered in this control This selection is required in order to update the data entered in this control A warning ITE Warnin window will G open Message Upon successful completion of the inventory adjustments entry update the user must run the inventory transaction register to update to the general ledger This function may be run from menu by typing ITR The user should be aware that no general ledger updates for inventory adjustments have been made Should the Inventory Transaction Register ITR be run now Y N ua The user will be asked the question Should the Inventory Transaction Register ITR be run now Y N Note If Inventory to GL interface is not active based on acf option inv001 then acf option inv099 will control whether to prompt the user to run the ITR program Release NGS 6 30 IC 198 Next Generation Inventory Control f the user enters Y the following screen will open Message The following program will execute the Inventory Transaction Register OK All current inventory transacti
47. INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT PROGRAMS ITE INVENTORY TRANSACTION ENTRY Introduction The Inventory Transaction Entry program is used to make On Hand Quantity Adjustments In transit Quantity Adjustments On Hand Quantity Replacements or Branch Transfers to inventory Each time user enters program the system assigns a control number to that group of entries Make all the necessary entries and proceed to the EXIT and PROCESS menu option From this option a window will be displayed which permits the user to update the entries made in this control User may either proceed with updating the control return to the menu to ADD or UPDATE entries or EXIT the program which will delete the entire control without performing any updates The program can be set up to optionally check for valid reason codes in the reference field portion of the program User may establish codes for Inventory Adjustments ACF option inv068 control this option The user may view and update the individual cost elements by pressing the TAB key during this process This feature is control by ACF option inv012 User has the option to prompt for the item account group during the entry of inventory adjustments by setting ACF option inv070 Procedure From the menu 3 enter ITE CE ITE Inventory Transaction Entry SEE Transaction Options Intransit Quantity Adjustment On Hand Quantity Replacement On Hand Quantity Transfer Recover Transactions Exit Program
48. Import Item Desc 2 Item Size 1 Item Xref Sen Item Size 2 Matrix Class Inv Update Prod Category i Bypass Code Mass Remove Unit Factor Pack Qty List Price Material Cast Labor Cast Volume zx Overhead Cost L Weight Outside Cost E Generate Item m Remove Ey v TOTAL Press lt Return gt to ADD records QUE Header Vendor ID Enter a valid Vendor ID Must exist in the VM table Note Product Category Bypass Code Unit Factor Pack Quantity and all of the fields on the second screen from Large Text 1 to Memo 7 only exist in this table i e they are currently not populated to any other table in the system Vendor Item ID Enter the Vendor s Item ID Non Stock Template Enter the Non Stock Template ID to be used Use the look up button to display a list of available templates Screen 1 Item Desc 1 Enter Vendor Item Description 1 Item Desc 2 Enter Vendor Item Description 2 Item Size 1 Enter Vendor Item Size 1 Item Size 2 Enter Vendor Item Size 2 Release NGS 6 30 IC 274 Next Generation Inventory Control Prod Category List Price Volume Weight Generate Item Remove Our Formatted Item ID Our Formatted Item Desc 1 Our Formatted Item Desc 2 Item Xref Matrix Class Bypass Code Unit Factor Pack Qty Material Cost Labor Cost Overhead Cost Outside Cost Release NGS 6 30 Enter Vendor Product Category Enter the item List Price Enter Unit Volume Enter the weight per unit
49. It is used to define how an item is to be used on Modular Kits There are four options 1 thru 4 available Option 1 relates to Modular Multi Level Kits Option 2 is used for a Single Item Option 3 is used for Multiple Items and Option 4 is used for Modular Multi Level Kit Inventory is checked on the Header using option 4 The Where Used Regen button in the KITM program main menu allows the used to delete the records in the where used file and allows the user to re create the file A warning Message will appear before the program deletes the records Release NGS 6 30 IC 335 Next Generation Inventory Control KITM KIT MAINTENANCE HEADER From the main f KITM Kit Header Maintenance menu enter the PEE KITM program Kit ID FEHRKIT Em update Detail 4 Previous Comment 01 Kit Desc SUPPLY KIT 100 Sales Order Print 5 o Help 02 Kit Desc 2 Invoice Print 5 03 Kit Xref SUPPLIES Pick Ticket Print 2 Exit 04 Pack List Print 05 Kit Type Code 06 Pricing Code 1 07 Price Matrix Cd 08 Item Family Cd GROUPl Created 11 30 1999 812 09 Comments N Sales Flag 10 Desc Override N Usage Flag Bur Control Flag 1 12 Review Components Scan Flag Get next record The following fields may be entered KIT ID Enter Kit ID from the Item Master File KIT DESC The default value is the Description 1 field from the corres
50. KIT TYPE CODE Enter the Kit Type Code The following values are valid 1 When type 1 kits are entered in the QUOTE ORDER and BILL programs the components of the kit are automatically read into the transaction as sub line items of the kit header line item This is referred to as exploding the kit For type 1 kits the user cannot change any information on the component lines of the exploded kit However the information on the kit header line is accessible to the user Further if the user changes the quantity ordered or shipped for the kit header line the corresponding quantities for all of the kit s component lines will be recalculated 2 Type 2 kits are exploded by the QUOTE ORDER and BILL programs just as in a type 1 kit However the user will optionally be prompted to review the kit components as they are being exploded The review process allows the user to accept cancel or substitute each component if substitutes have been defined Next the normal prompts will be displayed For type 2 kits the component quantity field is calculated by the system and is not prompted for nor can it be changed The following guidelines apply Component records cannot be removed if the kit is priced at the header level The user will not be able to alter the quantity field on acomponent record Component quantities are calculated automatically based on the quantity of the corresponding kit header line item Componen
51. Non Stock Template record in the NSIM screen The only requirement is that the Item Master record must have the field values set the same as you would want for a non stock item entered in ORDER or BILL When you enter a non stock item the system will default the field settings to that of the Item Master field settings for the record stored in the NSIM screen If more than one record is stored in the NSIM screen the user will be prompted to choose which Template to use The sales of all non stock items are written out to the Sales Analysis Files so that reviews can be done to determine if items could become stock items Release NGS 6 30 IC 264 Next Generation Inventory Control NSIM NON STOCK ITEM MAINTENANCE TEMPLATE Introduction The Non Stock Template Item Maintenance screen is designed to enhance non stock item entry in the ORDER QUOTE and BILL programs The NSIM screen allows an Item Master record to be used as a template for non stock item Detail Line record prompt settings This will speed up entering a non stock item and assure correct data entry ACF option oe085 controls whether the system will allow the user to bypass the selection of a non stock template when adding non stock items to transactions in the applicable programs A non stock template item must first be stored in the Item Master screen IM before it can be added to a Non Stock Template Item Maintenance record f the template item is not in the Item Master re
52. O VALUE SEASON P O UNITS OFF SEASON P O UNITS FUTURE USE FUTURE USE SEASON P O WEIGHT OFF SEASON P O WEIGHT SEASON P O VOLUME OFF SEASON P O VOLUME REVIEW CYCLE SEASON REVIEW CYCLE Release NGS 6 30 Enter the Starting Period of the active season for the product line Enter the End Period of the active season for the product line Enter the Purchase Start Period for the active season for the product line Enter the Purchase End Period for the active season for the product line Enter the value of purchases for the active season Enter the value of purchases for the off season Enter the quantity of purchases in units for active season Enter the quantity of purchase in units for the off season Enter the weight of the purchases for the active season Enter the weight of the purchases for the off season Enter the volume of the purchases for the active season Enter the volume of the purchases for the off season Enter the number of review cycles for the active season The formula is a follows Number of Rev Cycles Active season Total Purchases in Active Season PO Target The program ICRC may be used to compute the Number of Review Cycles Enter the number of review cycles for the off season The formula is as IC 76 Next Generation Inventory Control OFF SEASON REVIEW DAYS SEASON REVIEW DAYS OFF SEASON the VIEW is selected choose the sort opt
53. PO target above which LINE BUY is recommended 50 00 Recommanded Action Items Selection Branch Vendor Product Line Enter Requsition Date On the 3rd window enter the processing option you wish to use in calculating the buy quantity Enter 1 to create requisitions for Demand Action Items Only These are items that are on open sales orders where there is insufficient stock to fill the items Enter 2 to create requisitions for both Demand Items and Stock Replenishment Items A selection of 2 will force you to enter a Branch ID or an asterisk for all Branches Click OK button to proceed to next window Release NGS 6 30 IC 241 Next Generation Inventory Control PRGEN Window 4 f PRGEN Auto generate Purchase Transfer Requisitions Order quantity fencing parameters Order QTY maximum time fence non seasonal Items in periods Order QTY maximum time fence seasonal Items in periods 3 Cance Order quantity fencing parameters C Include current period s usagE of last year Order quantity fencing parameters C Include seasonal items Range of periods to consider From Period To Period Printer report s after processing G enerate NOW or C ron Enter Order Quantity Outer Time Fence In Periods OVE On the 4 window you can change the maximum time fence for both non seasonal and seasonal items These fences are the number of periods to use in
54. Price 00 EA 2 Select from the following options on the options menu ITEM Release NGS 6 30 e Item Selection Item ID Item Xref Item Desc Item Desc 2 Prod Group Commodity Item Memo 1 Item Memo 2 Item Memo 3 Item Memo 4 Enter Item ID OPTIONS icem X Branch On Order on hanD Cust Order Qty per Pack Substitute al Vendor Non Stock Kit Item Comments Item Notes Help Comments Item S A Cat 1 Item S A Cat 2 Item S A Cat 3 Item S A Cat 4 IC 306 Next Generation Inventory Control BRANCH ffl Change Branch Branch On Hand u On Order Sales Order Available NENNEN eee 2 306 Bx 820 18 288 F Open Purchase Orders ON_ORDER This P O option is used to view branch on order quantity A 95 sign is displayed if any comments exist on the Purchase Order f there are any comments on the purchase order Is displayed next to the TT field in the Open Purchase Order Screen Release NGS 6 30 Date Wanted Date Vendor 05 29 2001 05 29 2001 YYY1000 04 16 2007 04 16 2007 RARl1000 05 15 2007 05 01 2007 RARLOOO P O No T3113 13487 13489 On Order UL raih 10 PO 15 PO e Comments Comments This is a Comment in the Header section IC 307 Comments Help Next Generation Inventory Control
55. Rate to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter Memo 1 information for this record Field length is 20 characters Enter Memo 2 information for this record Field length is 20 characters Enter Memo 3 information for this record Field length is 10 characters Enter Memo 4 information for this record This is a numeric field only Enter Memo 5 information for this record This is a numeric field only Enter the Start Date for this record Enter the End Date for this record IC 111 Next Generation Inventory Control PMT PRICE MATRIX TABLE MAINTENANCE Introduction The Price Matrix Table Maintenance program permits the user to maintain the Price Matrix Table There are several pricing methods which may be activated within the price matrix table The ORDER and BILL programs optionally utilize this file to arrive at a selling price for items entered Price Matrix routines offer the end user comprehensive and flexible techniques to arrive at selling prices for specific customers or customer classes items or item classes Procedure From the menu Cf PMT Price Matrix Table Maintenance enter PMT Options Item Matrix Class Customer Matrix Class Update Screen 1 Screen 2 Remove Query 01 Description 16 Sell Price 02 Pricing Usage CD J 17 03 Selling Price 18 Qty B
56. Replace Selling Price Include Customer Discount Prices Replace Selling Price Include Alternate Unit Prices Include Family Pricing Indicator Include Current Gross Margin Include Item Description 2 Include Item Cross Reference Include Alt Stk Conv Include Customer Definition Enter or N Release NGS 6 30 IC 162 Next Generation Inventory Control Enter sort option Item Price Book Sort By Options Customer Matrix Item Matrix Item Desc Customer Matrix Prod Group Item ID Customer Matrix Prod Group Item Desc Customer Matrix Item ID Customer Matrix Item Description Item Matrix Item ID Customer Matrix Item Matrix Item Desc Customer Matrix Prod Group Item ID Customer Matrix Prod Group Item Desc Customer Matrix Item ID Customer Matrix Item Description Customer Matrix Enter the price Report Selection book titles and date of price book Enter Price Book Title 1 Item Price Book Enter Price Book Title 2 Enter Price Book As Of Date 09 22 2005 C Page Break After Item Matrix or Product Group Change Enter Price Book Title 1 Select report output option 2 3 Output report to Release NGS 6 30 IC 163 Next Generation Inventory Control When using the Output ASCII menu option the selection criteria is the same as using the View
57. Req This option is used to accept the item without creating a purchase requisition This option would be selected if you are using the automated replenishment programs PRGEN POGEN that are available This option is used to delete the item from the order This option is used to look up available items that may be substituted This option is used to go to the branch availability inquiry BAQ program This option would be chosen if a user wishes to check item availability at another branch in order to determine whether or not to create a branch transfer for the item From this program user may optionally go to the purchase requisition entry window This option is used to go to the purchase requisition entry window This option would be chosen if the user wishes to create a branch transfer for the item If user selects Accept the system will accept the detail line User may enter another detail line on the order or proceed to accept the order Release NGS 6 30 IC 258 Next Generation Inventory Control If user selects Cancel the system will delete the line from the order User may enter another detail line on the order or proceed to accept the order Release NGS 6 30 IC 259 Next Generation Inventory Control If user selects Substitute the system will display the following window Item Substitution Item 10218 CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUE Branch 2 Substitute Item Description List Price to
58. Safety Allowance Auto Recorder Code Order Point Freeze Indic Date Created fr IMR Inventory Management Reports Selection Criteria Item ID Item Desc Item Desc 2 Item Xref Item Branch Product Group Item SAC 1 Item SAC 2 Item SAC 3 Item SAC 4 Available Inventory Calculation Enter No of Lines to Skip between details Item Status Primary Vendor IMC Code Safety Allowance Auto Recorder Code Order Point Freeze Indic Date Created IC 328 Next Generation Inventory Control Negative Available Report Selections Reorder Point Report Selections Release NGS 6 30 f IMR Inventory Management Reports Selection Criteria Item ID Item Desc Item Desc 2 Item Xref Itern Type Branch Product Group Item SAC 1 Item SAC 2 Item SAC 3 Item SAC 4 Available Inventory Calculation Enter No of Lines to Skip between details Item Status Primary Vendor IMC Code Safety Allowance Auto Recorder Code Order Point Freeze Indic Date Created f WR Inventory Management Reports Selection Criteria Item ID Item Desc Item Desc 2 Item Xref Item Type Branch Product Group Item SAC 1 Item SAC 2 Item SAC 3 Item SAC 4 Available Inventory Calculation Enter No of Lines to Skip between details Item Status Primary Vendor IMC Code Safety All
59. To Brch To Bin Loc From WH From Lot Ser Qty To WH To Lot Ser Flag INE 11 NI TR 3406 03 28 2006 3 1 10 2 E e 7 2 IC 263 Next Generation Inventory Control NON STOCK OVERVIEW FOR PROCESSING NON STOCK ITEMS The process of entering non stock items can be handled anywhere from a simple procedure to a more sophisticated procedure depending on your needs We classify these procedures into three main levels NON STOCK ITEMS BASIC ENTRY All non stock items are entered with a period preceding the part number The functionality of Order Quote Bill and Ship provides a different prompt sequence for non stock items versus stocked items You control this functionality with the PROMPT program in the flexible prompt option This ensures that the proper discounts commissions tax status product group costs etc are established All sales of non stock items are written out to the Sales Analysis Files so that reviews can be done to determine if items could become stock items Item sales reports are often sorted by Product Group Item Sales Analysis Category fields ISAC Fields or other fields Different items can also update different General Ledger Accounts based on the Item Account Group order to ensure that non stock items are updated and recorded in the correct categories it is important that the fields necessary to accomplish this are prompted for and the correct prod
60. Transfer Maintenance program is to allow the user to display in transit records for branch transfers User may flag zero balance in transit records to be removed using this program to clear in transit records Procedure From the menu f IBTM Branch Transfer Transactions Inquiry enter IBTM Item 42436DISK Branch BX Description 3 5 DSDD SOFT 135 TRACKS 1MB Cancel Xref MAXWELLDISKS In Transit Qty 50 Details Ref No From Brch From Bin Loc To Brch To Bin Loc TT Date From WH From Lot Ser Qty To WH To Lot Ser Flag c XXt a ICT MOS me i Tr 10326 Jb lI 14 2 05 02 1994 MA I TR 1144 8 1 08 01 1994 MA TR 1145 4 2 08 01 1994 MA Tt 10387 09 07 1994 TI 10388 09 07 1994 MA Line 1 43 Select REMOVE f IBTM Branch Transfer Transactions Remove and the following window Will Warning Messag open The program will Remove Transactions of all Items whose In transit Balance is zero and The Sum of the In transit quantity of all Transaction records is zero Cancel Proceed Enter PROCEED to Continue with Remove or Cancel to Exit Release NGS 6 30 IC 78 Next Generation Inventory Control If the VIEW option is selected choose the sort and output options From Date Report Options IBTM Branch Transfer Transactions View Valuation Report of In Transit Balanc
61. Usage Avg Lead Time Days Safety Allow Safety Allow Qty Prior Lt Compute Dt Prior LT Days Last Divry LT Days Last LT Compute Dt Order Point Level Order Quantity Line Point Level Status Update current record Avg LT Compute Date 0 5 50 00 01 01 1980 114 01 01 1980 14 7 0 01 01 1980 114 0 0 0 o Minimum Level Maximum Level Surplus Level Order Cost Shelf Life Days Order Qty Calc Cd Record Updated 10 25 0 20 00000 OVER The following fields must be set with a value greater than zero 0 on Screen 2 of IPMB for the branch es that would be replenished from another branch Release NGS 6 30 IC 206 Next Generation Inventory Control MINIUMUM LEVEL MAXIMUM LEVEL SURPLUS LEVEL From the menu enter PMB Window 3 Release NGS 6 30 This field stores the Minimum Level for this Item and Branch The Minimum Level is the ordering control for items which are replenished through Branch Transfers For new Items it is recommended that the Minimum Level be fixed manually by the user After sufficient Usage History has been built the Minimum Level can be computed by the program CMIN This field stores the Maximum Level for this Item and Branch The Maximum level is an ordering control for items which are replenished through Branch Transfers For new items it is recommended that the Maximum Le
62. Use Cust Acct Grp in Use Tax ID POS Type in Use Cust Tax Class in Use Sell Branch in Use Tr From Branch in Use Tr To Branch in Use Update current record Release NGS 6 30 Activate This Program To Interface To G L G L Recap Print Option 5 G L Post Update s Journal Source Code 11 Inventory to G L Interfaced Global ACF Flag setting by Application Module must be activated to interface v to c fy v OPTIONS Update b Next 4 Previous Help Exit IC 221 Next Generation Inventory Control 2 In the GLPAR program select Detail G L Posting Account Maintenance option and add records for the ITR Sequence 39 program for all the branches that you are allowing to do Branch Transfers There are two transaction types in program ITR TR TI When adding these records make sure that you enter the new Inventory In transit GL account as the General Ledger Posting Account GLPAR DETAIL G L POSTING ACCOUNT MAINTENANCE ITR SEQUENCE 39 Add 1 record Inventory and A R Detail G L Posting Accounts for each transaction OPTIONS type as follows Program Name ITR Journal Source ID IJ Update TR Sequence Number TJ b Next Description INVENTORY RCPTS 4 Previous Source Parameters Used General Ledger Posting Account Division hea es Division 1 Ez Help 2 Department Bank Department T G L Account No 120 15 INVENTORY IN TR
63. User will have several options at run time which define Available balance Items selected are defined by the user and output will show AVERAGE USAGE REPORT current inventory balances and average usage information Release NGS 6 30 IC 326 Next Generation Inventory Control Procedure el nn OLLE Inventory Management R EIE Report Selection Critical Inventory Overstock Inventory Negative Available Reorder Point Average Usage Exit Program OVE The user may invoke different combinations of the following screens by selecting from the above report options Slow Moving Inventory Report Selections GITE Inventory Management Reports Message The system will select Dates lt to Entered Date s Last Sale Date Last PO Date Last PO Receipt Date Last Adjustment Date Enter the Sale Date Dates will be selected which are lt to the given date Release NGS 6 30 IC 327 Next Generation Inventory Control Critical Inventory Inventory Management Reports Selection Criteria Report Selections Overstock Inventory Report Selections Release NGS 6 30 Item ID Item Desc Item Desc 2 Item Xref Item Type Branch Product Group Item SAC 1 Item SAC 2 Item SAC 3 Item SAC 4 Available Inventory Calculation Enter No of Lines to Skip between details Cancel Item Status Primary Vendor IMC Code
64. Y item allowed to be sold on the Web or N item not allowed to be sold on the Web The program actually updates the active item field the item table A selection window will open to allow you to enter your criteria e Mass Update Product Group OK ISAC 1 ISAC 2 ISAC 3 ISAC 4 Item ID Cancel Description 1 Allowed on Web Enter Search Criteria for Product Group This is used to List all the records in a list format one line per record if multiple programs were chosen This is used to product a report of all the items selected The output can be directed to the screen printer or hold file This function is used to import items from a spreadsheet This is used to access the help files This is used to execute or run another program without exiting the current program This is used to Exit the program Release NGS 6 30 IC 52 Next Generation Inventory Control IPICM f IPICM Item Picture Maintenance 3 of 24 records Update mode OPTIONS Item ID TAPE 125 1ALL Update Description I TAPE 125 FOR NEW FREQUENCY Default lira STREAMING TAPE Clear Product Group NUDRAULIX Allowed Wf 4 Previous List Image tape 125 gif From PC Thumbnail tape 125 t gif From PC Help Spec File From PC JavaScript Block Qty Input N Image Thumbnail Location usr IBMIHS htdocs devbdl
65. a java script that displays radio buttons for a color like red black white etc or a size and then have the java script automatically enter a message into the comments box without the user having to type something in so the person filling the order knows exactly what to send Block Qty Block Qty Input Input Enter Y if order quantity field will be blocked on the WEB Enter N if order quantity field will be available on the WEB Images can be uploaded from your PC or PC Network directly to the images directory on your WEBSEVER The images directory path is defined in ACF options sys017 sys018 and sys019 To upload an image click on the From PC button for either the image or the thumbnail and choose the directory and image file you want to upload The user also has an option to associate images that are already uploaded to the WEBSEVER images directory by clicking on the e drop down window located next to the Image or Thumbnail entry box and selecting the desire image Click the From Image tape 125 gif PC button to TEES upload new Images Click the button m to manage images that have been already uploaded From PC tape l25 t gif rom PC Spec File a From PC When maintaining the images for displaying items on the WEB this program defines which items you will allow or disallow your users to purchase For each item you may also define the filename of the images large size and thumbnail and any html pag
66. add a new line Enter in the Component ID Desc amp Xref fields Enter in the Qty of Component items required to build each Kit Fields 13 thru 16 are print option fields with 7 options in each field use the on line help from the main menu to choose which option you want The Option Flag 1 field is utilized in type 4 kits only It contains 3 values S R amp A The Standard item uses the code S This Item will be automatically selected A Required Item will use code R this indicates a selection is required You may wish to have an additional add on option to do this use option A Use the Insert button to add a new line To use the defaults you have set up use the Set default button You may use the Update mode to do an update the View and Query modes for lookup purposes and the Remove button to remove a Kit Select DETAIL f KITM Kit Detail Maintenance for the Kit Detail Maintenance Window Kit ID FEHRKIT Kit Description SUPPLY KIT 100 Kit Description 2 Update 01 Line No Sales Order Prt 02 Component Invoice Print Remuve 03 Item Desc Pick Ticket Prt Query 04 Item Desc 2 Pack List Print Vi 05 Item Xref Desc Override MIS 06 Comments a 7 Help 07 Quantity Kit Sales flag 08 Usage flag 09 Price Matrix Set Default 10 Item Family 11 Option Flag 1 12 Exit Details Insert a record The follow
67. an informational field only The unit of measure for length This is an informational field only The item thickness This is an informational field only The unit of measure for thickness This is an informational field only Enter the obsolete code Enter the Item Master Inspection Indicator Enter Y if inspection is required for this item or N if inspection is not required This field stores the drawing reference number assigned to this item This field stores the drawing size for this item The ORDER BILL programs offer a feature which checks to see if a minimum margin is met when items are entered Items falling below the minimum margin will be flagged In order to activate this edit check the OE LINE CONTROL flag must be activated by item The first position of this field controls this feature This field stores the active item revision level This field stores the active routing revision level for this item This field is system maintained This field stores the scrap 96 for this item Enter the Item Master Item Source Code Enter P if this is a purchased item or M if this is a make item Enter the Item Movement Class Code for this item and branch Program IMC can be used to compute the IMC Code of items IC 32 Next Generation Inventory Control FUTURE USE PO DELETE PERCENTAGE LIST PRICE ALT UNIT LIST ALT UNIT SURCH PRICE MATRIX CODE AUTO SUBST CD AUTO SUBST ITEM FUTURE USE COMM
68. and extension 5 Print description and quantity 6 Print description quantity and extension 7 Print description only MEMO 1 Enter miscellaneous memo 1 information CREATED Date kit created SALES FLAG Enter the Sales Flag Valid values are Y or N This flag is utilized to determine if this item affects the item sales quantity history files itu table for a branch This file is geared to feeding sales quantity history to the automated replenishment system and related programs The user will have the ability to smooth out unusual sales quantities for replenishment purposes This flag has no impact on standard actual sales analysis history which stores sales information as it occurred with no smoothing option for unusual sales USAGE FLAG Enter the Usage Flag Valid values are Y or N The item history table ITU utilizes this flag to ascertain whether or not to update usage history statistics This file is geared to feeding usage quantity history to the automated replenishment system and related programs The user will have the ability to smooth out unusual usage quantities for replenishment purposes CONTROL FLAG 1 This field is utilized in type 4 kits It is used to define how this item is to be used in modular kits 1 Modular Multi Level Kit This item is used to define the items within this modular kit This item must be defined in item master but is used solely as a reference for bringing items in this multi level kit together
69. as well as the subsequent general ledger postings Note general ledger postings will only be created when choosing an option to update branch costs If Inventory to G L is inactive this program will update the inventory cost elements only Please review acf options inv085 inv087 inv089 inv090 inv091 inv092 inv093 inv094 inv064 sys032 before using this program Procedure From the menu enter IFCM A IFCM Item Future Cost Maintenance Options 2 Upload Import ASCII Excel File into The ITEM FUTURE COST File 3 Item Future Cost File Maintenance Exit Program If the user selects the first option a new screen will display several options which are available in determining the technique for automatically creating item future cost records based on the old cost for the item Release NGS 6 30 IC 170 Next Generation Inventory Control Automatic F IFCM Item Future Cost Changes Automatic Select Options Selection options User Options To Calculate NEW Cost based on OLD Cost Option 1 No change new cost will equal old cost 2 Apply a percent times old cost to calc new cost Percent 0 00000 Cancel 3 Apply a fixed amt to old cost to calc new cost Fixed Amt 0 00000 Apply fixed amt to items selected with zero cost Y N N 4 Apply a percent times list price to calc new cost Percent 100 00000 Calculated New Cost Rounding Options 1 To nearest 1 decimal no 2 To nearest 2 decima
70. automatically move data from the current item list price file into the item future list price file The user will be able to view and correct all input errors prior to uploading the data to the master file The Matrix Future Price Maintenance MFPM allows the user to gather price matrix records PMT to acontrol file make changes to these PMT records and at a future date roll these changes over and replace the current PMT records with a the newly updated changes The Item Future Cost Maintenance IFCM is similar to the Item Future Price Maintenance program IFLP except it works on the cost records which are for cost plus pricing when using the cost as the base for their pricing system The Item Price Book program IPBK can be used to print pricing data based on different selection criteria This can be done by customer by price matrix codes by item etc Also options are available as to what information the customer wants on the report For example should list price be shown or should costs be printed It uses all of the standard pricing algorithms currently used by the system Rounding Selling Prices in five cent or twenty five cent increments The capability of rounding selling prices to the nearest nickel or quarter is provided by using acf option ar050b this works in conjunction with options ar050 and ar050a Prices can be rounded to a nickel quarter etc This affects programs ORDER QUOTE SHIP BILL IPAI IPBK WEBORDER WEBSHO
71. be generated here When prices are to be changed the system will prompt for a control number the system will generate records in the Item Future Price Table You can then use the Item Future Price Maintenance program IFLP to process the price changes When costs are to be changed the system will prompt for a division department cost method branch id when applicable cost components to select and control number the system will generate records in the Item Future Cost Table You can then use the Item Future Cost Maintenance program IFCM to process the cost changes MASS REMOVE To REMOVE multiple transactions The user may remove individual Vendor Non stock Item Master records through the R emove menu option The user may also use the M ass Remove option to remove multiple records based on the selection criteria they enter In either case the system will not allow the removal of a record for which a corresponding Item Master record was generated and still exists When removing an item the corresponding Non Stock Item UPC record s will also be removed Prior to using the M ass Remove option the user may set the flagged for removal field for individual items through the U pdate ring menu option The M ass Hemove option will allow the user to flag groups of vendor non stock items for removal generate an audit trail of these items to be removed and process the actual removal of the vendor non stock items The user may also
72. box choose a template that you have established for the Vendor items that you are going to import Next in the File box enter the directory path and file name of the MS Excel file There are several options you may choose from by checking the appropriate box You can Import New Records only Update Existing Records or check both If the Keep blank values box is checked it will import any blanks it finds in the corresponding field when it writes out the record You can Validate the Records as they come in or choose no validation not recommended You can also choose to do a test run which will not write out any records to the file but will simulate what the actual run will look like and supply you with a list of any errors After entering the required fielas click on e Data Import Import File the Import Button to begin Teo ee ES processing Vendor Non Stock Item Template 31000000 Vendor ANDE30 File C Import New Records Delete and Import C Update Existing Records C Keep blank values Validate Records C Test Run OVE Release NGS 6 30 IC 281 Next Generation Inventory Control GENERATE ITEM FUNCTION The Generate Item Function allows the user to create Item Master Records from the Vendor Non Stock Item Table The program checks to see if the Generate flag is set to Y It will only select those items Once it has generated the record successfully in the item master
73. costs into vendor item cross reference records only Selected Vendor ID ABC1000 e Branch Selection All branches ected Branch Master Costing Method Selection Roll costs into item master LAST COSTS 2 Roll costs into item master AVERAGE COSTS 3 Roll costs into item master STANDARD COSTS Roll TOTAL costs into LIST PRICE only Move Inc Cost The following screen will be displayed The user will be prompted to enter a Enter Control No 112 OK control to be rolled var The system will proceed to update the VENDORS COST in the Cancel vendor Item Cross Reference Table with the NEW MATERIAL COST for all items in this control with a corresponding record for the item in the vendor Item Cross Reference Table for vendor ID ABC1000 Only the Vendors Cost VIXM Field 01 will be updated no other fields including quantity break costs will be updated If a Cost Conversion Factor is defined for the vendor item VIXM Field 09 the system will apply the cost conversion factor to the new material cost to arrive at the vendor cost Number of Vendor Item Xref records to be updated Enter PROCEED to continue with the update Enter control number Release NGS 6 30 IC 190 Next Generation Inventory Control The warning screen will be displayed if there are any items that are under or over the variance defined in acf options inv086 and 087 Click Y to continue or N to exit
74. determining the transfer quantity for the recommended item calculation Outer Fence Enter the Number of Periods to be used to arrive at an Outer Fence for Order Quantity for Non seasonal Items The Number of Periods entered will be multiplied by the Average Usage per Period to arrive at an Outer Fence Quantity for each Item When the computed Order Quantity for the Item exceeds the Outer Fence Quantity the Order Quantity will be restricted to the value of the Outer Fence Quantity You will have to decide whether or not to include the current period usage in the calculation In most cases you should take the default settings on this screen Click OK button to proceed to next window PHGEN Window 5 f PRGEN Auto generate Purchase Transfer Requis Report Type Options Vendor Items Report N Non Vendor Commodity Items Report N Product Line Items Report N 1 Branch Transfer Requisitions Report ied b Enter D or N On the 5 window enter the Branch Transfer Requisition Report print option Enter Y to print Replenishment Action Reports for Items replenished through Branch Transfers Enter D to print this report with default values of report options Release NGS 6 30 IC 242 Next Generation Inventory Control Enter N to not print report on Branch Transfer items now The report may be printed at any later point in time using the RRAR program Click OK button to proceed to next window
75. entered item A All inventory and cost updates will come from item X Entered item A will automatically be replaced with item X A will also be saved on the line Release NGS 6 30 IC 66 Next Generation Inventory Control ISM ITEM SUBSTITUTION MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Item Substitution Maintenance program is to allow the user to maintain substitute item data Item Substitution logic exists and is handled by entering items in the Item Substitution Maintenance Program ISM and then setting up ACF options oe056 and oe056a When this option is used as line items are entered during order entry a window with recommended items will appear thereby prompting personnel to access and choose substitute products if the quantity available to sell for the primary product is less than or equal to zero The list can contain multiple substitutions for an item i e multiple ISM records can be set up for an item Procedure From the menu f ISM Item Substitution Maintenance enter ISM Primary Item Item Xref Update Subst Item x Subst Xref Query p view Sort By Code se Obsolete Date Help Substitute Memo 1 Substitute Memo 2 Substitute Memo 3 Exit Program Substitute Memo 4 Add records The following fields may be entered PRIMARY ITEM Enter the Item ID for the Primary Item ITEM XREF This field will conta
76. executed and gives Control No Items Exist in Control the user access to fields in the IFLP Product Group table 4lt U M Alt Stk Conv 6 00000 Pricing UM UM Conv 1 00000 New List Price ERE Old List Price 16 0000 New Alt Price 2 83333 Old Alt Price 4 33333 New Price Memo 1 10 00000 Old Price Memo 1 10 00000 Variance Exception al Alt List Price Variance Exceeded If t he user clicks on F IFLP Item Future List Price Program th e u pdat e list d Control Item ID Description 1 Prod Grp New List New Alt List New Pri Memo Old EXAMPLEl test IFLP 2 83333 10 00000 button this ill EXAMPLEZ test IFLP 30 0000 10 00000 20 00000 EXAMPLE3 test IFLP 25 0000 15 00000 30 00000 display all the selected records on one screen and allows the user maintain all records on one screen lt Item ID EXAMPLEl test Old List Price 16 0000 Item Xref Old Alt Price 4 33333 Product Group IFLP Alt Stk Conv 6 00000 Old Price Memo 1 10 00000 Control No MMM 3 Items Prc UM Conv 1 00000 PK Var Exception Alt List Price Variance Exceeded Record 1 of 3 Release NGS 6 30 IC 152 Next Generation Inventory Control The Print option allows the user to get a hard copy of the selected records The Excel option allows the user to export the selected records to an excel file Release NGS 6 30 f Report Wed Feb 17 2010 14 44 05 C
77. for the current closing date Furge Inventory Transaction Records This purge removes records from the itemtran table based on an ACF option which indicates how many days desires to keep records in this file Only records older than the specified number of days will be purged Purge Zero Branch Location Records This purge will remove records from the itembrch or itemloc files if all quantity balances are zero in the record Enter Printer ID lt Return gt for default printer Printer should be on line and ready Press Return to continue Release NGS 6 30 IC 355
78. for those branch es You would set up the matrix so that the sell price would be at zero dollars The costs on these orders are controlled by a series of ACF options The shipping branch will reduce their inventory value and the receiving branch inventory value will be increased based upon the settings in these ACF options Release NGS 6 30 IC 210 Next Generation Inventory Control From the menu PMT Price Matrix Table Maintenance enter PMT Options Item Matrix Class ALL Customer Matrix Class BRANCH Update Screen 1 Screen 2 Duplicate b Next 01 Description TRANSFERS 16 Sell Price 4 Previous 02 Pricing Usage CD 1 17 03 Selling Price 18 Qty Break Option 04 Alt Sell Price 19 Qty Break Value Exit Help 05 Price Adj Amt 06 Price Adj Amt 07 Pricing U M LVL Qty Break 08 Pricing U M Conv 1 1 09 Promo Usage 10 Promo Start Date 01 01 1980 fia 11 Promo End Date 01 01 1980 112 12 Promo Rate 13 Memo Price 1 14 Memo Price 2 15 Update current record Record Updated GYR ACF OPTIONS ar091 Bill Update Transfer PO s Item Unit Cost This option determines whether the PO cost on a PO branch transfer should be recalculated when the corresponding transfer order is billed based on either the TOTAL unit cost on the invoice or the MATERIAL unit cost on the invoice Note that the invoice must be billed prior t
79. have been approved you must proceed to the POGEN program This program is run to create both the branch transfer purchase order and branch transfer sales order for the approved branch transfer requisitions From the menu enter POGEN to go to the Purchase Transfer Order Generation program e POGEN Purchase Transfer SEE Order Type Options Purchase Orders Only Branch Control Number Requisition Number Sales Order Number Requisition Date Sales Order Line No Group Code o Customer ID Requisition Type Ship To ID Item ID Item Description Item Xref Item Type Commodity Product Line Item SAC 1 Product Group Item SAC 2 Item Status Item SAC 3 Buyer Item SAC 4 Primary Vendor aul Last Activity Date IMC Code Report Type Enter Search Criteria For Branch On the 2 window enter criteria to select approved requisitions for You must enter a Brand ID or an asterisk for all branches Click OK button to proceed to next window Release NGS 6 30 IC 250 Next Generation Inventory Control UNGEN POGEN Purchase Transfer Generation Transfer SEE Branch Grouping Options OK Group Requisitions across Branches O Hirth Cancel Product Line Grouping Options Group Requisitions within a Product Line Group Requisitions across Product Lines Purchase Order Date 03 29 2006 BEJ Print PO Report Afte
80. in the output of the Pack List Print program The following values are allowed Release NGS 6 30 IC 344 Next Generation Inventory Control 1 Do not print the kit header line Print description quantity price and extension Print description price and extension Print description and extension Print description and quantity Print description quantity and extension Print description only N NO DESC OVERRIDE Enter the Description Override flag If set to N for No the IM program will automatically update the Description Description2 and XREF fields in the Kit header record whenever the corresponding fields are changed in the item record No means the user has not overridden the description or xref fields If set to Y for Yes then the IM program will not update these fields because the user has overridden them COMMENTS A Y in this field indicates there are comments for this Kit A N in this field indicates there are no comments for this Kit If Y is present the user will have the option to insert comment lines of description that are related directly to this Kit SALES FLAG Enter the Sales Flag Valid values are Y or N The item history table ITU utilizes this flag to ascertain whether or not to update sales history statistics This file is geared to feeding sales quantity history to the automated replenishment system and related programs The user will have the ability
81. is selected choose the Sort Print Sony opo Heport Form and Output options J Item Xref By Item Iss Inventory Stock Status Report Cancel Product Group By Item Print Options Include Positive Balance Items Include Negative Balance Items C Include Zero Balance Items Report Form Options Select L ong or S hort Form S Output To Options Output to S creen P rinter Hjold File E X cel or C ron s Enter the EE 155 Inventory Stock Status Report selection criteria Selection Criteria Item Number Description Description 2 Item Xref Item Type Code Item SAC 1 Product Group Item SAC 2 Item Status Code Item SAC Commodity Code Item SAC 4 Item Price Matrix Enter Item ID selection Release NGS 6 30 IC 317 Next Generation Inventory Control If Option 2 is selected choose the Sort Print Report Form and Output options OK Branch by Item ID 155 Inventory Stock Status Report Sort By Options Cancel Item Xref by Branch Branch by Item Xref Product Group By Item Branch By Product Group By Item Print Options Include Positive Balance Items Include Negative Balance Items C Include Zero Balance Items Report Form Options Select L ong or S hort Form S Output To Options Output to S creen P rinter H old File or C ron 5 v Enter the a OLE Inventory Stock Status R
82. is used Refer to the Insurance Codes Table in the Appendix following the Order Management section for Insurance Code definitions INSURANCE RATE Enter insurance rate FUTURE USE HANDLING The programs ORDER and BILL have several methods of automatically CHARGE CODE calculating a handling charge Customer and Item fields control the usage of the feature Refer to the Handling Charge Codes Table in the Appendix following the Order Management section for Handling Charge Code definitions HANDLING Enter a handling charge rate CHARGE RATE HANDLING Enter the handling charge table maintained through the HTM program CHARGE TABLE ADVERTISING The ORDER and BILL programs allow the user to calculate an advertising ALLOWANCE CODE allowance amount Refer to the Advertising Allowance Codes Table in the Appendix following the Order Management section for Advertising Allowance Code definitions ADVERTISING Enter advertising allowance rate ALLOWANCE RATE FUTURE USE REBATE CODE Rebate codes are required in order to properly calculate rebate amounts on the transaction Refer to the Rebate Codes Table in the Appendix of the Order Management section REBATE RATE Enter the rebate rate FUTURE USE Release NGS 6 30 IC 135 Next Generation Inventory Control FAMILY PRICE Enter the item master family code associated with this item Programs CODE ORDER and BILL allow the user to employ pricing to items based on a family of items rather t
83. item Overhead codes are maintained through program OVRM The user may enter a free form cost memo field for miscellaneous use The LIST option allows the user to enter their selection criteria and then view all the selected records with the most important fields listed on one screen If the user double clicks on any of the records or highlights a record and clicks the OK button the ICM main edit program is executed and gives the user access to all the fields in the ICM table f ICM Item Cost Maintenance View Sort By Options Item Description OK Cancel Item Cross Reference User Entered Sort Field Name s a b c d e Help Print Format Options Select L ong or Sjhort Form 5 Output To Option Output to S creen P rinter or H old File S Fi Print Comments Comment Type IC 169 Next Generation Inventory Control IFCM ITEM FUTURE COST MAINTENANCE Introduction The Item Future Cost program permits the user to create a control file of item records where a new future cost may be stored and rolled over into the item master file and or item branch file on demand The user has the option to manually build records in this file or to automatically move data from the current item file into the item future cost file or import records from an ASCII or Excel file If Inventory to G L is active this program is used to update the inventory cost elements
84. labor or overhead costs in the kit header item record and those costs will be included in the cost rollup This cost rollup process occurs during the initial explosion of the kit or any Release NGS 6 30 IC 338 Next Generation Inventory Control time add a new component to a kit in QUOTE ORDER or BILL Kits are never re costed when priced at the header level The kit header record is recalculated after the cost rollup This means that pricing on a cost plus basis will work properly for kits Kits may be recosted when priced at the header level by setting ACF option ar161 to a value of 1 Recalculations occur when a quote is released to an order when an order is shipped or billed C Price Components The price for the kit header record will be set to zero Any costs established for the kit header record will apply Each component will be priced according to the rules established for the component Each component line will be extended individually Component costs will not be rolled up they will remain on the component line Normal recosting rules will apply The 2 place value in field 57 OE Ln Ctrl of the IM record controls how an item is recosted A B and D are used in Kit Type 4 kits only A Same as H except cost is derived from kit header No recosting will occur B Same as H except cost is derived from component No recosting will occur D Same as H except cost and price is rolled up from
85. on kits will control how the item is processed Flags in the kit header and detail control several areas of the kit such as How to print on documents How to price and cost How to handle inventory Add On Required and Standard Options Impact of kit on replenishment usage sales history If options available select only 1 or more than 1 1 1 PRICING CODE Enter the Pricing Code This field determines how price and cost values will be calculated for the kit This field works in conjunction with the Kit Type field as defined below Kit Type Pricing Code 1 Header 1 Component H 2 Component b a I e Q N I e Q C5 3 Component H eader The Pricing Code values have the following meaning H Price at Header The price for the kit will be based on the pricing rules established for the kit header item The quantity of kits ordered or shipped will be multiplied by the kit price to calculate the net extension The price fields for all component lines will be set to zero Cost values always follow price values with kits For a kit with Price Code H all component cost values will be rolled up into the kit header record This means that the component costs times the number of components per kit will be added into the kit header costs The cost fields on the component records will then be set to zero Note that you may set up
86. option but a different window will appear to determine where the output will be written to Output ASCII file Output ASCII Enter the field delimeter Enter the output file name price list Enter the directory path Proceed Proceed with creating ascii file Enter a delimeter to be inserted betweer The following is a list of the field numbers in the ASCII File the field description and the field size or type if applicable Output ASCII File Layout 01 Customer ID 10 02 Customer Name 27 03 Customer Matrix ID 10 04 Customer Type 5 05 Cust SA Category A 8 06 Cust SA Category B 8 07 Cust SA Category C 8 08 Cust SA Category D 8 09 Item ID 18 10 Item Description 1 30 11 Item Description 2 30 12 Item Cross reference 25 13 Product Group 8 14 Item Matrix Code 10 15 List Price DEC 16 Alternate List Price DEC 17 Price 1 Memo DEC 18 Price Conversion Factor DEC 19 Item Last Cost DEC 20 Item Average Cost DEC 21 Item Standard Cost DEC 22 Branch Cost DEC 23 Pricing UM 2 24 Stocking UM 2 25 Alternate Stock UM 2 26 Selling Price DEC 27 Alternate Selling Price DEC 28 Sell Price Qty Break 1 DEC 29 Sell Price Qty Brk Price 1 DEC Release NGS 6 30 Next Generation Inventory Control 30 Sell Price Qty Break 2 DEC 31 Sell Price Qty Brk Price 2 DEC 32 Sell Price Qty Break 3 DEC 33 Sell Price Qty Brk Price 3 DEC 34 Sell Price Qty Break 4 DEC 35 Sell Price Qty Brk Price 4 DEC 36 Sell Price Qt
87. option this field will not be automatically changed on subsequent updates or imports Price Matrix Format Item Price Matrix Class Method 0 Leave blank set based item template record when created 1 Set to item id Note that if the Formatted Item Price Matrix Class field was previously manually overridden by the user in the U pdate ring menu option this field will not be automatically changed on subsequent updates or imports Cost Calc Method Item Cost Calculation Method 0 No cost calculation cost will be set to zero when initially created Release NGS 6 30 IC 271 Next Generation Inventory Control 1 Cost will be calculated based on a of list price and a rounding option cost should NEVER be imported Rounding Cost Calculation Rounding Option 1 To nearest 1 decimal no 2 To nearest 2 decimal no 3 To nearest 3 decimal no 4 To nearest 4 decimal no 5 Round up to the next whole no 6 Round down to the next whole no 7 Round to the nearest whole no 8 No rounding Factor Cost Calculation Factor 96 of List Price Cost Factor Import Price Cost Factor 0 Import prices and costs as is Other Value This will be the factor used to divide the price and cost fields by when they are imported from a spreadsheet For example if the selling price and cost have an implied decimal point at the second position for example the selling price data is 15120 the system will set the selling price f
88. proper results Release NGS 6 30 IC 6 Next Generation Inventory Control ITEM AND ITEM BRANCH MAINTENANCE VALIDATION PROGRAMS PGM PRODUCT GROUP MAINTENANCE Introduction The Product Group Maintenance program is one of the programs on the Item Validation Code Menu and is used for building or maintaining the Product Group Codes file Several reports in the system allow for selection and sorting by product group Procedure From the menu enter PGM e PGM Product Group Maintenance Product Group ID Product Description Web Flag Add records OVE The following fields build or maintain the Product Group codes PRODUCT Enter the Group ID for this particular product group GROUP ID PRODUCT GROUP Enter the description for the product group DESCRIPTION WEB FLAG Enter Y to allow product group to display on the WEB Release NGS 6 30 IC 7 Next Generation Inventory Control IPL ITEM PRODUCT LINE MAINTENANCE Introduction The Item Product Line Maintenance program is used to establish and maintain product lines Procedure From the menu enter IPL e IPL Product Line Maintenance Product Line ID Product Line Desc Add records PRODUCT LINE ID Enter the ID for this product line Field length is 8 characters PRODUCT LINE Enter the product line description Field length is 15 characters DESCRIPTION Release NGS 6 30 IC 8 Next Generation Inventory Control P
89. purchase orders for the same branch POR Update Item Last Receipt Date Quantity for Branch Transfers This option controls whether or not the last receipt date and quantity fields in the itembrch table are updated for Branch Transfer transaction types TR TX TM Y Update the Ist rct dte and the Ist rct qty ibr fields with Branch Transfer receipt information N Do NOT update the above fields with Branch Transfer receipt information POR Option to Update Item Costs for Branch Transfer This option controls whether or not Costs will be updated as a result of Branch Transfer Receipts transaction types TR TX TM being completed Y Update costs based on branch transfer receipts N Do NOT update costs based on branch transfer receipts NOTE This option MUST be set to a value of Y if ACF option inv001 is Y Release NGS 6 30 IC 214 Next Generation Inventory Control po057 po060 po061 po062 This option can only be set to N if ACF option inv001 is N If user sets inv001 to N programs POR ITR ICRAR and seq 19 amp 34 of INVR will be DEACTIVATED from posting to the General Ledger POR Transfer PO to Check Billed Quantity This option contains the setting as to whether or not a validation is done at the time a POR branch transfer receipt is being entered that the corresponding transfer sales order has been billed If user is receiving material at the same cost as the invoice this option
90. receiving branch will be increased This entry will further prompt the user to run the Inventory Transaction Register This register is the program that will complete the general ledger entry At this point the Inventory Update has already been completed If you click If you click the cancel button shown above the system will display the Cancel Button following window shown above Release NGS 6 30 IC 235 Next Generation Inventory Control Warning No Transaction Updating will occur Upon Exiting Without Processing ALL Current Inventory Transactions will be purged 4re you sure you want to exit If you select the No Button the system will take you back into the control This option will allow you to enter additional items to be transferred using the existing control or you can update previously entered records If you select the Yes Button the system will exit It will delete the entire control without performing any updates Exit without This option will EXIT the program If this option is chosen the system will processing delete the entire control without performing any updates If you choose to continue with the inventory transfer the following window will display Enter X 1O fen F ITE Warning the Inventory Transaction Message Register 17 Upon successful completion of the inventory adjustments entry update and click OK the user must run the inventory transaction register to update to the
91. search for the correct PMT Price Matrix Release NGS 6 30 IC 109 Next Generation Inventory Control ADV ALLOW CODE ADV ALLOW RATE COMMISSION CODE COMMISSION RATE DISCOUNT CODE DISCOUNT RATE DISCOUNT TABLE HANDLING CODE HANDLING RATE HANDLING TABLE INSURANCE CODE INSURANCE RATE REBATE CODE Release NGS 6 30 Table record Enter the Advertising Code to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Advertising Allowance Rate to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Commission Code to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Commission Rate to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Discount Code to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Discount Rate to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for the Order I
92. t he user TESTO020609 93GG2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 20 19600 1 10000 19 63500 2 20000 43 1 TEST2010 7 93GG2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 10 00000 0 63442 0 53277 0 25969 11 4 ntai n al records TEST2010 3 93GG2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 10 00000 0 63442 0 53277 0 25969 11 4 TES3 93GG2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 14 00000 0 00000 14 00000 0 00000 28 01 on one screen TEST100208 936G2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK 11 00000 22 00000 1 11000 44 00000 78 1 TEST2010 4 93662300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 10 00000 0 63442 0 53277 0 25969 11 4 TEST2010 1 93662300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEU 10 00000 1 10000 19 63500 2 20000 32 9 TESTBLACK 93GG2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 14 00000 0 00000 14 00000 0 00000 28 01 93662300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 3 40000 0 60000 0 50000 0 25000 4 7 020 2 936G2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 3 50000 0 60399 0 50740 0 24732 4 8 02008 936G2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 3 60000 0 61000 0 50740 0 24732 4 9 TEST2010 2 936G2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 10 00000 0 63442 0 53277 0 25969 11 4 336G2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 22 21560 1 21000 21 59850 2 42000 47 4 TESTITOUT2 936G2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 3 46790 0 60399 0 50740 0 24732 4 8 TESTBLACK 93GG2300BLA D CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK 14 00000 0 00000 14 00000 0 00000 28 01 TESTBLACK 93GG2300BLA Ds CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK 14 00000
93. the Item Serial Pattern Maintenance program is to allow the user to maintain a pattern for serial or lot numbers being entered that would read more than the 12 character restriction in all programs that allow entry of serial and or lot numbers Procedure From the menu enter ISPM 7 ISPM Item Serial Pattern Maintenance Type Update Code Remove Key Duplicate Pattern Query Serial Size E l View Pattern 2 Help Scan Lot Size Exit Program Bun Add records The following fields may be entered to build or maintain the Item Lot Serial Pattern TYPE Enter S if this record will be for a serial number pattern Enter L if this record will be for a lot number pattern CODE Enter the code to be used to determine what level the item defined in the key field will be matched against Enter I if the Item ID will be the key Enter P if the Product Group will be the key Enter 11 if the ISAC1 Code will be the key Enter 12 if the ISAC2 Code will be the key Enter 13 if the ISAC3 Code will be the key Enter 14 if the ISAC4 Code will be the key KEY Enter either a valid Item ID or Product Group or Isac1 Code or 2 Code or Isac3 Code or Isac4 Code based on the entry in Code field Release NGS 6 30 IC 45 Next Generation Inventory Control PATTERN SERIAL SIZE PATTERN 2 SCAN LOT SIZE Release NGS 6 30 Enter the pattern of the serial number for
94. the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 31 This option is used to calculate a sell price based on a desired Gross Profit The total last cost for this line item will be divided by 100 00 the price adj amount To have gross profit of 25 over standard cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The standard cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 32 This option is used to calculate a sell price based on a desired Gross Profit The total branch cost for this line item will be divided by 100 00 the price adj amount To have gross profit of 25 over standard cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The standard cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the pric
95. to determine if the transaction should be re priced Certain transactions will allow for re pricing based on this code in conjunction with the item re price code on each line item Both the customer re price code and the line item re price code must be set in order for the transaction to be re priced FO Future Order Releasing may reprice the order SO Standing Order Releasing may reprice the order OR Normal Order may be repriced when billed SI Standing Invoice Release Option in BILL program may reprice This field stores the suggested retail price for this item Enter a 2 character pricing unit of measure description If the user has a LOT price for this item for sale enter a price unit of measure of L to indicate LOT price In this example the selling price is the total lot price for this sale regardless of the quantity entered or price conversion factors The price conversion factor is utilized when the user needs to price an item in a different unit of measure than it is stocked Example An item may be stocked by the EA but priced per hundred In this example the Stock U M would be EA and the Price U M could be C with the pricing conversion factor set to 01000 QUANTITY ORDERED 2500 STOCK U M PRICE U M C PRICE CONVERSION 01000 SELLING PRICE 20 00000 EXTENSION 500 00 Enter the Last Costs for material labor overhead and outside Enter the Average Costs for material labor overhead and outs
96. to smooth out unusual sales quantities for replenishment purposes This flag has no impact on standard actual sales analysis history which stores sales information as it occurred with no smoothing option for unusual sales USAGE FLAG Enter the Usage Flag Valid values are Y or N The item history table ITU utilizes this flag to ascertain whether or not to update usage history statistics This file is geared to feeding usage quantity history to the automated replenishment system and related programs The user will have the ability to smooth out unusual usage quantities for replenishment purposes OPTION FLAG 1 This field is utilized in type 4 kits only S Standard Item This item will automatically be selected R Required Item This indicates a selection is required A Add On This indicates this is an optional add option Release NGS 6 30 IC 345 Next Generation Inventory Control To rebuild the where used file select the Warning Message WHEHE USED This function will delete ALL records in the Kit Where Used File and OK REGEN option re create the file using the current Kit Material header and Detail Files f Rebuild Where Used File Cancel No other KIT processing should be active when this is processing Help The following files are affected kith kitd kitwu Proceed Enter PROCEED to Continue or Click Cancel to Exit Release NGS 6 30 IC 346 Next Generation Inventory Control KINQ
97. update existing records Use the Remove button to remove records Use the Query button to query records Use the View button to view records Use the Duplicate button to duplicate a record Use the Import button to Import records from an excel file Use the Help button to view help on this program Use the Run button to execute another program Use the Exit Program button to exit the program Release NGS 6 30 IC 57 Next Generation Inventory Control The following fields may be entered OUR ITEM ID ITEM DESCRIPTION ITEM DESCRIPTION 2 RELATED ITEM ID RELATED ITEM DESC RELATED ITEM DESC 2 PROMPT MSG LINE 1 2 MEMO 1 2 INFORMATION Release NGS 6 30 Enter the Item ID for the Primary Item This field will contain the Item Description 1 defined in the Item Master for the primary item This field will contain the Item Description 2 defined in the Item Master for the primary item Enter the Item ID for the Related Item This field will contain the Item Description 1 defined in the Item Master for the related item This field will contain the Item Description 2 defined in the Item Master for the related item Enter Prompt Message Information Field lengths are 30 characters Prompt Message Lines 1 and 2 will display in the related items window that opens up during related item entry in the order entry or billing programs For each related item the user may insert text to guide the operator in what to sa
98. user may change any field they have access to with the exception of the vendor id and the vendor item id In addition the formatted item id and item template cannot be changed if the corresponding Item Master Table record has already been generated If the item template is changed any corresponding fields will also be changed based on the revised assignment methods The user may update any of the other vendor fields provided When a formatted field with a manual override flag in the table is updated the flag will be set to indicate that the field was manually overridden When updating fields used by the formatted fields if the formatted field has not been manually overridden the program will adjust the formatted field as well For example if the vendor item description 1 is used in the formatted item description 1 field and the vendor item description 1 field is changed the system will change the formatted item description 1 field as well providing it has not been previously manually overridden REMOVE To REMOVE an entire existing transaction The user may remove individual Vendor Non stock Item Master records through the R emove menu option The user may also use the M ass Remove option to remove multiple records based on the selection criteria they enter In either case the system will not allow the removal of a record for which a corresponding Item Master record was generated and still exists When removing an item the corresponding
99. 0116 0 00000 99698 0 00000 S s032 co ntrols the TESTL TAPE 125 Tape 125 Our 1 Description 101 25330 0 41933 34792 0 41147 y TESTL TAPE TAPES 0 00000 0 00000 00000 0 00000 max im um num ber of TESTL TAPE 526 526 MEG CARTRDICE TAPES 52 12681 1 00002 98497 3 00005 TESTL TAPE 525 SUB 525 MEG CARTRDIGE TAPES 104 80568 0 00000 00000 0 00000 records to be TESTL TAPE 525 525 MEG CARTRDIGE TAPES 100 95358 0 00000 47781 0 00000 TESTL 150 150 CARTRIDGE TAPE 9 54193 0 03810 04113 0 04849 displayed in the LIST hoo anos E ous f TESTL TAPE 126 126 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE 103 59525 0 00000 00000 0 00000 ion TESTITOUTZ 93GG2300BUR CALENDAR DESK PAD BURGUNDY 6 42 68093 0 10000 20000 0 30000 o TESTITOUTZ 93GG2300BLA CALENDAR DESK PAD BLACK NEW 3 46790 50740 Record 1 of 98 If the user highlights f IFCM Item Future Cost File Maintenance a record and clicks on update one button the IFCM Item Xref 2573271 VERS KEYED EXTERIOR ASSEMBLY W Maintenance Program Product Group 1 Item Src Cd piv is executed and gives Control No Item Type Cd Dept al the user access to fields in the IFCM table Item ID 312573271 GD LH LOCK SATIN NICKEL AN New Material Cost 38 61000 Old Material Cost 48000 New Labor Cost 0 00000 Old Labor Cost 00000 New Overhead Cost 0 00000 Old Overhead
100. 12 U M EA a record to be CUTUERE CO i duplicated 4 Previous b Next Help Price Method Cd Sales Agent 1 Contract Price 25 00 Sales gent 2 Exit Contract Alt Price 0 00 Effective Date 01 01 1999 14 Expiration Date 12 31 2099 Hid Contract Qty Comments N Ordered To Date Contract Cost Meth Remaining Qty Customer Item No Update current record Enter search criteria to select the record you wish to duplicate Select D to access the Duplicate Options screen Select 1 to duplicate to other items or 2 to duplicate to other customers Duplicate Options Options Duplicate to other Customers Release NGS 6 30 IC 101 Next Generation Inventory Control Select 1 to f Item Selection duplicate this record to other item Item ID Commodity IDs Item Xref Cancel Item Desc Item S A Cat 1 Item Desc 2 Item S A Cat 2 Prod Group Item S A Cat 3 Price Matrx Item S A Cat 4 Enter Item ID This criteria will duplicate the selected record for all Item records that match the entered pattern Example All items with TAPE CARTRIDGE in the Description field will be duplicated to Customer ID 02468 Select 2 to f Customer Selection duplicate this record to other Customer ID S A Catgry Customer Name S A Catgry B IDs Xref S A Catgry Cust Type S A Catgry D Pri
101. 2 is set to 9 90 then item 2 would also be flagged Note this logic will be used to set the variance exception flag when importing records generating records adding records or updating records Example of Upaate IFLP Item Future List Price Maintenance Item ID EXAMPLEL test Item Xref Control No mm Items Exist in Control Product Group U M Alt U M EA Alt Stk Conv 00000 Pricing UM Prc UM Conv 1 00000 New List Price Old List Price 16 0000 New Alt Price 8 33333 Old Alt Price 4 33333 New Price Memo 1 10 00000 Old Price Memo 1 10 00000 Variance Exception B List Price amp Alt List Price Variance Exceeded VR Release NGS 6 30 IC 148 Next Generation Inventory Control User updates new list price to 17 00 IFLP Future List Price Maintenance Item 0 EXAMPLE Jees Item Xref Lo l Control No MMM Items Exist in Control 3 Product Group IFLP U M Alt U M EA Alt Stk Conv 00000 Pricing UM Pre UM Conv 1 00000 New List Price 17 00 Old List Price m 16 0000 New Alt Price 8 33333 Old Alt Price 4 33333 New Price Memo 1 10 00000 Old Price Memo 1 10 00000 Variance Exception Bl List Price amp Alt List Price Variance Exceeded User responds Yes to recalculate the 0 alternate list price Recalculate New Alt List Pr
102. 24 INVENTORY TRANSACTION ENTRY ITE TRANSFERS 232 AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT PRGEN 239 ORDER ENTRY BRANCH emm eee ee ener 253 ADDITIONAL FILE SET UP FOR TRANSFERS FROM ORDER 253 NON STOCK OVERVIEW FOR PROCESSING NON STOCK 5 264 NON STOCK ITEMS BASIG ENTRY sentinel pestem eta poc peace 264 NON STOCK ITEMS INTERIM LEVEL ciocie centre mH mee 264 NSIM NON STOCK ITEM MAINTENANCE 265 NON STOCK ITEMS HIGHEST meminere 267 VENDOR NON STOCK PROCESSING INTRODUCTION AND 267 VNSITM VENDOR NON STOCK ITEM TEMPLATE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM 269 VNSIM VENDOR NON STOCK ITEM MAINTENANCE PROGRAM 273 DATA IMPORT FUNCTION HIM meme e eme mem eme retener 281 GENERA TE TEM F NGTION ssia EORR PRI DRRTS 282 INVENTORY UPDATE FU NGT QN tire ir e rH nte en Pe ote ente Deed te dee e ete 282 VNSIUM VENDOR NON STOCK ITEM UPC MAINTENANCE PROGRAM 284 PROCESSING VENDOR NO
103. 9 Generate PO req and PO B 999 Generate approved PO req C 999 Generate pending PO req Any other value entered will generate NO Purchase Order transaction ORDER Quantity to be Used to Create Purchase Requisition This option controls the default quantity to be used when creating a purchase requisition from the ORDER program Valid Entries Are 0 1 0 Use the quantity Ordered as the default quantity for the purchase requisition 1 Use the quantity Backordered as the default quantity for the purchase requisition ORDER Quantity Restriction When Creating PO Requisitions This option controls the quantity allowed to be entered when creating a purchase requisition from the Order Entry ORDER program Valid Entries Are 0 1 0 Do not restrict the quantity entered at all 1 Do not allow the quantity entered to exceed the quantity ordered less the quantity committed level 1 picked ORDER Recalc Commit BO Qty When Creating PO Requisitions This option controls whether the committed and back ordered quantities will be recalculated based on the requisition quantity chosen when creating a purchase requisition from the Order Entry ORDER program Valid Entries Are 0 1 0 Do not recalculate the quantities The quantities may be manually overridden by the operator Release NGS 6 30 IC 256 Next Generation Inventory Control oe060 order1x oe061 oe064 oe077 1 Set the quantity back ordered to the q
104. A Price U M C Price Conversion 01000 Selling Price 20 00000 Extension 500 00 If the price conversion factor is not to be utilized in pricing logic enter 0 The following codes describe the several methods offered for promotional pricing In order for promotional pricing to be active the user must have a promotional start and end date A promotional usage code must be present to instruct the program on how promotional pricing is to function The promotional price routine can establish a specific promotional price or be utilized to add an additional amount percent to the normal matrix price PROMOTIONAL USAGE CODE CALCULATION WILL PERFORM AS FOLLOWS 1 The promotional rate field stores a dollar value This rate will be the selling price IC 120 Next Generation Inventory Control Release NGS 6 30 2 10 11 12 13 The promotional rate field stores a percentage The LIST PRICE from the line item shall have the promotional rate percent applied against the LIST PRICE Rate of 10 00 will reduce the LIST by 10 percent Rate of 10 00 will increase the LIST by 10 per cent The promotional rate field stores a dollar amount the LIST PRICE from the line item shall have the promotional rate amount applied against the LIST PRICE Rate of 10 00 will increase the LIST by 10 00 Rate of 10 00 will reduce the LIST by 10 00 The promotional rate field stores a percent The total cost will be increased by the rat
105. ANSIT Exit Branch Bill Method Trans Type Item Acct Group Cust Acct Group Tax ID POS Type Cust Tax Class Sell Branch Tr From Branch Tr To Branch N Y N Y N IN IN N N N N Update current record Please note that if you have multiple fields set to a value of Y a record for each variable for each transaction type must be added Release NGS 6 30 IC 222 Next Generation Inventory Control MANUAL BRANCH TRANSFERS In this procedure the user will have to manually enter all the sales orders and purchase orders required to perform a Branch Transfer Procedure 1 The Branch that is shipping the item creates a sales order in the ORDER program with a Transaction Type of TO Transfer Order The Customer ID will be the corresponding one that represents the Branch that is receiving the item Once the order is entered the system commits the inventory and shows the quantity and order as a Transfer Sales in program Inventory Quantity Inquiry IQQ 2 The Branch that is receiving the item creates a purchase order in the Purchase Order Entry POE program with a transaction type of TP Transfer PO The Vendor ID will be the corresponding one that represents the Branch that is shipping the item Once created IQQ will show the quantity and PO in the PO Transfer field 3 The Branch shipping the item can either do the SHIP function or go directly to the BILL program The SHIP progr
106. Branch By Product Group By Item Run Sort By Options Item Master Item ID Item Xref By Item Product Group By Item Release NGS 6 30 IC 324 Next Generation Inventory Control Enter the desired sort selection for item branch output item master output or both depending on reporting option selected chiera ICRAR Cost Rollover Audit Register Selection Criteria Control Number Item Number Description Description 2 Item Xref Item Src Code Item Type Code Product Group e Item Status Code Commodity Code Item Price Matrix Branch ID IEEE loul i Release NGS 6 30 IC 325 Next Generation Inventory Control IMR ITEM MANAGEMENT REPORTS Introduction The Item Management Report program is capable of generating several different inventory control reports by making selections from a series of screens Select one of the reports as follows Items are selected which are lt to the given date s SLOW MOVING INVENTORY REPORT Items are selected by the following formula CRITICAL INVENTORY REPORT Available Safety Stock 0 Items are selected by the following formula OVERSTOCK INVENTORY REPORT Available Max Stock 0 Items are selected by the following formula BELOW AVAILABLE REPORT Available Committed 0 Items are selected by the following formula REORDER POINT REPORT Available Reorder Point
107. CE PROGRAM This program is used to define a template for vendor items The templates are stored in table vnsitmpl for each Non Stock Template Item entered These templates are used by the VNSIM program when creating or importing vendor s items It is a way to assign prefixes to items manipulate descriptions and generally control how they get created Fields are provided for the vendor id item prefix item id assignment method description 1 prefix description 1 assignment method description 2 assignment method item cross reference assignment method item price matrix assignment method cost calculation method cost calculation factor cost calculation rounding method price cost import factor transaction creation method item status method and the UPC Unit of Measure assignment method Procedure VNSITM VISITM Non Stock Template Item Maintenance Non Stock Template Item OPTIONS Template Item ID Description 1 Sort Sequence Description 2 UOM Source Vendor Non Stock Item Master Parameters Vendor ID Item ID Prefix Item Desc 1 Prefix Item ID Format Item Desc 1 Format Item Desc 2 Format Item Xref Format Price Matrix Format Cost Calc Method Rounding Factor Price Cost Factor Assign Item Status Creation Method UPC UM Press lt Return gt to ADD records QUE The following fields may be entered when in ADD mode Template Item ID Item ID of Non Stock Template Description 1 T
108. Control Item ID Description 1 Prod Grp New Material New Labor New Overhead New Outside New Total GARY COMPS Test Component 2 10 00000 0 00000 0 30000 0 00000 10 Update List enter t heir select ion GARYTESTZ Test 10 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 10 ETE s GARYTEST testl 10 00000 0 00000 0 11500 0 00000 10 criteria and then view CART COMDI Test Component 1 10 00000 0 00000 0 10000 0 00000 10 Remove One GARYLOT Test for lots 10 00000 0 00000 0 07333 0 00000 10 0 TT all the select ed GARY COMPZ Test Component 2 10 00000 0 00000 0 20000 0 00000 10 h h GARY KIT Test Kit 10 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 10 Print records w it t e TESTXY TAPE 125 Tape 125 Our 1 Description 101 26657 0 41182 95 35171 0 41182 197 4 most impo rt ant fields TESTL TAPE 125X Tape 125 new item desc 99 52616 0 41016 94 86414 0 41016 195 TESTL TAPE 1250LD Tape 125 new item desc 101 27966 0 41153 95 29161 0 41153 197 3 list ed on one screen TESTL TAPE 125 KC 125 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE 149 31086 0 00000 00000 0 00000 149 d TESTL TAPEINZ 125 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE 263 33334 0 00000 00000 0 00000 263 TESTL TAPE 125 IN 125 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE 3 00000 0 07500 15000 0 22500 3 TESTL TAPEIN 125 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE z200 00000 1 00000 00000 1 00000 TESTL TAPE 125 HARCO 1 TEST FOR HARCO COSTING ISSUE 0 00000 0 00000 00000 0 00000 N f TESTL TAPE 125 1ALL TAPE 125 FOR NEW FREQUENCY 108 59375 0 41016 93100 0 41016 ot e ac opt ion TESTL TAPE 60 60 MEG CARTRIDGE TAPES 59 1
109. Cost 00000 New Outside Cost 0 00000 Old Outside Cost 00000 New Total Cost 38 61000 Old Total Cost 48000 New Inc Material 0 00000 Old Inc Material New Inc Labor o0 00000 Old Inc Labor New Inc Overhead 00000 Old Inc Overhead New Inc Outside 0 00000 Old Inc Outside New Inc Total 0 00000 Old Inc Total Variance Exception Release NGS 6 30 IC 184 Next Generation Inventory Control If the user clicks on f IFCM Item Future Cost File Maintenance t h e u dat e ist Control Item ID Description 1 Prod Grp New Material New Labor New Overhead New Outside New Total p TESTOS 312573271 GD LH LOCK SATIN NICKEL AN 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 38 6 button t h is TESTO3 312573271X AW GD LH LOCK SATIN NICKEL AN 38 61000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 38 6 TESTOS 312573272X GD LH LOCK ANTIQUE BRASS W 54 64800 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 54 6 display all the restos 312573273 AW GD LH LOCK BRICHT BRASS WH 54 64800 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 54 6 TESTOS 312573274 AW GD LH LOCK OIL RUBBED BRON 54 64800 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 54 6 selected records on 1197021009 9300 CALANDAR DESK PAD ELUE 3 76907 TESTOZ0609 93GG2300BL CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUENEW 11 00000 0 00000 11 00000 0 00000 22 0 screen and TEST1020 1 936GG2300BL CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUENEW 9 97000 0 00000 0 08832 0 00000 10 0 al low S
110. ED to begin updating Release NGS 6 30 IC 283 Next Generation Inventory Control VNSIUM VENDOR NON STOCK ITEM UPC MAINTENANCE PROGRAM This program is used to load stock item master table The multiple UPC codes per item from the vendor non stock ite enter or maintain UPC codes for items residing in the vendor non UPC codes are stored separately in the vnsiupc table allowing for This table is optional but if used it is imported or entered separately m master table If the user is using the feature to automatically create item master records from the vendor non stock item table then UPC codes can automatically be created if this table is populated Procedure VNSIUM f VNSIUM Vendor Non Stock Item UPC Maintenance BAR OPTIONS vendor ID Add vendor Item ID Our Formatted Item ID es Remove Query UPC Interchange Item ID View Interchangeable Desc UPC UM p Help Unit Quantity Memo 1 Information Memo 2 Information Compatibility Obsolete Date Press lt Return gt to ADD records Vendor ID Enter the Vendor ID or click the lookup button to view a list of Vendor Item ID UPC Interchange Item ID Interchangeable Desc UPC UM UOM Quantity Memo 1 Information Memo 2 Information Compatibility Obsolete Date Memo 1 Release NGS 6 30 Vendor ID s Enter the Vendor Item ID click the lookup button to view a list of Vendor Item ID s Enter UPC Code or Interchange ID Enter
111. ERS Introduction The Inventory Transaction Entry program may be used to transfer inventory between branches by selecting the On Hand Quantity Transfer option User may enter the material cost as well as overhead outside and labor costs Procedure From the menu i enter ITE and CE ITE Inventory Transaction Entry SEE select On Hand Transaction Options Quantity Transfer and On Hand Quantity Adjustment click OK Intransit Quantity Adjustment On Hand Quantity Replacement Recover Transactions Exit Program Select Add to f ITE Inventory Transaction Entry begin the in ventory Division Trans Date transfer Department Process Control Number Authorization Transaction Type Reference Item Number Stk UM Description Alt UM Cross Reference Whse Bin Loc Lot Serial Adj Qty UM Mat Cos Enter valid Division ID Inventory Transaction Entry Header Fields DIVISION Enter the control Division for this transfer DEPARTMENT Enter the control Department for this transfer CONTROL NUMBER The system will assign a sequential control number for this group of Release NGS 6 30 IC 232 Next Generation Inventory Control entries TRANSACTION TYPE The system will set the transaction type to TI Transfer Invoice ITEM NUMBER Enter the Item ID you wish to transfer You may use the wild card search if you do not enter the entire Item ID DESCRIPTION
112. H Hem eme enemies 326 CRITICAL INVENTORY REPORT mme mem eme em ene e ee enirn 326 OVERSTOCK INVENTORY meme remm renis 326 BELOW AVAILABLE REPORT toc oet oet obo pere ver per oreet ipee erties 326 BEOBDER POINT REPORT 5 xoc Dr e t P ROCHE RI ORE ER DP Exe ee De n ado 326 AVERAGE USAGE REPOHT ke eren ore Eae shed nk sh aret Erba eau nee eU n eR ak aes 326 SHR zin ITEM SALES HISTORY REPORT 331 KITTING MODULE PROCESSING eee Henne nre nnn nennen ne 333 KITM KIT MAINTENANCE ate inerte tetto tto eet pete ape booten netta 335 MAINTENANCE 336 KITIME KIT MAINTENANCE DETAIL 0 cece eee eee Hm 343 KINQ KIT AVAILABILITY INQUIRY css HH 347 WHERE USED is 5o creed hoe cheat o pew eed deere pede 349 KIT GL i 1i KIT COST LISTING SINGLE LEVEL sse 351 KITIC E nsss KIT COST LISTING INDENTED 353 INVENTORY MONTH END PROCESSING eee eene nennen nnne 355 ITEM MONTH END PROCESSING 355 Release NGS 6 30 IC 3 Next Generation Inventory Contr
113. INVENTORY CONTROL Table of Contents INVENTORY CONT BOL aia 1 ICINTRO INVENTORY CONTROL INTRODUCTION eem HH 5 ITEM AND ITEM BRANCH MAINTENANCE VALIDATION PROGRAMS eene 7 PGMS PRODUCT GROUP MAINTENANCE 0c cece HH 7 jut Et ITEM PRODUCT LINE 8 PURCHASE ORDER PRODUCT FAMILY MAINTENANCE 9 1 ITEM G L ACCOUNT GROUP 10 ITEM SALES ANALYSIS CATEGORY 11 OVRM OVERHEAD MATERIAL RATE 13 BUYER BUYER MAINTENAN GE 52 errore nr area eae ce 14 IUE C iae ITEM USAGE FREEZE CODE 15 JUPM as cnvsaccccsasencinn ITEM USAGE PERIOD MAINTENANCE 16 IURM eee ITEM USAGE RULES 18 ITEM MAINTENANCE PROGRAMSS eessseeeen enne nne nennen nennen nennen nennen nnn 20 ITEM MASTER MAINTENANCE csse 20 ITEM PRODUCT MASTER MAINTENANCE 38 IPMMSC
114. ISSION CODE COMMISSION RATE DISCOUNT CODE DISCOUNT RATE DISCOUNT TABLE INSURANCE CODE Release NGS 6 30 Enter the Purchase Order Entry Delete percentage This field stores the percent of completion for an item This field is utilized in determining whether or not a backorder should be written if the item quantity received is XX XXX percent complete All other backorder codes must be in affect as well as this percentage which usually will default to 100 00 percent This field stores the list price for this item This field stores an alternate list price for this item This field is utilized to store a list price for the alternate unit of measure for this item It need only be utilized if the alternate price is not the result of the list price divided by the alternate conversion factor This field stores an alternate unit surcharge to add to the alternate list price to arrive at the final alternate list price This field stores the item matrix class The item matrix class is used in conjunction with the customer matrix class to find the correct pricing record in the price matrix file The price matrix program can be accessed through program PMT The user may establish various pricing routines based on the item or group of items combined with the customer or group of customers Enter the Substitution code The ORDER and BILL programs allow for automatic item substitution based on codes defined in the customer and item master reco
115. Inventory Control New List Rollover This option will be used to update the new prices in a given control to the item master file The user will be prompted to enter a control f any of the items in the contro are over or under the variance limits defined in acf options inv081 and 082 the following Warning window will display Click No to return and update items in the Maintenance section or Click Yes to rollover all items in the control Release NGS 6 30 E Microsoft Excel itlt xls ia File Edit Insert Format Tools Data Window Help 0 ind 3 p18 Gas 0 x 2110 d 02 vith Changes Loh End Review iS Sia A B mdp Control jitem ID MMM MMM MMM EXAMPLE1 test EXAMPLE2 test EXAMPLE3 test Description 1 New List Rollover Ready Enter Control No Proceed Enter control number e Warning gt gt I Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 re Records Exist in Control Update Item Suggested Retail Price 4s Well As List Price 8 3 Item List Prices amp 2 Item Alt List Prices amp 3 Item Price 1 Values are outside of the normal over and under variance limits defined Proceed with Rollover of ALL Items Anyway IFLP 25 00000 4 16667 IFLP 25 00000 10 00000 IFLP 25 00000 15 00000 lt Enter PROCEED or EXIT Prod Grp New List New Al
116. Item Master Last Cost IM ICM A Use Item Master Average Cost IM ICM S Use Item Master Standard Cost IM ICM B Use To Branch Cost IM ICMB X Use From Branch Cost IM ICMB N Use No Cost On Record inv012c ITE Transfer Customer ID This option will maintain the Customer ID to use for branch transfers when these transactions are done in ITE This ID will update to the cust vend itemtran field This may be used to select ITQ records and to display records in ICUT inv012d ITE TRANSFER Option To Provide Insufficient Quantity Warning This option is used to determine the action to take on transfers entered through ITE Option 4 when there are insufficient quantities in the transfer from branch NULL No warning will be provided The system WILL proceed with the transaction O0 No warning will be provided The system WILL proceed with the transaction 1 Warming will be provided if the quantity to be transferred exceeds the current item branch on hand quantity OR if the item branch record does not exist The system WILL allow user to proceed with the transaction 2 Warning will be provided if the quantity to be transferred exceeds the current item branch on hand quantity OR if the item branch record does not exist The system WILL NOT allow user to proceed with the transaction 3 Warning will be provided if the quantity to be transferred exceeds the current item branch available quantity based on ACF option inv010 OR if the
117. LINER GRAY OAK HEAD acf option Item Desc2 JAMB REPL 079 controls Item Size 1 Item Xref 0101998 the ability to Item Size 2 Matrix Class display this Prod Category mH Bypass Code window If acf Unit Factor 079 is coded Pack Qty a value of 3 Usine O 202000000 acf option Material Cost 40000 0e107 Labor Cost 00000 determines the Volume 5 00000 Overhead Cost 00000 method to Weight 0 00000 Outside Cost 0 00000 search the Generate Item G 0000 Remove N _ TOTAL 1443 40000 vendor non stock table Next record ITEM Comments COMMENTS Allows the user THIS IS NEW DETAIL COMMENT to view any THIS 15 DETAIL COMMENT THAT WILL APPEAR ON comments on THE B2B B2C SALESREP WEB SITES this item There are no more rows in the directi OF Release NGS 6 30 IC 310 Next Generation Inventory Control e Notes ITEM NOTES N Allows the user KT MINOS to view any INACTIVE ITEM notes on this item KIT f kiNQ Kit Availability Inquiry f the entered M 5 Kit ID MIKEKIT Branch 1 is kit ERAT mm E P escription test escription ranc header item this i ue Description 2 Order Quantity 0 option will ref display the KINQ Kit availability Component Details Inquiry Screen Component Description Kit Qty Req d Qty Qty Avail component 1 1 0 4 Qty Short 4 NO
118. Ln Ctrl will control cost recalculation of the components The second position of this field contains the QUOTE ORDER BILL Line Item Cost Recalculation Flag This flag controls the recalculation of line item cost values which can occur in the following situations when you change the Branch field in either the header or line item of a quote order or invoice when you release a quote in the ORDER program when you ship an order in the BILL program At each of these points the software automatically updates the line item costs with the most current cost values for each item You can exercise finer control over this feature by using the following values in the Cost Recalculation Flag 0 recalculate costs as described above 1 do not recalculate costs at all All costs remain as originally brought in 2 only recalculate costs when changing the Branch code or when releasing a quote to an order No cost recalculation when order is shipped Release NGS 6 30 IC 333 Next Generation Inventory Control 3 only recalculate costs when changing the Branch code or when shipping an order No recalculation when quote if any is released 8 do not recalculate costs because we are computing the total cost of a kit from the individual costs of all of the kit s components used internally by the kitting function 9 do not recalculate costs because one or more of the cost values has been manually overridden entered d
119. N STOCK ITEMS IN ORDER QUOTE AND BILL PROGRAMS 286 INVENTORY FORMS 292 TEM INPUT FORM S 292 ITEM LABEL PRINT HH Hmm 295 IBEBL e ITEM BRANCH LABEL PRINT PROGRAM 296 INVENTORY QUERY PROGRAMS lt r enirir reine eee enne nennen nennen nni enne nnn ne 297 IQQ sisi Medes Haas INVENTORY QUANTITY INQUIRY sss HMM He 297 Release NGS 6 30 IC 2 Next Generation Inventory Control errr INVENTORY TRANSACTION INQUIRY 300 IH Qs ITEM HISTORY QUERY 0 tee T eter eee ed pU pepe xU tre EE 303 ITEM PRICE AVAILABILITY INQUIRY 1 0 0 0 HH 305 ITEM TIME PHASED AVAILABILITY 313 INVENTORY REPORT nenne nne nnne nennen nne 315 IK Reiten INVENTORY ANALYSIS REPORT cssssss mener 315 ISS a INVENTORY STOCK STATUS 316 INVENTORY VALUATION REPORT sss IH 320 ICRAR ITEM COST ROLLOVER AUDIT REGISTER ee 324 ITEM MANAGEMENT REPORTS eeeea 326 SLOW MOVING INVENTORY REPORT ssssse I
120. NGS 6 30 IC 177 Next Generation Inventory Control Uploading from an ASCII or Excel e IFC Item Future Cost Maintenance file Options 1 Automatic Selection of Records From ITEM File Into the ITEM FUTURE COST File From the menu enter IFCM Qt 3 Item Future Cost File Maintenance Select option 2 Exit Program Selection IFCM Item Future Cost Maintenance options Imported Cost Unit of Measure Options Click radial ei button to mark E j 2 Cast imported in Pricing Unit of Measure System will convert all costs selected options provided to the cost stock unit of measure based on the price conversion and click OK to factor defined in IM execute Calculated New Cost Rounding Options nearest 1 decimal 2 To nearest 2 decimal no 3 To nearest 3 decimal no To nearest 4 decimal no 5 Round up to the next whole no 6 Round down to the next whole no 7 Round to the nearest whole 8 Mo rounding Item Cost Method Selection Options 1 Item Master Last Cost 2 Item Master Average Cost 3 Item Master Standard Cost 4 Item Branch Cost Selected Branch Imported Cost acf option inv089 controls the imported unit of measure calculation set note below Unit of Measure Options Calculated New acf option inv090 controls the default new cost rounding method when the Cost Rounding imported costs are converted from the pricing to the stocking unit of measure Opti
121. No Item ID Tran Qty Cost Unit Wt Vol Status has a value of Acct Grp Item Desci Desc2 PO Alt Cnv Job No Cmnts the system H m 7 si will create the x transfer sales order as part of this process Enter Division Press Zoom for Lookup REQ BRANCH User must enter the Branch they are creating the transfer PO for FRM BRANCH User must enter the Branch they are requesting the items from ALL OTHER FIELDS User may enter any other field or fields they wish to use to select approved transfer purchase requisitions by Release NGS 6 30 IC 227 Next Generation Inventory Control Once the purchase requisitions are displayed in the window the user must select the requisitions they wish to create a transfer PO for f BTRM Branch Transfer Requisition Maintenance Req Branch 3 Date 03 22 06 A Buyer 1 vj Select None Frm Branch 1 E Want 03 31 06 1 3 Auto So Y Group Cd All Select E mcm Req No Item ID uM Tran Qty Cost Unit wt vol Acct Grp Item Desci Desc2 PO Alt Cnv Job No Update 56213 2013444 50 0 00000 v 2 OT 0 LIMIT SWITCH PLATES 104 51 0 00000 N 6 1 199 Jj L 1 OC ccc I PTT av EECENENNN 1 562 0 104 51 REQM 1 Saas EST CIS Comments em v Help APPROVED Selected Cost 5225 50 Select None This option is
122. Non Stock Item UPC record s will also be removed QUERY To QUERY existing records VIEW To VIEW existing records When using the V iew option the user may sort the output by either vendor id amp vendor item id or by our formatted item id An option is provided to allow the user to include the additional comments item attributes and memo fields which appear on maintenance screen 2 DATA IMPORT To IMPORT records into the vendor non stock tables from an MS Excel spreadsheet Release NGS 6 30 IC 277 Next Generation Inventory Control A Data Import MS Excel File option will allow the importing and updating of items from an MS Excel spreadsheet into the Non Stock Table through the WINGS version of the program The MS Excel spreadsheet must have the first row defined to contain the corresponding field names in the Non stock Item Master Table The system will allow the user to enter the Non Stock Item Template ID the MS Excel file from the PC executing the program import new records flag and update existing records flag The user may execute atest run of the program The system will generate and or update records in the new Vendor Non Stock Item Master Table As the records are imported the system will assign the formatted item id description 1 description 2 item cross reference and item price matrix based on the data imported and the non stock item template settings Note that when updating records if the form
123. OPF PURCHASE ORDER PRODUCT FAMILY MAINTENANCE Introduction The Purchase Order Report Family Maintenance program is to establish and maintain purchase order product families The Replenishment Report optionally allows output to group items by the P O family code for the item Procedure From the menu enter POPF e POPF PO Product Family Maintenance PO Product Family ID PO Product Family Desc Add records OVE The following fields build or maintain the Purchase Order Product Families PO PRODUCT Enter the ID for the PO Product Family FAMILY ID PO PRODUCT Enter the description for the PO Product Family Code FAMILY DESCRIPTION Release NGS 6 30 IC 9 Next Generation Inventory Control IAGM ITEM G L ACCOUNT GROUP MAINTENANCE Introduction The Item G L Account Group Maintenance program is used for building or maintaining the Item G L Account Group Codes The primary use of this file is to allow the user to define a set of codes to be entered in the item master file These codes are optionally used by the programs to interface into the General Ledger based on the Item G L Account Group Code User may set up GLPAR Detail records to use these codes to direct general ledger postings into specified general ledger accounts Procedure From the menu f enter IAGM f IAGM Item G L Account Group Maintenance SEE OPTIONS Account Group ID Account Description Exit Program OVE
124. Once the tables have been populated the records in this table can then be accessed by the order ship bill and ipai programs Options are available to have a vendor s non stock item automatically be created in the item master table during order entry or any of the other programs accessing the table providing the user has the proper security The Generate Item function within this program provides a means to create multiple Vendor Item records based on your selection criteria into the Item Master File table a mass creation method The Inventory Update function provides a means to update prices descriptions etc from the Vendor Non Stock Master table vnsim to the Item Master table for Items that have been created in the Item Master Table this does not create new items it just updates existing records VNSIUM This program is used to load enter or maintain UPC codes for items residing in the vendor non stock item master table The upc codes are stored separately in the vnsiupc table allowing for multiple UPC codes per item This table is optional but if used it is imported or entered separately from the vendor non stock item master table If the user is using the feature to automatically create item master records from the vendor non stock item table then UPC codes can automatically be created if this table is populated Release NGS 6 30 IC 268 Next Generation Inventory Control VNSITM VENDOR NON STOCK ITEM TEMPLATE MAINTENAN
125. Order No T3303 PO Line No 1 No Of PO Lines Generated 1 No Of POs Generated 1 au f Information H Solitaire pE Munics Bartson lt Microsoft protections 2 WRQ Refl T menu 66 251 124 4 5 35PM T Release NGS 6 30 IC 230 Next Generation Inventory Control Click OK You have now successfully created a branch transfer purchase order and transfer sales order The system will set the Customer PO Number field on the transfer sales order to the value of the corresponding transfer PO number The following is an example of the PO Report that is generated F Report Wed Mar 22 2006 Development Database 17 39 08 GENERATED P 0 s REPORT P 0 No T3303 Vendor EAST COAST BRANCH 1 Vendor MIDWEST BRANCH 3 P 0 Date 03 22 2006 100 MAIN STREET Shipto 100 STATE STREET Vendor 2221000 CLIFTON NJ 01001 BUILDING 4 TR Type TRANSFER CHICAGO IL 31554 Ship Via Branch Terms Cust Id Buyer F 0 B H Confirming Taxable Confirm To Wanted 03 31 2006 2013444 03 31 2006 104 51000 EA 5 225 50 OT O LIMIT SWITCH PLATES 001474 Page Control Print Prev Next First Last Print all Printer bigiet GJ copies 1 Page 1 of 1 Jump to Print Pages from 1 to 1 save to PC Release NGS 6 30 IC 231 Next Generation Inventory Control INVENTORY TRANSACTION ENTRY ITE TRANSF
126. P WEBIPAI PMT ROE Release NGS 6 30 IC 92 Next Generation Inventory Control This will affect pricing calculated based on list price price matrix or column pricing Note that contract prices and manual prices will not be affected by this Alternate prices will not be rounded up since the selling price has already been rounded up Family prices will not be rounded up since the selling price may have already been rounded up Rounding will not occur on Customer discounts can be used as prices on IPBK or any other calculations Insurance Handling Rebates ETC Release NGS 6 30 IC 93 Next Generation Inventory Control PRICING HIERARCHY CHART Highest to Lowest Level How the program finds the correct price How this is accomplished Contract Pricing The Quote Order Ship and Bill programs will check to see if a valid contract exists for a particular customer and item The date of the order must fall within the contract effective and expiration dates and the quantity must not cause the optional maximum quantity of the contract to be exceeded If a record is found the contract price will be the selling price If none is found it goes to the next step This is accomplished by entering records in the Contract Price Maintenance Program CPM This type of pricing allows the user to define the selling price for a specific customer for a specific item during a specified time frame up to an optional maximu
127. Phone E E 17 Contact MARY HART 18 Fax No 19 20 Remarks 40 Taxable y 49 Tax Tbl die 50 Tax Cls 42 Priority 3 51 Matrix 43 Ord Rule 52 0 44 53 Vendor 36 45 54 37 Frt Payment 46 55 A R To 38 SIC Code 5200 47 Comments N 56 Ship To Name MIDWEST BRANCH 3 Screen 3 NCH 3 02 Addri 03 Addr2 04 Addr3 05 City 06 State IL CHICAGO 100 STATE STREET Illinois 31567 129 07 Postal 08 Cntry US 09 Attn SMITH 10 Xref MIDWEST 23 A P Terms N30 United States NET 30 DAYS Remit To 11ID 12 Name 13 Addri 14 Addr2 15 Addr3 16 City 17 State 18 Postal 19 Cntry 20 Attn SAME MIDWEST BRANCH 100 STATE STREET CHICAGO IL l Illinois 31567 1291 us zj United States LEN SMITH 31 Formi099 24 PO Terms 25 Contact Lou N30 NET 30 DAYS 32 Cust No 33 S I C SAME EEk Options Update 4 Previous Last Comments Miew Comment Help Run Exit QVIS HM First 4 Previous b Next Comments Miew Comments Mendor Notes ed I 4 26 Phone 3125667654 27 Division HF 28 Dept d 34 Type NEXT GENERATION 35 Buyer DEPARTMENT 1 36 Comments Update current record OVA Our suggestion is to use a ZZ or ZZZ designation as the beginning of the customer and vendor ID when s
128. Procedure From the menu f BTRM Branch Transfer Requisition Maintenance enter BTRM Req Branch Div Date hi3 Buyer PO Frm Branch Dept oa Want q 14 Auto So Group Cd Details Req No Item ID Tran Qty Cost Unit wt vol Status Acct Grp Item Desci Desc2 PO Alt Cnv Job No Cmnts Run Exit Program OVR Enter the following Branch Transfer Requisition Header Fields REQ BRANCH The Branch ID that requires the items FRM BRANCH The Branch ID that is sending the items DIV Enter the Division ID associated with this transfer DEPT Enter the Department ID associated with this transfer DATE Enter the date you are doing the transaction WANT Enter the date the requesting branch needs the items BUYER Enter the Buyer ID of the person doing the branch transfer or leave blank if your company does not use buyer ID s Using the drop down window at this field will display a list of valid Buyers Release NGS 6 30 IC 224 Next Generation Inventory Control AUTO SO This field controls whether or not the corresponding Transfer Sales Order is to be created by the BTRM program Enter Y to auto create the transfer sales order Enter N if you do not wish a transfer sales order to be created We recommend setting this field to a value of Y GROUP CD Enter a user defined group code PO TYP The system will assign a purchase order transaction type of TP Enter the
129. Product Group Maintenance SEE OPTIONS Customer ID Customer Name Update Customer Xref Remove Cust Validation Cd Duplicate Our Product Group Query Our Prod Grp Desc View Memo 1 Information Help Memo 2 Information Memo 3 Information Memo 4 Information Exit Program Add records OVE The following fields may be entered CUSTOMER ID Enter the Customer ID This table allows the user the ability to define a list of valid product groups for a customer The Sales Order Entry program will validate against any records set up in this table to see if customer is allowed or not allowed to purchase items with these product groups CUSTOMER NAME Enter the customer name CUSTOMER XREF Enter the customer cross reference CUSTOMER Enter the Customer Validation Code VALIDATION CODE 1 Indicates user may order only if records have been defined in program for the customer and product group being ordered 2 Indicates user may NOT order any records that have been defined in program CV PGM for the customer and product group being ordered Release NGS 6 30 IC 89 Next Generation Inventory Control OUR PRODUCT Enter our product group Product Groups are entered in program PGM GROUP OUR PRODUCT Enter our product group description GROUP DESC MEMO 1 2 Enter free form message 1 and 2 character INFORMATION MEMO 3 4 Enter message 3 and 4 decim
130. RANCH COST 71 ITEM BRANCH MATRIX 72 n ITEM BRANCH PRODUCT LINE MAINTENANCE 73 IBTM issir ITEM BRANCH TRANSFER 78 IBPOM ITEM BRANCH PLANNING OVERRIDE 80 SPECIAL CUSTOMER S ITEMS CROSS REFERENCE 81 CICR E CUSTOMER ITEM CROSS REFERENCE 81 CGVPGM CUSTOMER GROUP VALID PRODUCT GROUP MAINTENANCE 85 Next Generation Inventory Control CVPGM CUSTOMER VALID PRODUCT GROUP MAINTENANCE 89 PRICING OPTIONS AND LEVELS eeeeeeen Henne nennen nennen nennen nennen 91 PRICING INTRODUCTION AND 91 PRICING HIERARCHY CHA RP seiten nno nt xt o daub et EUR ER 94 CPM rennen CONTRACT PRICING MAINTENANCE ss 96 OM To iiie COLUMN MATRIX TABLE 105 PM Ts iier eti PRICE MATRIX TABLE MAINTENANCE HH 112 eese FAMILY MATRIX TABLE MAINTENANCE ee 128
131. Run Next Generation Inventory Control Enter the IFLP Selection Screen to Automatically Select Items for Future List Price C olx selection criteria G y DER Item ID Product Group Description S A Cat 1 Description 2 S ACat 2 Item Xref S A Cat 3 Itern Matrix Class S ACat 4 Run Item Memo 1 Item Memo 2 Item Type Cd Item Memo 3 Commodity Cd Itern Memo 4 Prime Vendor Control No Proceed Enter PROCEED to begin ITEM FUTURE LIST PRICE file updating Enter Item ID Note Prime When a value is entered in this field the system will only select Item Master Vendor records where at least one of the corresponding Item Branch records exist and the Primary Vendor in at least one of the branch records matches the value entered If there is no match the input record will not be loaded The program will prompt for a control number This control number permits the user the option of grouping price changes into different controls such as different product groupings or of putting all changes under one control To begin updating the control file enter PROCEED e Procssing Creating Control No 111 ITFUTPRC File Working on Item ID TAPEIN2 11 Records Added Updated Record Added Release NGS 6 30 IC 141 Next Generation Inventory Control Upon f Item Future List Price file updating has comple
132. ST cs 12 0000000 Quantities 039153101425 RREFST cs 12 0000000 EA may be input 939153190207 111TR cs 6 0000000 EA as well 082657500601 DEERPARK 1 0000000 082657500608 DEERPARK PK 8 0000000 EA 10987654321 MIKEVEND2UIIMZA 1 0000000 E Total UPC 138 Enter UPC Code or Interchange ID QVE If bar codes can be obtained from your vendor as an alternative to building the interchangeable item cross reference table by scanning each item you may import an excel spreadsheet using the IIM program You would need to get the excel spreadsheet from your vendor add a column for your item id change the first row to reflect the field names in the IIM table that you wish to import and then use the IMPORT function in the IIM program Release NGS 6 30 IC 64 Next Generation Inventory Control ITEM SUBSTITUTION PROCESSING SELECTING ITEM SUBSTITUTIONS Item Substitution logic exists and is handled by entering items in the Item Substitution Maintenance Program ISM and then setting up ACF options 056 and oe056a When this option is used as line items are entered during order entry a window with recommended items will appear thereby prompting personnel to access and choose substitute products if the quantity available to sell for the primary product is less than or equal to zero The list can contain multiple substitutions for an item i e multiple ISM records can be set up for an item Demand for reordering purposes
133. Sell UM 10993 CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUE 10 75 1 EA OK Click on item to highlight then select OK to accept item for substitution on the order CANCEL Click Cancel to delete from the item substitution window This option will accept the original item entered on the order RUN Click Run to exit current window and go to another program Upon exiting from the program you run the system will return you to the above window If user selects Branch Avail Query the system will display the following window f BAQ Branch Available Query Item 10218 UM Quantity Desc CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUE EA 10 L n LL Purchase L E Branch Surplus Available Usage Order Pt On Order Due Date Leat Time Max Xfer 0 180 05 25 2001 0 0 Exit From within the BAQ program user has the following options Query Menu The query menu selection will display programs set up in the baq query menu program To set up this query menu go to program MENUS Select MORE option Add a record or update an existing record Menu name is baqquery You may enter any programs you wish to display Release NGS 6 30 IC 260 Next Generation Inventory Control Purchase Requisition option will display the following NOTE selections of A B C D E are controlled by values in ACF options discussed above Generate P O Requisition Options o B Generate Approved PO Req O ER Cancel C Generate Pe
134. TUS ITEM TYPE CODE COMMENTS ALT S TK CONV FUTURE USE PRODUCT GROUP PO PRODUCT LINE PO PRODUCT FAMILY GL ACCT GRP WEB ACTIVE ITEM TAX CLASS FUTURE USE FUTURE USE WEIGHT VOLUME COMMODITY CODE Release NGS 6 30 Valid entries for the Item Status Code are 1 normal item 2 item to be used on inventory reports but not sales reports 3 item to be used with sales analysis but not on inventory reports 4 item not to be used on either inventory reports or sales reports Assign type codes to identify items by a specific type This field indicates whether comments that pertain to this item are to be maintained To add and maintain item comments enter Y if not enter N This field stores the conversion factor to convert the primary unit of measure into the alternate unit of measure It is important to establish this field correctly when item is originally added because all history and inventory information stores data using this factor No change is allowed in this field once item is added If the primary unit of measure were LB and the alternate was OZ the user would enter 16 00000 as the conversion factor If the primary unit of measure were FT and the alternate was EA the user would enter 12 00000 as the conversion factor The value of this field should be greater than or equal to 1 Acf option inv073 will allow a user to validate the Alt Stk Conversion Factor against the unit of measure and alte
135. Table If the UPC Unit of Measure is blank or the unit quantity is less than or equal to zero in the Vendor Non stock Item UPC Table set the fields based on option 1 instead when adding or leave the fields as they are when updating VNSIM VENDOR NON STOCK ITEM MAINTENANCE PROGRAM This program is used for adding updating and removing records in the vendor non stock item master table vnsim Records may be added manually or they may be imported from an MS Excel spreadsheet by using the Data Import function A mass remove option based on your selection criteria has been provided Once the tables have been populated the records in this table can then be accessed by the order ship bill and ipai programs Options are available to have a vendor s non stock item automatically be created in the item master table during order entry or any of the other programs accessing the table providing the user has the proper security The Generate Item function within this program provides a means to create multiple Vendor Item records based on your selection criteria into the Item Master File table a mass creation method The Inventory Update function provides a means to update prices descriptions etc from the Vendor Non Stock Master table vnsim to the Item Master table for Items that have been created in the Item Master Table this does not create new items it just updates existing records An example of how the Generate Item and Inventory
136. The system will default this field to the value in the item master for the entered item This field may also be used to search for an item CROSS REFERENCE The system will default this field to the value in the item master for the entered item This field may also be used to search for an item TRANS DATE Enter the transaction date you wish to record this transfer for The system will default this date to your terminal date AUTHORIZATION The system will default this field to your user login ID REFERENCE Specify the reference no associated with this transaction You may force the system to use reference numbers maintained in the Item Transaction Reason Maintenance ITRM program by setting ACF option 068 to a value of Y If maintaining valid references use the drop down button to view existing Item Transaction Reason records Once all header fields have been entered you may now proceed to enter the transfer branches quantities and costs Select Add f ITE Inventory Transaction Entry to begin the inventory Division 1 Trans Date 02 26 2010 13 transfer process Department 1 dee Exit Accept Control Number 1574 Authorization Inike400 Transaction Type TI Reference XFER Item Number 2013230 Stk UM BCH Y Description OT O LONG PROJECTING HUB Alt UM WHS N Cross Reference Branch Adj Qty UM Mat Cost Acct Grp Dept From 1 50 32 410001 1 To 3 50 32 410001 1 From
137. To have selling price be 25 00 over list price the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The list price is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by The price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 25 The price memo 1 for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over price memo 1 the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The price memo 1 is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 26 The price memo1 for this line item will be increased by the price adj amt To have selling price be 25 00 over price memo 1 the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The price memo 1 is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be u
138. Update functions can work Suppose you have a vendor that sends you a price list monthly for 5 000 items Of those items you only stock 100 but you want to have access to the pricing and descriptions of all of the vendor s products at your fingertips without creating item master records for each non stock item If your vendor can provide you with an MS Excel spreadsheet you can use the Data Import function of the VNSIM program to upload all items to this Vendor Non Stock Item table Once that s done you can go back and update the items you want to create records for in the Item Master file by setting the generate flag to Y and then using the Generate Item function or you can generate them one by one while in the update mode of the VNSIM program At this point you are finished and you have prices descriptions etc for the items that you do stock and all the other vendor items that you have access to but do not stock The next time your vendor sends you pricing updates you can simply use the same templates import the items using the Data Import Function and then use the Inventory Update function to update the items in your Item Master File Release NGS 6 30 IC 273 Next Generation Inventory Control Procedure VNSIM f VNSIM Vendor Non stock Item Maintenance Vendor ID Vendor Item ID Non Stock Template update Screen 1 Screen 2 Query Vendor Item Information Our Formatted Item Information Item Desc 1 Data
139. a value of G for Generated See help on Generate Item field for all values INV UPDATE To UPDATE information in the Item Master Table An Inv Update option is provided to allow you to update information in your existing Item Master records based on the Release NGS 6 30 IC 278 Next Generation Inventory Control latest data in the Non Stock Items Tables note that this option will update existing items but will not generate new items The system will allow the user to enter selection criteria for the items to be updated and then specify whether descriptions volume UPC codes list prices and or costs will be updated Note that the corresponding fields in any other tables for the item including the order detail table purchase order detail table etc will not be updated When descriptions or volume is changed the corresponding audit records will be provided for access through the Audit Trail Maintenance program ATM When UPC Item Interchange records are to be updated the system will generate and update information in your existing Item UPC Interchange records based on the latest data in the Non Stock Item UPC Table Note that this option will only update and generate records for those items which already exist in the Item Master Table Since Audit Trail records are not currently generated when changes are made through the Item Interchange Table Maintenance IIM or the UPC Load UPCLOAD programs no audit trail records will
140. activity date entered Table name itembrch Field name lastact date ibr There are no Item Branch Table records for the item where the Last Sales Date in the Item Branch record is greater than the last sales date entered Table name itembrch Field name last sls dte ibr The above gives you the items which will be considered for deletion These items will not necessarily be deleted Additional checks are performed prior to actually deleting the items These additional checks are the same verifications that occur prior to items being deleted through the R emove menu option in IM When deleting an item through the Item Maintenance program the system will perform the following verifications on the item prior to allowing the deletion Defined in parentheses are the applicable program name and table name for the transactions No inventory transaction records may exist in the Item Register Table ITR Release NGS 6 30 IC 22 Next Generation Inventory Control itreg The item must not be a kit header item KITM kith The item must not be a kit component item KITM kitd The item must not exist on any orders Note that this could also be orders in process Transaction Type FF or aborted transaction type XX ORDER orddet The item must not exist on any invoice not processed by the invoice register INVR invdet The item must not exist on any shipment confirmation transaction SHIP shipd The item mus
141. activity stored in the item master Branches must be defined in program BRM On hand balances are maintained in the item detail location file with the sum of the location records for an item stored in its respective branch record This file is most commonly used if the user requires On Hand control down to a warehouse bin or lot serial number level If warehouse control is activated the user must enter a valid warehouse number defined in program WHM Bin or Lot Serial Number control allow the user to enter and create location records as needed An item can have either lot or serial number control not both It should be clear that On Order Customer Order Transfer Orders and Committed balances are not maintained in the item detail location file but are maintained at the branch and item master levels The user has the ability to create literally thousands of branch and or location records if required Once the Item Master is built the user needs to utilize program IPMB to set up which items are stocked at which branches Also IPMB defines all the codes that drive the replenishment system Key fields to be maintained are the Replenishment Path Code Auto Reorder Code Vendor ID if applicable and Replenishment Branch if applicable The item branch record controls all the critical balances order timing controls and order quantity controls that automate the replenishment process Each item in each branch must be thoroughly review ed to achieve the
142. al INFORMATION Release NGS 6 30 IC 90 Next Generation Inventory Control PRICING OPTIONS AND LEVELS PRICING INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW There are many different methods of obtaining prices for a customer in the Next Generation System Pricing features include matrix pricing based on cost plus a dollar or percentage amount list price pricing list price less a dollar or percentage amount quantity break pricing customer and or item percentage discounting with simple or chain discounts contract pricing promotional pricing family pricing manual override pricing The highest level of pricing available is Contract Pricing CPM CPM is utilized when your company determines a specific price for a specific item for a customer The contract may expire when date is reached or when a preset contract quantity is exhausted Contracts may also contain a specific cost The next level of pricing is Column Matrix Table CMT and works in conjunction with maxtrix pricing PMT as described below This type of pricing will allow you to drive a customer to different pricing schemes based on certain criteria For example a product may have A B C or D prices In the Customer master a customer may have code A in the price matrix field designating that he receives column A prices However using CMT you can give a customer different prices based on the products being purchased For example if the customer
143. am has no effect on moving inventory The BILL program will close the sales order reduce the On Hand Balance and move the inventory from the Transfer Sales Account to the In transit Account in IQQ The General Ledger gets updated by the INVR program Based on setup of GLPAR as described above at this point there will be a debit to the Inventory In transit account 4 The Branch doing the receiving will use the POR program to receive in the item The POR function once completed will reduce the In transit quantity on the shipping Branch It will also reduce the Open PO transfer quantity and add the quantity received to the On Hand Balance of the receiving Branch The General Ledger gets updated when you update the POR control number when exiting the POR program Based on setup of GLPAR as described above at this point the system will post a credit to the Inventory In transit account The balance in that account after these two steps 3 amp 4 should be zero If it is not then the total material costs on the invoice and purchase receipt record were not the same Release NGS 6 30 IC 223 Next Generation Inventory Control BRANCH TRANSFER REQUISITION MAINTENANCE BTRM TRANSFERS The Branch Transfer Requisition Maintenance program is used to created and maintain branch transfer requisitions The program will allow the user to create the branch transfer purchase order as well as the accompanying branch transfer sales order if desired
144. antity breaks Special promotional pricing can also be set using the Price Matrix table for the customers and items based on a promotion start and end date The customer matrix class for a customer is defined in the Customer Maintenance program CM The item matrix class for an item can be maintained in the Item Maintenance and Item List Price Maintenance programs IM ILP Family Pricing The Order and Bill programs will check to see if Family Pricing applies when an order or stand alone invoice without an order is being initially added After the detail lines are entered and the user proceeds to the summary screen the system will verify if any FMT records exist for the customer family code or ALL and item family code If family codes exist the system will recalculate the price of any applicable items with quantity breaks based on the total quantity ordered for all items in a family Detail lines which used contract pricing will be completely ignored Manually priced lines will be ignored but the quantity on these lines will be included when calculating the total quantity ordered for the item family Family pricing is defined by entering records in the Family Pricing Matrix program FMT There are several pricing methods which may be activated within the price matrix table The program provides up to 8 levels of quantity breaks List Price If no matching pricing records are found in any of the special
145. appear in the output of the Sales Order Print program The following codes may be entered 1 Do not print the component line 2 Print description quantity price and extension 3 Print description price and extension 4 Print description and extension 5 Print description and quantity 6 Print description quantity and extension 7 Print description only INVOICE PRINT Enter Invoice Print Option This option determines how the component line item will appear in the output of the Invoice Print program The following codes may be entered 1 Do not print the component line Print description quantity price and extension Print description price and extension Print description and extension Print description and quantity Print description quantity and extension Print description only N 1 NO OB 1 PICK TICKET Enter Pick Tick Print Option This option determines how the component PRINT line item will appear in to output of the Pick Ticket Print program The following codes may be entered 1 Do not print kit line Print description quantity price and extension Print description price and extension Print description and extension Print description and quantity Print description quantity and extension Print description only N 1 NOOO fF WO 1 PACK LIST PRINT Enter the Pack List Print option This option determines how the kit header line item will appear
146. articular customer may always get price level 1 But for a certain product group he should get price level 2 The CMT table is used to accomplish this The column pricing logic takes place before the standard Price Matrix logic In order to utilize Column Matrix Pricing rules a user must have Price Matrix Table records set up on their system Price Matrix Pricing The Quote Order Ship and Bill programs will check to see if a PMT record exists The hierarchy of checking is as follow s 1 exact match on customer id This is accomplished by entering records in the Price Matrix Table Maintenance Program PMT There are several pricing methods which may be activated within the price matrix table Release NGS 6 30 IC 94 Next Generation Inventory Control and item id 2 match on exact customer id and item matrix class 3 match on exact customer id and an item matrix class of ALL 4 match on customer matrix class and exact item id 5 match on customer matrix class and item matrix class 6 match on customer matrix class and item matrix class of ALL 7 match on customer matrix class of ALL and item matrix class of ALL If no match is found it goes to the next step Price Matrix routines offer the end user comprehensive and flexible techniques to arrive at selling prices for specific customers or customer classes items or item classes The program provides up to 8 levels of qu
147. as an item number which differs from a catalog number that refers to the same item The user may find this item by either item id or cross reference It may be looked at as an alternate way to locate this item ID Field length is 25 characters FUTURE USE UNIT OF MEASURE This field stores the primary unit of measure literal description for this item Example Enter LB to indicate pounds as the primary unit of measure Release NGS 6 30 IC 28 Next Generation Inventory Control ALTERNATE U M FUTURE USE TAXABLE CODE BACKORDER CODE FUTURE USE PRIORITY RULE This field stores an alternate unit of measure literal description for this item Example If this were an item where the primary unit of measure was LB then the alternate could be OZ This indicates pounds and ounces are the primary and alternate units of measure Example A primary unit of measure of FT feet where the alternate unit of measure might be IN inches This field stores a code to indicate whether the item is taxable or not Enter Y to indicate item is taxable or N to indicate item is not taxable This field will store the Backorder Code that is used by the Order Bill and POE programs which indicates whether or not backorders are allow ed for this item Field works in conjunction with customer backorder code The ORDER and BILL programs utilize this field to ascertain whether or not backorders are allow ed When used in the POE program this field
148. ased on achieving certain break levels In this option the break value is applied as a percent or a dollar value on or off Example If break value is a percent and the user wants to allow a 10 discount off the selling price enter 10 00000 To increase the price by 10 enter 10 00000 Release NGS 6 30 IC 129 Next Generation Inventory Control BREAK VALUE CODE BREAK RATE CODE BREAK VALUES 1 8 BREAK RATES 1 8 Release NGS 6 30 3 Family Pricing Method Code is utilized to accumulate quantity from the line items into a total quantity for the family This option then points the program back to normal pricing routines such as the price matrix where the family quantity is used to assist in establishing the extension Example If quantity break pricing were utilized the user would arrive at the price based on the total family quantity but the actual line quantity would be used to extend the line Contract pricing or manual override would not be reprice under this option If the value field is defined as a dollar amount then the value stored which can be positive or negative will be added to the selling price to arrive at the family price 4 Family Pricing Method Code 4 indicates that Family Pricing is based on achieving certain dollar break levels This code indicates that the Break Value Levels in use are for Whole Dollar values ONLY and will default the Break Value code to 2 The break rate under this metho
149. at print will be the same fields that user is prompted for when adding a new item record to the system through program IM Prior to adding new items into the system the user may want to create a source document describing the necessary fields for an item This program prints the blank source document from which may be written on and then this document becomes the source for adding the item to the file The program PROMPT allows the user to control which fields are prompted for when adding a new item This feature is especially useful in the initial conversion for it allows the user to specify how many blank source documents to print Procedure From the menu enter Input Forms Options Maintain Field Definitions Cancel Help Select the option 1 to print out the data input sheet definitions 2 to maintain the data input sheet definitions If Option 1 is selected f DIF Input Forms Print Out Options Output to Option Output to S creen P rinter or H old File EM Enter Number of Copies The program will then prompt for the number of input forms to print If printing to screen program will automatically default to 1 copy on the screen Release NGS 6 30 IC 292 Next Generation Inventory Control Release NGS 6 30 IC 293 Next Generation Inventory Control f the user solects the f DIF1 Data Input Sheet Definitions PO OPTIONS Definitions option the F
150. ate button to duplicate a record Use the Query button to query records Use the View button to view records Use the Import button to Import records from an excel file Use the Help button to view help on this program Use the Run button to execute another program Use the Exit Program button to exit the program Release NGS 6 30 IC 81 Next Generation Inventory Control The following fields may be entered CUSTOMER ID The user may ascertain the correct customer through any of these fields NAME XREF CUSTOMERS Enter the customers item ID ITEM ID CUSTOMERS Enter the customer s description for the item ID DESCRIPTION OUR ITEM ID The user may ascertain our item ID through any of these fields DESCRIPTION XREF MEMO 1 Enter any miscellaneous information Release NGS 6 30 IC 82 Next Generation Inventory Control Select VIEW to choose the sort option CICR Customer Item Cross Reference Maintenance Customer ID Customer Name Customer Xref Customers Item Id Customers Desc Our Item ID Our Item Desc Our Item Xref Memo 1 Enter the Customer ID pog TE fo r CICR Customer Item Cross Reference Maintenance duplicate one OPTIONS Customers part and item number Customer ID ALL1000 Duplicate to another Customer Name ALL SUPPLY S CORPORATION customer Enter the Customer Xref 003 customer id revious name or xref to duplicate from Customers Item Id an
151. ate tables for non stock items that contain the vendor s information including pricing about the items This is used for situations where you may have thousands of items that you can sell but you do not want to populate your active product file with part numbers that you rarely or never use You can now import these items electronically and store them in separate tables You may then pull them into the product file or into transactions as either stock or non stock items on an as needed basis If electronically importing these tables is not an option they can be manually built and maintained The use of an MS Excel spreadsheet is an excellent way to populate these tables Tables vnsim vnsitmpl and vnsiupc along with corresponding programs VNSIM and VNSIUM accommodate the capability of automatically loading or manually maintaining the vendor s items and pricing into an area that will not clutter up the item master files These tables can be used to load vendors catalogs with pricing or items you sell but do not necessarily stock i e non stock items These tables can store information such as the item number and its corresponding UPC codes descriptions selling price cost etc Once the tables are populated they can be accessed by IPAI for checking for price and by other entry programs such as Order Quote Bill Ship Upon entering an item into these programs the programs will search the Customer Item Cross Reference table CICR fol
152. atted fields were previously manually overridden the system will not assign these fields The item cost will be set based on the cost calculation settings in the non stock item template If any of the formatted fields are imported directly rather than set based on other fields the corresponding manual override flag should be set as well GEN ITEM To GENERATE records from the vendor non stock item file to the Item master file A G enerate Item option is provided to generate Item Master records for multiple Vendor Non Stock Item records at one time Note that prior to using this option the user must set the generate flag to Y through the U pdate menu option The system will allow the user to enter selection criteria The system will determine the number of records to be generated based on the selection criteria entered the generate flag being set to Y the formatted item id being valued and the formatted item id not already existing in the Item Master Table The option to generate an individual item will be provided in the U pdate menu option if the formatted item id is valued and the item id has not already been generated This program will perform the actual generation of the Item Master and corresponding Item Planning and Item Branch records Note that once an item is generated the formatted item id cannot be changed through the update menu option Upon successful addition of Item Master records this field would be set to
153. be used to locate the lowest sell price from a group PMT records that may be valid fro a particular customer Family Matrix Pricing is also available to allow the user to establish automatic pricing for items based on the summation of several line items belonging to the same family This may be useful when price breaks are offered to a customer if a certain ordering level is achieved Family pricing allows the user to offer price breaks by summing up what was sold for all the items belonging to a specific item family If a certain user defined criteria is met the customer would be entitled to this special pricing The list is stored in field 108 in the Item Master Table IM This price is the last price the system will use if no other price option has been set up Order discount instructions are maintained on the Item IM and on the customer sold to CM and ship to STM master records Item Master field associated with discounts e Discount code rate or table id 117 Customer Sold To master field associated with discounts e Discount code rate or table id 68 Ship To master fields associated with discounts optional e Discount code 19 e Rate 20 or e Table id 21 The Item Future List Pricing IFLP program permits the user to create a control file of item records where a new future list price may be stored and rolled over into the item master file on demand The user has the option to manually build records in this file or to
154. branch transfers If your branches are not separate profit centers you will need to make the following changes to your General Ledger You will need to create a GL account to track the in transit inventory This account should be an asset account This account will be posted to instead of the following Cost of Good Sold from the invoice register Uninvoiced PO Receipts from the purchase receipt register Inventory Adjustment from the inventory transaction register If you are creating transfer purchase orders and corresponding transfer sales orders you will need to do the following in GLPAR 1 In the GLPAR program select GL Control Parameters Maintenance option Update the INVR program seq 19 Set flag to a Y in field Tran Type in Use GLPAR G L CONTROL PARAMATERS MAINTENANCE INVR SEQUENCE 19 Release NGS 6 30 IC 216 Next Generation Inventory Control GLPAR G L Control Parameters Maintenance Inventory and A R Control Parameters Maintenance Program Mame INVR Sequence Number 0 19 Description COST OF GOODS Division in Use Activate This Program Dept in Use To Interface To G L Bank in Use Branch in Use G L Recap Print Option B v Bill Meth in Use G L Post Update Trans Type in Use i Journal Source Code Item Acct Grp in Use A R to G L Interfaced Cust Acct Grp in Use Tax ID POS Type in Use Global ACF Flag setting by Application Cust Tax Class in Use Module must be ac
155. button on the main menu to proceed the cancel button to exit out the Help button for on line help and the Run button to enter a new program Release NGS 6 30 IC 352 Next Generation Inventory Control KITICL KIT COST LISTING INDENTED MULTI LEVEL Introduction The Kit Indented Cost Listing allows the user to output an indented multi level cost listing This program enables the user to create a report showing the indented costs for multi level kits The user selects all kits or a selected kit ID and the can sort the kit line by number or component ID The cost option includes the Last Average or Standard costs You may print Header or Detail comments and output your report to the screen hold file or printer Other costs are also displayed on the report these include Ext Mat Ext Labor Ext Ovrhd ext Outside and ext Total At the end of the report a total cost for each kit will be displayed After the user has selected the options press the OK button on the main menu to proceed the cancel button to exit out the Help button for on line help and the Run button to enter a new program Procedure From the main GAIKITICL Kit Indented Cost Listing fe fej i Kit Line Sort Options WT m program Run Costing Method Options Last Cost Page Break on Kit Average Cost Standard Cost Es Release NGS 6 30 IC 353 Next Generation Inventory Control After yo
156. button to complete process If you need to modify a requisition you would do so using the UPDATE option in the Purchase Requisition Maintenance REQM program APPROVING BRANCH TRANSFER REQUISITIONS All branch transfer purchase requisitions must be approved before they can be converted into branch transfer purchase orders From the menu enter APR to go to the Approve Purchase Order Requisitions program Release NGS 6 30 IC 244 Next Generation Inventory Control APR Window 1 CF APR Approve Purchase Transfer Requisitions Click Branch Choose Requisition Type for Approval Transter Non Product Line Item Requisitions Only Requisitions n Only Product Line Item Requisitions Only Processing Options Approve all Pending Requisitions automatically Review Individual Requisitions Flag Exceptions and Approve the remaining Requisitions automatically Process all items Select Processing Option Approve all Pending Requisitions Automatically The system will automatically change Status of all Pending Branch Transfer Requisitions from 1 Pending to 2 Approved The system will display the following windows al ponamg APR Approve Purchase Transfer Requisitions requisitions Window 1 Sort By Options User must select i sort option Click By IMC Code By Item OK button to proceed to next By Branch By Product Line By Item window By Requisition No
157. buys a certain type of product he is to receive B pricing instead of A The CMT table can also be used to override the discount commission advertising allow ance handling insurance and rebate instructions normally set up on the item IM and customer sold to CM or ship to STM master records The next level of pricing available is matrix pricing PMT More specifically the matrix will calculate a price based on the customer matrix class CM 51 and item matrix class ILP 111 The pricing may be an actual dollar value or may be based on a percentage factor stored in the table being applied to the list price the last cost average cost or standard cost of the item In addition the matrix file will contain any quantity break levels that result in different prices The pricing associated with the quantity breaks of a record may be either a dollar value or a percentage factor Further more promotion pricing may be setup in the price matrix table Promotion pricing applies from a starting promotion date through an ending promotion date and may be based on an actual dollar value or a percentage factor stored in the table and applied to the list price last cost average cost or standard cost The price matrix program can also be used to override the handling insurance and commission rate and the Handling Table ID Release NGS 6 30 IC 91 Next Generation Inventory Control Another feature of the PMT program is that it can
158. by kit line component id You have the cost option to show Last Average or Standard costs You may print Header or Detail comments and output your report to the screen hold file or printer Other costs are also displayed on the report these include Unit Mat Ext Mat Ext Labor Ext ovrhd ext outside and ext total At the end of the report a total cost for each kit will be displayed After the user has selected the options press the OK button on the main menu to proceed the cancel button to exit out the Help button for on line help and the Run button to enter a new program Procedure From the main f KITCL Kit Cost Listing Single Level menu enter the Kit Line Sort Option KITCL By Line Number program o Selected Kit ID By Component ID Costing Method Option Last Cost Page Break on Kit Average Cost Q Standard Cost OVE Release NGS 6 30 IC 351 Next Generation Inventory Control After you have CAIKITICL Kit Indented Listing entered your selections on the 7 window you can enter the Costing Method Options Cancel costs Last Cost comments and IEO output method Standard Cost on this window C Print Header Comments Comment Type _ C Print Detail Comments Comment Type a Output To Option Output To S creen Pjrinter or H old File OVE After the user has selected the options press the OK
159. cation 01 100 Qty To Stk Cnv Replen Branch Hi Min PO Quantity Transfers Allowed 1 PO Unit Weight Location 2 Unit Volume 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Quantity Per Pack Memo 1 Qty Status Next record The following fields must be set up correctly on Screen 1 of IPMB for the branch es that would be replenished from another branch REPLEN PATH AUTO REORDER CODE Release NGS 6 30 The Replenishment Path indicates the normal authorized route to replenish an item 0 Items which do not have a clearly defined route 1 Items replenished by purchase from an external vendor 2 Items replenished from another branch In order for the system to automatically set the transaction type of TP on a purchase requisition created from an order this field must be set to a value of 2 and the Prime Vendor field must be blank The Auto Reorder Code defines the criteria for deciding whether an Item is to be considered for computation of the Controls such as Average Usage Order Quantity Lead Time etc by the Automated Replenishment System 0 This Item WILL NOT be considered for automated Replenishment In addition to this the Item WILL NOT be considered for any of the functions which compute Inventory Management Controls such as Average Usage Lead Time Order Quantity etc 1 This Item WILL be considered for automated Replenishment and for computation of the vario
160. ce Matrix Enter Customer ID Selection Criteria This criteria will duplicate the selected record for all customer records that match the entered pattern Example All customers with DIST in the Customer Type field will be duplicated to Item ID TAPE 125 Note To duplicate the selected item to ALL existing customers enter at the Customer ID field and select OK Release NGS 6 30 IC 102 Next Generation Inventory Control The Dup Mass feature of this program provides the ability to duplicate an item s or a customer s from one contract to another The features available are Dup Mass F CPM Contract Pricing Maintenance Option allow the user to duplicate items and or customer LIA Cancel customers Contract ID _ Screen 1 Screen 2 Price Method Cd Sales Agent 1 Contract Price Sales Agent 2 Contract Alt Price Effective Date Expiration Date Contract Qty Comments Ordered To Date Contract Cost Meth Remaining Qty Customer Item No Enter Item ID or Click Button For Lookup 1 Duplicate a specific item to additional customers 2 Duplicate a group of items to either all contracts OR to a new contract ID 3 Duplicate a specific customer contract to another customer 4 Add additional items to a specific contract Windows to choose additional customer s will display to help the user choose the customer s or groups of customer
161. ce Matrix Code c By Product Group d By ISAC4 Code By all of the above the order of Item ID then Item Price Matrix Code then Product Group then ISAC4 Code There are two acf options that are used in conjunction with entering records in the CMT program 0e047 CMT ORDER BILL IPBK IPA I Code for Item Match Class Method This option is used in the Column Matrix Table Maintenance CMT program to define what Item Match Class window will be used when adding records This option is used by the Order Ship and Bill programs to determine what the column matrix table should match when calculating sell price It is also used when calculating the sell price for a customer in the Price Book IPBK and Item Price Availability Inquiry IPAT programs 0 NO column matrix table in use 1 Item Match Class entry must be valid Item ID 2 Item Match Class entry must be valid Item Price Matrix Code 3 Item Match Class entry must be valid Product Group 4 Item Match Class entry must be valid S A Category 4 ISAC4 Release NGS 6 30 IC 105 Next Generation Inventory Control 9 Item Match Class entry must be valid Item ID Item Price Matrix Code Product Group or S A Category 4 Code when adding records in CMT The order ship bill ipbk and ipai programs will search in the sequence listed above until a match is found This option may be used in conjunction with acf option 047 0e047a CMT ORDER BILL IPBK IPAI Code f
162. ch transfer requisitions 0 TP 1 TS ORDER Control Setting of the Div and Dept in the Purchase Req This option will control the setting of the Division ID and Department ID on a purchase requisition that is created from the ORDER program Valid option values are 1 and 2 1 Division and department comes from the vendor master 2 Division and department comes from the order ORDER Allow Purch Req Option From Negative Available Window Release NGS 6 30 IC 257 Next Generation Inventory Control This option defines whether the Purchase Requisition option may be accessed when the Negative Available warning window is displayed after the entry of the quantity ordered for an item Valid option values are 0 and 1 0 Allow Purchase Requisition option from the Negative Available Warning Window 1 Prevent Purchase Requisition option from the Negative Available Warning Window Procedure 1 After entering an item Id and quantity on a Sales order the system will warn you that there is insufficient stock available to fill the order A negative availability warning window will display as follows f Warning Negative available will be 10 cancel Substitute Purchase Req There are two pieces of information in the window The negative available quantity and the different procedural options available to you You must select at one of the procedural options Accept Item Cancel Substitute BAQ Purchase
163. codes may be entered 1 Do not print kit line Print description quantity price and extension Print description price and extension Print description and extension Print description and quantity Print description quantity and extension Print description only N 1 NO Of Li Special Note on Printing Kit Header s When printing Kit Header Items from the standard Picking Ticket Forms Print program PTP the system will print the location defined for the Kit Header item when sorted by location or item id However the location in the kit header item will NOT be utilized in the sort What will happen when printing in location sequence is that the kit header item if it is defined in KITM to print on picking tickets will print just prior to the first kit component for the kit with a quantity committed level 2 greater than zero regardless of whether the component prints or not So the kit header Release NGS 6 30 IC 340 Next Generation Inventory Control location will be sorted based on the location of the first component with committed level 2 set PACK LIST PRINT Enter the Pack List Print option This option determines how the kit header line item will appear in the output of the Pack List Print program The following values are allowed 1 Do not print the kit header line 2 Print description quantity price and extension 3 Print description price and extension 4 Print description
164. conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 29 This option is used to calculate a sell price based on a desired Gross Profit The total standard cost for this line item will be divided by 100 00 the price adj amount To have gross profit of 25 Release NGS 6 30 IC 118 Next Generation Inventory Control over standard cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The standard cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 30 This option is used to calculate a sell price based on a desired Gross Profit The total average cost for this line item will be divided by 100 00 the price adj amount To have gross profit of 25 over standard cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The standard cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by
165. cord add the record to the Master first before you create the Non Stock Template record Any Item Master record can be entered as a Non Stock Template record in the NSIM screen The only requirement is that the Item Master record must have the field values set the same as you would want for a non stock item entered in ORDER or BILL The Non Stock Template Item Maintenance has the following Menu Options ADD UPDATE REMOVE QUERY VIEW HELP RUN EXIT e NSIM Non Stock Template Item Maintenance Template Item ID Description 1 Description 2 Sort Sequence UOM Source Add records OYK The following fields may be entered TEMPLATE ITEM ID Enter a valid Item ID You may also click the drop down menu for an item selection window DESCRIPTION 1 This field will contain the Item Description 1 from the Item Master record DESCRIPTION 2 This field will contain the Item Description 2 from the Item Master record Release NGS 6 30 IC 265 Next Generation Inventory Control SORT SEQUENCE Enter the sequence in which this non stock template should be displayed in the order program UOM SOURCE Enter Unit of Measure source code 1 Use unit of measure found in the item master non stock template item 2 Use unit of measure found in the sales order The Non Stock Template Item is used in the ORDER QUOTE and BILL programs When you enter a non stock item the system will default the field settin
166. cord is set up then they can be accessed by all users when the users are adding REGULAR records to the master tables To setup or maintain a default record select the DEFAULT Z option or enter a Z from the keyboard The user will be asked the question Okay to switch to Default Mode Answer Yes and you will be switched to the Default record maintenance section When finished making changes to the default records select the DEFAULT Z option once again and you will return to the regular or normal maintenance mode PURGE The PURGE option is used to mass delete a group of existing records When this option is chosen the user is required to define which record s are to be selected for removal The user must enter the appropriate data by which to search the file and then press the OK button to allow the program to search the file for any record s meeting the entered search criteria The user will be prompted to enter cutoff dates for the item creation date last activity date last sales date last receipt date last P O date and last adjustment Release NGS 6 30 IC 21 Next Generation Inventory Control date The system will optionally display the number of records which will be considered for deletion based on the criteria entered Prompts in the purge window will guide the user with what to enter in order to properly purge records from the file User may optionally set up menu security on the purge option The follo
167. cost will be derived from the item master file The promotional rate stores a Dollar amount IC 121 Next Generation Inventory Control PROMO START DATE PROMO END DATE PROMO RATE MEMO PRICE 1 MEMO PRICE 2 QTY BREAK VALUE QTY BREAK VALUE LEVELS 1 8 QUANTITY BREAK VALUES MEMO FIELDS 3 4 6 7 Memo 1 Release NGS 6 30 The higher of either the last cost or the average cost will be increased by the rate The cost will be derived from the item master file 14 The selling price in the matrix file will be the selling price on the order invoice If quantity breaks are in the matrix and the quantity being ordered shipped qualifies for quantity break discounts then the value or will be utilized to arrive at a selling price The Line Item Discount Code will then be changed to a 4 and the promo rate will be put in the Line Item Discount Rate field The Discount will then be calculated as a per unit flat rate off amount 15 The promotional rate field stores a percent The total standard cost will be increased by the rate The cost will be derived from the item master file 16 The promotional rate field stores a Dollar amount The total standard cost will be increased by the rate The cost will be derived from the item master file Enter the promotion starting date Enter the promotion ending date Enter the value for the promotional rate This field is used in conjunction with acf option OE075 Detail Han
168. counted The number of records counted will display on the bottom of the Screen VIEW The VIEW option allows the user to display information on particular record s to the screen printer or hold file When this option is chosen the user is required to define which record s are to be selected for view The user must enter the appropriate data by which to search the file and then click the OK button to allow the program to search the file for any record s meeting the entered search criteria After selecting the appropriate record s the user will have an option to view the records on the screen printer or hold file Enter S for screen P for printer X for Excel download or H for hold file depending on the desired destination of the view DEFAULT Z The DEFAULT Z option allows the user to switch editing modes from adding and maintaining REGULAR master records to adding and maintaining DEFAULT records DEFAULT records are templates that can be maintained so that values that are preset in the default records are automatically imported to the corresponding master record on an addition Multiple DEFAULT records may be set up and maintained The user may use this mode to add remove or update the DEFAULT records in certain Master Edit Programs such as cm ccm pcm pm pmt glc fmt im vixm and vm Default records are used to PRESET values in chosen fields such as Branch ID Product Group Account Group etc Once a default re
169. ct Comment Description CHARACTERIPMMSC Press To Update Record OPTIONS IPMMSC OVE IPMMSC Update gt Next 4 Previous Comments Exit OVE IC 40 Next Generation Inventory Control Add new f Product Group Comments comments or update existing 27 3 comment Comment ID CIPMMSC Comment Desc CHARACTERIPMMSC recoras COE ETE Update Comments Print Xfer TC ID COMMENTS ADDED INTO IPMMSC IN CHARACTER T Y View Remove All Standard Transfer Set Default View HTML Help Exit Comments Total Comments 2 Row 1 OVE Release NGS 6 30 IC 41 Next Generation Inventory Control IGIC ITEM QUANTITY INPUT CONTROL Introduction The Item Quantity Input Control program is designed to allow the user extended capabilities on quantity input when entering data in programs ORDER BILL and ITE Items may have multiple units of measure by which the item quantity may be entered when ordering This feature extends the normal quantity entry The conversion factors required for these multiple units of measure must be established Procedure From the menu fr IQIC Item Quantity Input Control enter IQIC OPTIONS Item ID S A Cati Update Description i s Acat2 Description 2 S A Item Xref S A Cat Remove Duplicate Prod Group Stock UM Query Commodity Conv Factor View Help Quantity Input Control Auto Display Flag
170. cter Enter to drop that character number when writing the serial number Enter Letter A Z to match the specified letter Enter Number 1 9 to match the specified number The field length for serial pattern matching is 40 characters However the MAXIMUM number of characters that can be writen to the serial number field is 12 The hierarchy to find serial number patterns is Item ID ISAC1 ISAC2 ISAC3 ISAC4 Product Group If utilizing this record for Lot control This field will contain the number of units in a lot If utilizing this record for 1D Scanning IC 46 Next Generation Inventory Control The value in this field would be zero If utilizing this record for 2D Scanning This field will a multiple of the serial size based on the number of units in the master carton For example The serial size is 25 There are 5 units in a master carton The value in this field would be 125 Release NGS 6 30 IC 47 Next Generation Inventory Control IUHM ITEM USAGE HISTORY MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Item Usage History Maintenance program is to allow user the ability to insert override usage history data which will replace actual usage data when various compute programs are run Procedure From the menu f IUHM Usage History Maintenance enter IUHM OPTIONS mem d Item ID U M Desc Branch Frz Reas e
171. customer is billed Both quantities can be shown on the forms print programs tailored to that user ACF option 0e112 will allow a user to control whether or not to recalculate the order quantity sell quantity when a change is made in the ORDER QUOTE or BILL programs to the UM2 quantity Quantity Input Control Code 5 is used for items that are inventoried and sold by the case box piece OR each but priced by the pound LB For example an item is inventoried in boxes with the average weight of a box being 15 25 LBS When the user updates the IQIC for a code 5 the items unit weight in the item master will be updated with the result of the calculation For a more detailed explanation of quantity input control field please refer to the on line help where several examples are defined If the VIEW mode is selected enter Item ID Xref or Product Group and press Enter so the system may search for the desired record s Release NGS 6 30 IC 43 Next Generation Inventory Control Enter the sort criteria IQIC Item Quantity Input Control View SEE Sort By Options Item Description Item Cross Reference User Entered Sort Field Name s Output To Opitons Output to S creen Printer or H old File GIR 1 Make your selection and press RETURN Release NGS 6 30 IC 44 Next Generation Inventory Control ISPM ITEM SERIAL LOT NUMBER PATTERN MAINTENANCE1 2 Introduction The purpose of
172. d Message User may now proceed to ADD new records UPDATE existing records REMOVE records VIEW records or initiate the NEW MATRIX ROLLOVER routine which will actually move data from the Matrix Future Price File into Cancel the current Matrix File These options may be accessed by entering the Matrix Future Price Help Maintenance screen available in this program A MFPM Matrix Future Price Maintenance OPTIONS Control Number Item Matrix Class Customer Matrix Class Update Screen 1 Screen 2 Remove View 01 Description 16 Sell Price 02 Pricing Usage CD 17 03 Selling Price 18 Qty Break Option Calculate Options 04 Alt Sell Price 19 Qty Break Value New Matrix Rollover 05 Price Adj Amt 06 Price Adj Amt 07 Pricing U M LVL Qty Break Value 08 Pricing Conv 1 09 Promo Usage 10 Promo Start Date 11 Promo End Date 12 Promo Rate 13 Memo Price 1 14 Memo Price 2 15 OVE DS IC 159 Next Generation Inventory Control Screen 2 of Matrix Future Price Maintenance Control Number Item Matrix Class Customer Matrix Class Screen 1 Screen 2 28 Memo 1 29 Memo 2 30 Memo 3 31 Memo 4 32 Memo 5 33 Memo 6 34 Memo 7 Update Remove View New Matrix Rollover Calculate Options Help OVE The user will be brought directly into matrix future price maintenanc
173. d the user has the security above to generate items from the Vendor Non Stock Item Master records when running the Order Entry Quote Entry and Billing Entry programs Field Description Contents Program Name order quote or bill Sub Window vnsimovr Type Of Security U ser or P assword User Include Exclude l nclude or E xclude Ring Menu Option V Value User ID or Password Note that the above will place restrictions on which users can generate items and which users can override the item information at the time transactions are created Release NGS 6 30 IC 287 Next Generation Inventory Control Example The user enters item 311400077 which is a vendor non stock item The create flag for the corresponding template is set to a value of 2 which will prompt the user If they want to create an item for this vendor non stock item or bring it into the transaction as anon stock item Vendor f VISITM Non Stock Template Item Maintenance non stock Non Stock Template Item template Template Item ID 31000000 record Description 1 Andersen Windows Shell Item 4 Previous Description 2 Sort Sequence Help UOM Source al vendor Non Stock Item Master Parameters vendor ID ANDE30 Item ID Prefix zh Item Desc 1 Prefix AW Item ID Format 1 Item Desc 1 Format Item Desc 2 Format Item Xref Format Price Matrix Format Cost Calc Method 1 Rounding 4 Factor 59 40000
174. d appear Only certain programs will display the notes entered here If this is an item note entered in INOTE program these notes can display in programs ORDER BILL QUOTE IM ILP ICM IQQ IPAI ITPA POE IPMB ICUT REQM ALL Enter the page sequence Enter 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 If multiple notes exist user may define from 1 to 7 the sequence of the notes to display Enter Transaction Type or ALL User may have notes only display in certain transaction types Example In ORDER or BILL program user may want the note to display whenever a CM transaction is performed IC 49 Next Generation Inventory Control RING MENU TITLE NOTE 1 5 BEGIN DATE END DATE PURGE DATE Release NGS 6 30 Enter Ring Option letter or ALL User may have notes only display in certain ring menu types Example In ORDER or BILL program user may want the note to display whenever ADD mode is performed but not UPDATE Enter the title line for the notes Field length is 20 characters 1 thru 5 Enter the note descriptions Field lengths are 25 characters Enter the beginning date for note to display Enter the ending date for note to display The default value for this field is maintained in ACF option sys004 Enter the value for purging Y or N When mass remove is performed only notes coded for purging will be removed IC 50 Next Generation Inventory Control IPICM ITEM PICTURE MAINTENANCE Introduction The Ite
175. d balances The program advises the user of the prior on hand the actual transaction quantity and the resulting new on hand It also advises user as to which user made the change when it was made the type of transaction entered and which terminal the entry was made on Procedure From the menu ITQ Item Transactin Inquiry enter ITQ Item Number Item Desc Item Xref Remove Reference TT Trans Date Branch User ID Trans Qty UM Old Onhand View Help Run Exit Program Query selected records Release NGS 6 30 IC 300 Next Generation Inventory Control The following selection screen will appear Sample output Release NGS 6 30 Selection Criteria Branch ID Warehouse ID Bin Location Lot Serial Mo Tran Type Tran Date Cust Vendor Control No Source Reference Mo f ITQ Item Transactin Inquiry Item Number TAPE 125 Depth YNNN3 Ion a Item Desc 125 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE Item Xref TAPES Reference 1 1002119 1 1002120 2 1000267 11451 11452 1 1002251 1 1002252 1 1002291 1 1002296 1 1002370 1 1002511 1 1002512 1 1002513 1 1002514 1 1002515 4 4nn2c4c TT Trans Date 04 3 04 12 2003 04 12 2003 04 12 2003 04 11 2003 04 12 2003 05 06 2003 05 06 2003 06 06 2003 06 06 2003 07 11 2003 08 25 2003 08 25 2003 08 25 2003 08 26 2003 08 26 2003 no foe nn Branc
176. d is a When summarizing by family this option will utilize the total net extension for the family If sufficient dollars are met as defined by the family matrix table the rate will be applied to the items selling price on each line and the lines will be recalculated The rate is applied as follows Example If the rate were 10 00000 and the selling price was 1 00000 the family routine will make the new price 900000 Contract pricing or manual override would not be repriced under this option Enter 1 to indicate that the break value levels in use are storing quantity values Enter 2 to indicate that the break value levels in use are storing whole dollar amounts Used in family price method 4 Enter a dollar sign to indicate the break rate is a dollar amount a percent sign 96 to indicate the break rate is a percentage Certain family price method codes will utilize this value Enter up to 8 break levels Enter the appropriate break rate s corresponding to the break level s IC 130 Next Generation Inventory Control Select VIEW to enter the sort option FMT Family Price Matrix Table View Sort By Options i Customer Family by Item Family Cancel Output To Options Output to S creen Printer or H old File S v Release NGS 6 30 IC 131 Next Generation Inventory Control ILP ITEM LIST PRICE MAINTENANCE Introduction The Item List Price Maintenance is one o
177. d length is 10 characters TRANSACTION TYPE Enter the Transaction Type Allowable codes are IA Inventory Adjustment IR Inventory Replacement TA Intransit Adjustment TI Branch Transfer ALL All Transactions REFERENCE REA SON Enter the Reference Reason Code Description CODE DESCRIPTION Field length is 30 characters MEMO 1 Enter Memo 1 information Field length is 30 characters MEMO 2 Enter Memo 2 information Field length is 10 characters MEMO 3 Enter Memo 3 information This is a decimal field MEMO 4 Enter Memo 4 information This is a decimal field MEMO 5 Enter Memo 5 information This is a date field Format is mm dd yyyy Release NGS 6 30 IC 200 Next Generation Inventory Control ITR INVENTORY TRANSACTION REGISTER Introduction The Inventory Transaction Register program controls the printing or screen viewing of inventory transactions entered through the ITE program This provides the user with an audit register of all data processed and optionally allows integration for records into the General Ledger Procedure odd e f ITR Inventory Transaction Register enter ITR Message The following program will execute the Inventory Transaction Register All current inventory transactions will be collected by control number sequence number the order in which they were actually entered Cancel summary of transaction types will be given at the end of each control number Control Date Con
178. d the hit esc Customers Desc Select D to duplicate Enter the Our Item ID Customer ID to Our Item Desc duplicate to Our Item Xref Memo 1 Update current record QVE OS Release NGS 6 30 IC 83 Next Generation Inventory Control e Duplicate to Customer 16 Records Selected Duplicate to Cust Enter Dup to Cust ID Zoom for Release NGS 6 30 IC 84 Next Generation Inventory Control CGVPGM CUSTOMER GROUP VALID PRODUCT GROUP MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Customer Group Valid Product Group Maintenance program is to establish and maintain a database of valid product groups for a group of customers rather than an individual customer This program controls the products that a group of customers may or may not order Procedure From the menu aer f CGVPGM Customer Group Valid Product Group M SEE CGVPGM OPTIONS Customer Group acf option oe048 Group Description Cust Validation Cd Our Product Group Our Prod Grp Desc Memo 1 Information Memo 2 Information Memo 3 Information Memo 4 Information Add records OYE The following fields may be entered CUSTOMER GROUP Enter the Customer Group Class ACF option 0e048 determines whether this class will be by Division Department Branch CSAC Category D or Customer Type GROUP DESC This field is system maintained CUSTOMER Enter the Customer Validati
179. d to create these Branch Transfer Requisitions for the receiving branch is Generate Purchase Requisitions PRGEN This option should be used when replenishing one branch s stock from another branch based upon the receiving branch s min and max and surplus levels In order for this procedure to work correctly ACF options inv054 and inv055 must set up The setting up of these options will determine how much stock you will allow to be transferred from one branch to another The choices are yours to make File Set Up The following ACF options need to be set up prior to completing branch transfers from the automated replenishment programs inv054 PRGEN A PR Method to Determine Branches to Check for Surplus Stock This option controls the method used to determine which branches to check for surplus stock in the PRGEN and APR replenishment programs 1 Select all branches regardless of IBMM setup 2 Check the allow transfer indicator maintained in the IBMM program Replenishment programs will check ONLY branches that are set to allow transfer in this program inv055 PRGEN APR Minimum Surplus 96 to Recommend a Branch Transfer This option contains a minimum surplus percent 96 below which no transfer will be suggested PRGEN and APR programs will look at Branch Surplus Inventory to decide if a Branch Transfer should be initiated For Example A branch has a required quantity 100 When assessing other branches surplus quantity that bra
180. d when you are entering a sales order for a customer and there is insufficient stock on items to fill the sales order ADDITIONAL FILE SET UP FOR TRANSFERS FROM ORDER ENTRY The following ACF options need to be set up prior to completing branch transfers from the order entry program 023 ORDER Display of PO Window for Drop Ship Transaction This option is used by the Order program when a Drop Ship item is entered It controls whether or not the optional PO window will display AND what options are displayed in the window itself Value may store 1 or several display parameters separated by commas One of the following values MUST be entered 1 DO NOT display PO window User may manually open the PO window 2 Auto display PO window User may optionally enter PO Options selected A B C D E will display 3 Auto display PO window User must enter a PO Options selected A B C D E will display The optional PO window can display options labeled A B C D E A Generate PO req and PO B Generate approved PO req C Generate pending PO req D Generate and maintain pending PO req E Maintain default values User may control which of these options display and in which order Multiple values may be which are broken up into 3 segments as follows Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 A B C D E 2 3 999 works with A B C The following are examples of how a user can utilize this ACF option Example 1 C E A 2 This will dis
181. der Receipt POR program and the Inventory Transaction Entry ITE program when processing branch transfer transactions Release NGS 6 30 IC 203 Next Generation Inventory Control GENERAL FILE SET UP FOR BRANCH TRANSFERS Before doing any of these types of Branch Transfers all items that are being replenished from another branch must be set up correctly You will need to set up records in program Item Branch Matrix Maintenance IBMM This program will maintain records for each Branch that you are allowing to do transfers In these records you will assign a method on what quantity you will allow to be transferred and from which Branch fous SET e IBMM Branch Matrix Maintenance SEE OPTIONS Primary Branch Transfer Branch Allow Transfer Indicator Transfer Limit Indicator The items must also be set up correctly in the program Item Branch Planning Details Maintenance IPMB Release NGS 6 30 IC 204 Next Generation Inventory Control From the menu enter IPMB Window 1 A IPMB Branch Planning Details Maintenance Options Item ID 10218 U M Desc CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUE Xref 28550441112 Prod Line 6 Branch 2 p I Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 Screen 4 Replen Path 2 Auto Reorder Code 1 Alt Buyer 1 Alt Conv Prime Vendor LLL1000 Cost IMC Code Cost U M Conv Lo
182. dling Rate This field is used in conjunction with acf option OE074 Detail Insurance Rate Enter the quantity break option Valid codes are Enter 1 The Values in the Qty Break Fields are by Price UOM Enter the quantity break value code Valid codes are for dollar values for percentage values Enter levels 1 through 8 quantity break values Enter memo fields 3 4 6 7 Enter Memo 1 associated with this Price Matrix Record Field is Alpha Numeric Field length is 10 characters This field may be used in conjunction with ACF option oe102 This option defines whether the detail Handling Table ID will be selected from the Price Matrix Table rather than the Item Master Table IC 122 Next Generation Inventory Control Memo 2 See Section on Comparative Pricing below This field is used in conjunction with ACF option oe103 This option defines whether or not the lowest price comparison will be utilized when determining a sell price for an item This ACF option must be set to a value of 1 to utilize this feature Memo 5 Enter Memo 5 associated with this Price Matrix Record Field is Decimal Field will accept up to 11 numbers before the decimal a decimal point 2 numbers after the decimal i e 12345678901 01 This field may be used in conjunction with ACF option oe101 This option defines whether the detail Commission Rate will be selected from the Price Matrix Table rather than the Item Master Table
183. ds to the SUMMARY screen at which time all lines meeting family pricing criteria will be re priced If a detail line were priced by contract pricing then this line will be ignored for family pricing If a detail line were priced manually then family pricing would not re price this line However this lines quantity will be included with other lines of same family in order to ascertain a family price for other line items in the family This field may be utilized to store information as the user requires Enter a line item group code used to bring similar line items together in ORDER BILL based on a group code When adding detail lines to an order invoice the user typically may VIEW the details in line number sequence With this field user may resort the details by the item line group code ACF option ar053 offers an option to display line details by the Item Line group code when doing a VIEW or MARGIN view of the details on the IC 34 Next Generation Inventory Control REPRICE CODE FUTURE USE SUGGESTED RETAIL PRICING UM PRICE UM CONV FUTURE USE FUTURE USE LAST COST MATERIAL LABOR OVERHEAD OUTSIDE AVERAGE COST Release NGS 6 30 order invoice The user may also opt to modify output print programs to sort by this item line group code if desired Enter the Re price Code Valid entries are NULL No re pricing of transaction 1 Re pricing the transaction Programs Order and Bill utilize this code
184. duct Label 1 Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Product Label 2 Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Product Label 3 Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Product Label 4 Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 1 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 2 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 3 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 4 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 5 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 6 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 7 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 8 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 9 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Other 10 Product Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Free Form Memo Alphanumeric Free Form Memo Alphanumeric Free Form Memo Alphanumeric Free Form Memo Date Free Form Memo Date Free Form Memo Numeric Free Form Memo Numeric Free Form Memo Alphanumeric Free Form Memo Al
185. e Report of In transit Transactions Sort By Options By Item By Sending Branch By Item Xref Item By Sending Branch By Sending Branch By Item By Sending Branch By Item Xref By Item Output To Options Output to S creen P rinter H old File or E xit Novela Release NGS 6 30 IC 79 Next Generation Inventory Control IBPOM ITEM BRANCH PLANNING OVERRIDE MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Item Branch Planning Override Maintenance program is to allow the user to maintain separate seasonal inventory levels for seasonal items with multiple seasons A MISCRON IBPOM may be set up to automatically move values from the IBPOM record to the IPMB item branch record Procedure From the menu e IBPOM Item Branch Planning Override Maintenance enter IBPOM OPTIONS Item ID gt Eff From Eff Thru rere Branch Et Process Type Month Status Remove Day Query View Minimum Level FO Lead Time Safety Day Maximum Level Pick Lead Time Days Help Surplus Level Runs Order Point Level Replen Path i Exit Program Order Quantity Replen Branch Line Point Level Auto Reorder Code Period Avg Usage Buyer Avg Lead Time Days Prime Vendor Safety Allow 95 IMC Code Safety Allow Qty Transfers Allowed Shelf Life Days Location Quantity Per Pack Location 2 Memo 1 Qty Item Active Min PO Quantity Inactive Date Add records OVE ITEM ID Enter a va
186. e Procedure From the f ITPA Item Time Phased Availability Query menu enter ITPA Item 77 Date 09 22 2005 14 Desc 1 Branch Desc 2 On Hand xref Ref Line TT C Cust Vend Cust PO GL Acct SO PO Line Sls Re Date Enter Search Criteria For ITEM ID Zoom for Lookup Enter search criteria for item selection as well as branch i selection ALL Orders Type OR TO FO DS BL 6m Type Selection Sales Order Selection Cancel Selected Order Type Enter criter a for Type Selection for both Sales Purchase Order Selection Orders and Default Selection Type PO TP Purchase NETT Orders ALL PO s Type PO TP DP Selected PO Type OVE Release NGS 6 30 IC 313 Next Generation Inventory Control System will f ITPA Item Time Phased Availability Query display the available tity b Item TAPE 125 PG PGM4 UM BX EA Date 09 22 2005 3 quan y y Desc 1 125 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE Branch 1 199 date Desc 2 1 4 STREAMING TAPE TAPES On Hand 15 Xref Ref Line TT Cust Vend Cust PO GL Acct SO PO Line Date 80004 3 DP Y 1000 09 03 1998 10 80012 T3067 80021 10692 10697 80010 80011 T3039 T3068 T3080 10789 10790 10792 130702 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 DP TP DP PO PO DP DP TP TP TP PO PO PO n Y l
187. e The cost will be derived from the Item Branch file The promotional rate field stores a percent The total last cost will be increased by the rate The cost will be derived from the item master file The promotional rate stores a percent The total average cost will be increased by the rate The cost will be derived from the item master file The promotional rate stores a percent The higher of either the last cost or the average cost will be increased by the rate The cost will be derived from the item master file The promotional rate stores a dollar value Calculate the normal matrix price Then take matrix price and reduce it by the promotional dollar amount A dollar value of 10 00 will reduce the price by 10 00 A dollar value of 10 00 will increase the price by 10 00 The promotional rate stores a percent Calculate the normal matrix price Then take matrix price and apply the rate against it A rate of 10 00 will reduce the price by 10 00 percent A rate of 10 00 will increase the matrix price by 10 00 percent The promotional rate field stores a Dollar amount The total cost will be increased by the rate The cost will be derived from the Item Branch file The promotional rate field stores a Dollar amount The total last cost will be increased by the rate The cost will be derived from the item master file The promotional rate stores a Dollar amount The total average cost will be increased by the rate The
188. e whereby the user may manually ADD UPDATE or REMOVE records Select CALC OPTIONS to automatically apply either a percent or dollar value to the old matrix selling price to arrive at a new future matrix price F MFPM Matrix Furture Price Changes Automatic Calculation Options User Options To Calculate NEW Price based on OLD Price v 1 Apply user entered rate 95 times selling price Option 2 Apply user entered rate plus selling price 3 Same as 1 plus apply the 95 to all break values 4 Same as 2 and apply the rate to all break values Calculated Mew Selling Price Rounding Options To nearest 1 decimal no To nearest 2 decimal no To nearest 3 decimal no To nearest 4 decimal no Round up to the next whole no Round down to the next whole no Round to the nearest whole no No rounding BITES OK Cancel Help Run A menu option called NEW MATRIX ROLLOVER can be run on demand to roll matrix future price records into the matrix file Release NGS 6 30 IC 160 Next Generation Inventory Control IPBK ITEM PRICE BOOK Introduction The Item Price Book program allows the user to create their own price book The user has the ability to create their own Price Book based upon both customer and item selections The user may choose which prices they wish to see in the Price Book When using the View menu option the output can be directed to
189. e NGS 6 30 IC 145 Next Generation Inventory Control The user has the ability to print an exception report of the transactions that Enter Control Number BCO216 did not load from the input file Output To Options Output To P rinter H old File or E xit m vi R Select P for Printer or H for Hold file Clear The Item Future List Price Temporary File f IFLP Item Future List Price Changes Upload Exceptio SEE Upon completion exit the program or go directly into Message ltem Future List User may now proceed to ADD new records UPDATE existing records Price REMOVE records VIEW records or initiate the NEW LIST ROLLOVER routine Maintenance which will actually move data from the Item Future List Price File into Cancel the current Item Master List Price These options may be accessed by entering the Item Future List Price Maintenance screen available in this program f Item Future List Price file updating has completed Optio Gi Exit Program The maintenance program allows the user to Add Update Remove or View records in the file The New List Rollover option allows the user to select records in a control number and proceed to rollover the new list price into the item master list price Upon completion of the rollover the user will have the option to purge the control records used to create the new list price Release NGS 6 30 IC 146 Next Generation Inve
190. e Vendor Non Stock Item Table and the corresponding non stock template 1 Stock After the user accepts the item and any overrides the program will generate the Item Master and corresponding Item Planning Item Branch and Item Interchange records and pass the item back to Order Entry and use the data in a regular stock line 2 Prompt After the user accepts the item and any overrides the program will prompt the user whether to create an Item Master use the item as a non stock item or exit The system will then follow the corresponding logic for option O or 1 above Note that the capability of creating an item as well as overriding the item id descriptions and cross reference when creating inventory items is controlled based on the security defined below Generation Security The following is the security setup SSM which will be used to define which users can generate items from Order Entry Quote Entry and Billing Entry Field Description Contents Program Name order or quote or bill Sub Window vnsim Type Of Security U ser or P assw ord User Include Exclude l nclude or E xclude Ring Menu Option V Release NGS 6 30 IC 286 Next Generation Inventory Control Value User ID or Password Item ID Description Cross Reference Override Security The following is the security setup SSM to define which users can override the item id descriptions and cross reference when generating inventory items provide
191. e conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 33 This option is used to calculate a sell price based on a desired Gross Profit The total price memo 1 for this line item will be divided by 100 00 the price adj amount To have gross profit of 25 over standard cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The standard cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 34 This option is used to calculate a sell price based on the standard cost price adjustment amount and price adjustment amount The total standard cost will be increased by the price ajd amount To have Release NGS 6 30 IC 119 Next Generation Inventory Control SELLING PRICE ALT SELL PRICE PRICE ADJ AMT PRICE ADJ AMT PRICING U M PRICING U M CONV PROMO USAGE CODE Release NGS 6 30 the selling price be 25 00 over the standard cost the user wou
192. e in this field if this record may be used for ALL customers Ship To Enter a valid Ship To ID for the selected customer or use the drop down selection window ID to search for a Customer Ship To ID An entry of ALL may be made in this field signifying this record may be used for ALL ship to s for the selected customer Note If an entry of ALL has been made in the Cust ID field the system will automatically set this field to a value of ALL Release NGS 6 30 IC 107 Next Generation Inventory Control If entering a column matrix record by Option Value of 2 value of acf option 0e047a signifying entry will be based on a Customer Match Selection and acf option oe047a is set to a value of 1 the Customer Match Selection will be by 2 Customer Type the user must enter the following field Cust ID Enter a valid Customer Type Code or use the drop down selection window to search for a Sold To valid CTC Code Ship To The system will set the Ship To ID field to a value of CTYPE ID If entering a column matrix record by Option Value of 2 value of acf option 047 signifying entry will be based on a Customer Match Selection and acf option oe047a is set to a value of 2 the Customer Match Selection will be by 2 Customer Price Matrix the user must enter the following field Cust ID Enter a valid Customer Matrix Class Code or use the drop down selection window to search Sold To for a valid PMT Cust Class Code Ship To The system wi
193. e label or form the user has acquired 2 To print labels This option allows the user to select and sort label data as required User may then print using the selected label format Procedure From the menu enter ILBL F OLAB Order Label Print SEE Options Print Labels Release NGS 6 30 IC 295 Next Generation Inventory Control IBLBL ITEM BRANCH LABEL PRINT PROGRAM Introduction SEE THE LABELS DOCUMENTATION MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO CREATE LABEL FORMATS AND PRINT LABELS USING THESE FORMATS The item branch label print program allows for the user to accomplish the following 1 To define the formatting of labels for output This option allows the user to create as many different formats as needed Formatting may be used to produce not only continuous form labels but rolodex cards continuous post cards envelopes etc The purpose of the formatting routine is to allow users to format label output according to the size label or form the user has acquired 2 To print labels This option allows the user to select and sort label data as required User may then print using the selected label format Procedure From the menu enter IBLBL TA IBLBL Item Branch Label P SEE Options Print Labels Release NGS 6 30 IC 296 Next Generation Inventory Control INVENTORY QUERY PROGRAMS IQQ INVENTORY QUANTITY INQUIRY Introduction Inquiries to inventory balances may be p
194. e report The start date will be a calculated date based on the system date Output will take the system date at the time the output is generated and add days plus or minus to the system date to arrive at the start date This start date is then utilized as the aging date In addition to automatic cron scheduling of user specified reports in background processing CRONM also allows the user to actually create a program record for a particular cron job A program record is normally maintained in the PGC program where records created allow for defining what programs may be run directly from the menu These features are setup through additional windows after this initial window is completed SEE CRONM for detailed instructions on setting up crons Release NGS 6 30 IC 319 Next Generation Inventory Control IVR INVENTORY VALUATION REPORT Introduction The Inventory Valuation Report permits the user to obtain information pertaining to the on hand quantity cost and extended value of inventory items Extensive selection and sort criteria are available when running this report Procedure From the menu enter IVR OLLE Inventory Valuation Report Item Costing Break Level Options From Branch Master Show Lowest Level Location Detail Get Lowest Level Location Costing If the user selects item costing break level from item master the following screens will be displayed for selection Release NGS 6 30 IC 320 Ne
195. e used to compute the annual value of purchases for a product line Enter the Annual Purchase Quantity in Units made of all items forming part of this product line If sufficient purchase history has been built the program ICPH may be used to compute the annual purchase quantity for a product line Enter the Weight of Annual Purchases made of all items forming part of this product line If sufficient purchase history has been built the program ICPH may be used to compute the annual purchase weight for a product line Enter the Volume of Annual Purchases made of all items forming part of this product line If sufficient purchase history has been built the program ICPH may be used to compute the annual purchase volume for a product line Enter the date of Last Review of this product line This date will be updated automatically whenever a product line is review ed and a Line Buy is recommended by the PRGEN program Enter the date when the Next Review is due on this product line This date will be set up automatically whenever a product line is review ed and a line buy is recommended by the PRGEN program The date will be set to the date resulting from moving forward from the date of last review by the number of days betw een review s IC 75 Next Generation Inventory Control FUTURE USE FUTURE USE SEASON START PERIOD SEASON END PERIOD PURCHASE START PERIOD PURCHASE END PERIOD SEASON P O VALUE OFF SEASON P
196. e you wish to display such as specifications sheets See web b2b manual for more detail This program may be executed on demand by entering IPICM or by calling up the program IM and clicking on the Maintain Images button or through the B2BM program using option 3 Release NGS 6 30 IC 55 Next Generation Inventory Control To upload an Open Files image from your Mi the Look in O images otim rom _ button The c 5 if W 2040tape gif Documents CJ B tape 3584 gif 3314890camera_t if directory will Recent 8 tape 3583_t gif 19 33l4890camera gif appear Choose 5 tape 3583 gif 33 4889camera_t oif the directory that S tape 3580_t gif IN 334889camera gif has the image 13 3580 0 you want to Desktop IN tape 525 t gif upload and IN tape 525 gif double click the E N tspe 150 t g f file or click on CJ Z tape 150 gif the Open UDINE m tape 125 t gif button N tape 125 gif 3580tape gif 48 3570tape_t gif 3570tape gif My Computer L File name My Network Files of type The image will f Upload be displayed and all the proper fields will ie automatically be Directory C Documents and Settings rob MUNICS 001 My Documents images filled in Click on File Name tape 3584 gif the OK button to To accept or Cancel Directory usr HTTPServer htdocs dev409 inages to abort File Name
197. ecords the New Cost Rollover function will update the Branch Costs and if applicable will also create a posting to the general ledger for the control It is recommended to not be accessing any programs utilizing the item file when this rollover is in process Upon completion of the rollover the user may use the Inventory Cost Rollover Audit Register ICRAR program to reprint an Item Future Cost Maintenance Control This register will provide the user with an audit trail of the changes that were made Release NGS 6 30 IC 186 Next Generation Inventory Control Select New Cost Rollover NEW_COST_ G ROLLOVER to Rollover Options rollover the costs OK from the future COSI file to the 2 Roll costs into item branch cost records only master 3 Roll costs into item master cost records only and or branch file s 4 Roll costs into vendor item cross reference records only Selected Vendor ID Branch Selection 1 All branches 2 Selected Branch Item Master Costing Method Selection 1 Roll costs into item master LAST COSTS 2 Roll costs into item master AVERAGE COSTS 3 Roll costs into item master STANDARD COSTS 4 Roll TOTAL costs into LIST PRICE only Move Inc Cost If the user selects a Rollover Options 1 2 or 3 the following entry window will be displayed e New Cost Rollover Enter Control No e Cancel Records Exist in Control Update Costs to Item Files P
198. ed Inquiry from the main menu to d t Component STOCK PAPER 1 e Description STOCK PAPER WIDE 11 x 14 which kit a UM Bx particular component is Kit Details used Enter the Kit Description Line Qty Per Component ID 93662300 1 STOCK PAPER WIDE 30 2 00 P SD PERM N STOCK PAPER WIDE 20 1 00 and all kits using SUP 1L STOCK PAPER WIDE 20 2 00 that component SUP 18 STOCK PAPER WIDE 20 2 00 E SUP 3L STOCK PAPER WIDE 30 2 00 will be listed SUP 3S STOCK PAPER WIDE 30 2 00 SUPPLY 100 STOCK PAPER WIDE 20 2 00 SUPPLY 300 STOCK PAPER WIDE 30 2 00 Release NGS 6 30 IC 349 Next Generation Inventory Control Select VIEW button from the main menu and enter the selection criteria Component ID ok to print a report Description 1 4 Description 2 xref DESEE Sort Report By Option Component by Kit ID F KITWU Kit Where Used View SEE Page Break on Component Output To Option Output to S creen Printer or Hjold File y Ov UE Release NGS 6 30 IC 350 Next Generation Inventory Control KITCL KIT COST LISTING SINGLE LEVEL Introduction The Kit Cost Listing Single Level enables the user to output a cost listing of the components of a kit This program enables the user to create a report showing the costs for all kits or selected kits You have a kit line sort option that allows you sort your report by kit line number or
199. ees ITEM LIST PRICE MAINTENANCE cssse HH 132 IFIP nn enne ITEM FUTURE LIST PRICING simii ine a mm 138 MATRIX FUTURE PRICING 157 IPB C ITEM PRIGE BOOK EI rtm terne nte ER Sed Ehe RET Et qe RAT RA 161 COSTING PROGRAMS 5 Ee Ku Ago aa eane A RA ER OR EE LR Reda Leda ERR ER RXRRRRIMIKA 166 je ITEM COST 166 IFCM ITEM FUTURE COST 170 INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT PROGRAMS eeee mne nennen nennen nenne 195 TES cd INVENTORY TRANSACTION 195 ITEM TRANSACTION ENTRY REASON 200 ine deze INVENTORY TRANSACTION REGISTER 201 BRANCH TRANSFER PROCESSING eee eene nennen nne nne nennen 203 BRANCH TRANSFER 203 GENERAL FILE SET UP FOR BRANCH 204 MANUAL BRANCH TRANSFERS w etre Deu ep HERES a E DN IAN TP 3 ORE Eig Id 223 BRANCH TRANSFER REQUISITION MAINTENANCE BTRM 2
200. el or Hold a file b c d y e Print Format Options Select Ljong or S hort Form Output To Option Output to S creen P rinter ECX cel or H old File C Print Comments Comment Type Release NGS 6 30 IC 37 Next Generation Inventory Control IPMM ITEM PRODUCT MASTER MAINTENANCE PROGRAM Introduction The purpose of the Item Product Master Maintenance program is to allow for the entry of additional information about a product outside of the Item Master Record Table IM Records that are entered are created and maintained in the table called itemprod This table is a more of a generic table that can be used to further define attributes about a certain product There is a corresponding item product comment table iprodcomt that allow for the entry of comments that can also be maintained within IPMM program In addition Standard Item Product Comments for the Item Product Master table records may also be created These codes would be utilized to populate values into fields 5 through 22 These records can be entered through the program IPMMSC This maintenance program will maintain standard records in the tables ipmhcomt Product Item Std Hdr Comment Table and ipmscomt Product Item Std Detail Comment Table Procedure From the menu f IPMM Item Product Master Maintenance enter IPMM Item GJMTEST 7 E Description LARGE GREEK 23 1 4 HIGH Product Gr
201. el that is defined then an additional option can be triggered under this code This option offers an additional feature which provides for defining a price for quantities which exceed the last quantity break quantity price The user may enter a quantity in memo price 1 The user may enter a price in memo price 2 Example If price memo 1 were 25 0000 and price memo 2 were 10 00000 this would indicate to increase the last quantity break price by 10 0000 for every quantity of 25 0000 ordered over the last quantity break quantity This code was designed to work with LOT pricing where the selling price calculated here will also be the extension Enter an L in Pricing U M field to activate Lot pricing Code 9 This method code is reserved for future use Code 10 The total unit cost for this line item will be increased by Release NGS 6 30 IC 115 Next Generation Inventory Control Release NGS 6 30 the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 00 over unit cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The total unit cost is determined by the users normal costing method in use This cost is obtained directly from the proper Item Branch record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 11 The total last cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 00 over last cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj
202. em Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Additional Item Attributes Release NGS 6 30 Enter Large Text Attribute 1 Enter Large Text Attribute 2 Enter Large Text Attribute 3 Enter Small Text Attribute 1 Enter Small Text Attribute 2 Enter Small Text Attribute 3 Enter Code Attribute 1 Enter Code Attribute 2 Enter Code Attribute 3 Enter Value Attribute 1 Enter Value Attribute 2 Enter Value Attribute 3 Enter Date Attribute 1 Enter Date Attribute 2 Enter Date Attribute 3 Enter Item Comment 1 Enter Item Comment 2 Enter Item Comment 3 Enter Memo 1 Enter Memo 2 Enter Memo 3 Enter Memo 4 Enter Memo 5 Enter Memo 6 Enter Memo 7 IC 276 Next Generation Inventory Control Use the MENU OPTIONS buttons to perform one of the following functions ADD To ADD new records The user may manually A dd records to the table The user must enter a valid vendor id a vendor item id that does not already exist and a valid item template When adding records the applicable fields will be automatically set based on the Non Stock Item Template settings Note that the Non stock Template selected must include the Non stock Item Master settings When a formatted field with a manual override flag in the table is altered manually by the user the flag will be set to indicate that the field was manually overridden UPDATE To UPDATE existing records When updating records through the U pdate menu option the
203. emplate Description line 1 Description 2 Template Description line 2 Sort Sequence Enter the sequence in which this non stock template should be displayed in Release NGS 6 30 IC 269 Next Generation Inventory Control the order program UOM Source Enter Unit of Measure Source Code Enter 1 Use Non Stock Template Enter 2 Use Sales Order Vendor ID Enter the Non Stock Template Vendor ID or click on the lookup button Item ID Prefix Prefix that is automatically assigned to all item id s being entered for the Vendor being processed Item Desc 1 Prefix Prefix that is automatically assigned to all item descriptions being entered for the Vendor being processed Item ID Format Formatted Item ID Method 0 User assigned leave blank when initially created 1 Set to Vendor Item Prefix Vendor Item ID If Vendor Item Prefix and Vendor ID exceeds the maximum the item id will be left blank If Vendor Item Prefix is NULL the Item ID will be set to the Vendor item id 2 Set to Vendor Item Prefix Vendor Item ID If Vendor Item Prefix and Vendor ID exceeds the maximum the item id will be truncated If Vendor Item Prefix is NULL the Item ID will be set to the Vendor item id Note that once an Item Master record has been generated the Formatted Item ID cannot be changed on subsequent updates or imports Note that if the Formatted Item ID was previously manually overridden by the user in the U pdate ring menu option thi
204. en each item printed 1 Output Option Output to S creen Printer or Hjold File Release NGS 6 30 IC 192 Next Generation Inventory Control EVER f IFCM Item Future Incremental Cost Development SEE selected Incremental Cost Development Calculation Options Cancel Help The INC_COST_DEVELOP option brings the user into a routine that assists in developing incremental costs for an item which can be added to the other costs for that item to arrive at a total cost Example The calculation of a material or labor overhead This program allows the user to automatically calculate overhead costs based on overhead codes user may maintain in program OVRM The user would insert the appropriate overhead codes into the item file using program ICM or IM if adding new items This routine would then calculate a overhead for all items coded with overhead codes in the item file The user may opt to manually insert incremental costs into the future cost file Once incremental costs are in place there are several options which will move the incremental costs up into the normal cost values for that item Those costs may then be rolled into the item master and or item branch records Release NGS 6 30 IC 193 Next Generation Inventory Control If Calculate A Material Labor Overhead Calculation Selection Material Labor Overhead is selected Control No j Product Group Item ID Item Src Cd
205. ent Item Master Branch Cost or Produce the Exception Report These options may be acccessed by entering the Item Future Cost Maintence screen available in this program Note that it is strongly recommended that the user review the costs prior to performing the rollover and that current system backup is available Options ei Exit Program User may add update or remove items that were selected for the control entered Release NGS 6 30 IC 182 Next Generation Inventory Control If Future IFCM Item Future Cost File Maintenance a OPTIONS Maintenance Screen is sir Hs 3 Add selected Item Xref Product Group Item Sre Cd List New Material Cost Old Material Cost Miew New Labor Cost Old Labor Cost L New Overhead Cost Old Overhead Cost New Outside Cost Old Outside Cost Increment Cost New Total Cost Old Total Cost Set Cost New Inc Material Old Inc Material Help New Inc Labor Old Inc Labor New Inc Overhead Old Inc Overhead New Inc Outside Old Inc Outside New Inc Total Old Inc Total Variance Exception Press Return to UPDATE existing records Price Variance Exception Logic The user has the ability to flag records that are over or under a user defined variance limit compared to the old costs This is controlled by acf options inv086 and inv087 The variance flag will be displayed in
206. ents the item cross reference enter a 2 in the Match Upload ltem to Field Note If Match option 10 is chosen The user will be required to enter a valid Vendor ID Control the program will prompt for a control number This control number permits the user the option of grouping cost changes into different controls such as different product groupings or of putting all changes under one control Division ID Enter the Division ID Department ID Enter the Department ID Enter proceed to process control The system will r display the 9 arming follow ing 2 Records Successfully Added window 2 Records Fail Skip Overwrite indicating the number of Press OK to print exception report records successfully loaded and the number of records that failed Release NGS 6 30 IC 181 Next Generation Inventory Control Press ok to print the exception f IFCM Item Future Cost Changes Upload Exception SEE report Enter Control Number Output To Options Output To P rinter H old File or E xit m Clear The Item Future Cost Temporary File Upon Item Future Cost File Upload Has Completed completion exit the program or Message go directly into User may now proceed to 4DD new records UPDATE existing records tem Future Cost REMOVE records VIEW records or initiate the NEW_COST_ROLLOVER routine Maintenance which will actually move data from the Item Future Cost File into Cancel the curr
207. eport selection criteria Selection Criteria Item Number Description i Description 2 Item Xref Branch ID Branch IMC Code Item Type Code Item SAC 1 Product Group Item SAC 2 Item Status Code Item SAC 3 Commodity Code Item SAC 4 Item Price Matrix Enter Item ID Selection Release NGS 6 30 IC 318 Next Generation Inventory Control If output is directed to C ron Job Number Program Mame User Name Terminal Date Created Output Device of Copies Job Desc One Time Only Days of Week Specific Days Time To Print E A CRONM Cron Job Table Maintenance 234 iss rob m 09 16 2005 1 w Men v Tue Wed Thu v Fri v Sat Sun v v v Enter Printer to output to or enter HOLD For Hold file OVE The C ron Job permits the production of a report on an output device at a previously selected date and time This type of output operation is often used to produce reports automatically unattended A detailed explanation of the cron fields may be reviewed in the System Utilities section under a program called CRONM Flexible and moving date parameters can be established when the output is generated if the user specifies that the output is not variable the report will use the fixed aging date for the output If user specifies that the date parameters are variable the output will be based on the start date of th
208. er the data to search on then press Enter ISAC 2 Search for items based on the item sales analysis category 2 code Enter the data to search on then press Enter ISAC 3 Search for items based on the item sales analysis category 3 code Enter the data to search on then press Enter ISAC 4 Search for items based on the item sales analysis category 4 code Enter the data to search on then press Enter LIST PRICE This field stores the list price of this item ALTERNATE This field stores an alternate list price for this item This field is utilized to UNIT LIST store a list price for the alternate unit of measure for this item It need only be utilized if the alternate price is not the result of the list price divided by the alternate conversion factor ALTERNATE UNIT This field stores an alternate unit surcharge to add to the alternate list price SURCHARGE to arrive at the final alternate list price PRICE MATRIX This field stores the item matrix class The item matrix class is used in CODE conjunction with the customer matrix class to find the correct pricing record in the price matrix file The price matrix program can be accessed through program PMT The user may establish various pricing routines based on the item or group of items combined with the customer or group of customers AUTO SUBSTITU The ORDER and BILL programs allow for automatic item substitution TION CODE based on the codes defined in the customer and item master records Refer to
209. er to display an existing record on the screen with the ability to scroll forwards and backwards from record to record when more than one record is selected When this option is chosen the user is required to define which record s are to be selected for query The user must enter the appropriate data by which to search the file and then click the OK button to allow the program to search the file for any record s meeting the entered search criteria LIST The LIST option allows the user to enter their selection criteria and then view all the selected records with the most important fields listed on one screen If the user double clicks on any of the records or highlights a record and clicks the Release NGS 6 30 IC 20 Next Generation Inventory Control OK button the IM main edit program is executed and gives the user access to all the fields in the IM table DUPLICATE DUPLICATE option allows the user to duplicate an entire item to another item When using this option the user should note ACF option inv078 will control the method to set the fields when creating the Item Branch record for the item being duplicated Please refer to comments in the ACF option for further explanation COUNT The COUNT option allows the user to count the number of records based on the users entered search criteria The user should enter C in the menu to enter this option Then enter the search criteria or click the OK button for all records to be
210. ere is serial number control active on this item enter S If either lot or serial number is active enter N Enter the Quantity Control flag 1 Quantity is OUTPUT in the Primary Unit of Measure without Decimals 2 Quantity is OUTPUT in the Alternate Unit of Measure without Decimals 3 Quantity is OUTPUT in both Primary and Alternate Units of Measure separated by a colon Example 25 4 cases pieces feet inches etc If the field is coded blank or null no second serial exists If the field is coded O alpha scan serial 2 for outbound transactions only Utilize the memo fields as needed to store information relating to this item Various category codes may be assigned to an item These codes may be maintained through program ISAC This field stores the quantity per pack for this item This field stores a description of the type of package this item is kept in Enter the Item Master Order Entry Billing Line Item Controls Field This field is made up of 6 characters The default value of this field is 000000 Currently the following features may be activated through use of this field If the 1st position of this field is 1 then the ORDER and BILL programs will flag order detail lines where a user defined margin is not met First ORDER BILL will see if the field called MARGIN is not zero in the item master This indicates that the percentage is stored in the item and this is the value that will be used to determine mini
211. erformed using the Inventory Quantity Inquiry program User may also query stock item balances or activity on non stock items Procedure From the menu F 1QQ Inventory Quantity Inquiry m enter IQQ EE OPTIONS Desc U M 1 Desc2 Branch Query stock items OR If QUERY is selected the item description and cross reference prompts will appear for searching Item master information will be displayed The On Hand On Order Committed and Available balances are derived from the item master level Release NGS 6 30 IC 297 Next Generation Inventory Control If you click on F 10Q Inventory Quantity Inquiry DER the Details E button drop Item TAPE 125 xref 10008 down windows Desc Tape 125 new item desc U M IBX Will be enabled Desc2 TEST Branch Branch 1 to 5 of 10 so the user can Keyword click on the various fields location 01 100 where applicable On Hand 12726 3 9 2 ana be able to Committed 1908 4 zoom in on Avail to Sell 10148 4 1 2 Customer Sales 2534 4 various Transfer Sales 43 0 23 information For Backorders 669 E 61i example If the P 0 On Order 30071 4 25 29325 4 user clicked on P 0 CAMAS 576 22 351 Details button E gt Available 10817 4 sine 10415 1 and there 5 POR In Process quantity ina Drop Ship Sales al field such as the Drop Ship PO s 671 P O On Order f
212. es the ability to duplicate an item s or a customer s from one contract to another The Remove_Mass feature of this program provides the ability to remove all items from all contracts OR all customers who have contracts or all selected contract ID s The Contract_Dup feature of this program provides the ability to duplicate an entire contract for the same customer To display this help screen To call up other programs outside of order entry without affecting the current order To exit the program IC 98 Next Generation Inventory Control The following fields may be entered ITEM ID Enter the item ID or use the drop down window to search for an item record CUSTOMER ID Enter the customer ID or use the drop down window to search for a customer record CONTRACT ID Enter a contract ID reference number This is a required field It is a user defined reference number to identify this contract record This field cannot contain spaces PRICE METHOD Enter 1 to indicate the contract price specified is the selling price CONTRACT PRICE Enter the contract price This will be the item sell price in ORDER or BILL CONTRACT ALT Enter the alternate U M contract price This will be the alternate unit of PRICE measure s sell price in ORDER or BILL It need only be utilized if the alternate price is not the result of the list price divided by the alternate conversion factor EFFECTIVE DATE Enter the effective start date for this cont
213. es to leave between detail lines between details A value of 0 through 9 may be entered Page Break on new Control The system will default this value to NOT page break on each control Since you are processing this report from the ITE program only single control will be displayed Output Register to Select S to output report to the screen Select P to output report to the printer When this option is selected user will be prompted for a Printer ID Select H to output report to the Hold File When this option is selected system will display PHS report name NOTE In order to be able to update the report you must print to a printer or the hold file Once printing is complete you will be prompted as follows Release NGS 6 30 IC 237 Next Generation Inventory Control Click YES to 5 completa the 2 Clear Register File inventory transfer You must Click Yes in order to post the register to the general ledger Once the register is posted the inventory transfer process is complete Release NGS 6 30 IC 238 Next Generation Inventory Control AUTOMATED REPLENISHMENT PRGEN TRANSFERS In this procedure the system will automatically create a branch transfer purchase requisition for all items that are required to bring the stock level up to the maximum level and to fill demand Demand Items are items that are on open sales orders where there is insufficient stock to fill the order The program use
214. establish the correct conversion factor from the secondary unit of measure to the primary unit of measure Option 2 is similar to the algorithm used for code 4 with the major difference being that the sales order program will extend the quantity times the price using the U M 2 quantity This option offers the ability for the user to enter the primary unit of measure as well as the secondary unit of measure with no required relationship between the 2 quantities This basically allows for quantities to be input with no fixed factor relating one quantity with another Its best suited for situations where orders are taken for an item in a quantity U M the quantity is picked and weighed which produces a weight quantity U M at which the customer is billed Both quantities can be shown on forms print programs tailored for that user If 3 is selected quantity input logic will work the same as quantity input option 1 but the user will alw ays be prompted for the secondary units of measure first If the Quantity Input Control Codes is set to 4 enter the primary unit of measure as well as the secondary unit of measure with no required relationship between the two quantities This allow for quantities to be input with no fixed factor relating one quantity with another It is best suited for situations where orders are taken for an item in a quantity unit of measure The quantity is picked and weighed which produces a weight quantity unit of measure at which the
215. etting them up This will allow you to run APTB or ARTB reports with a designation of lt ZZ or lt ZZZ to omit the branch transfer customers vendors from these reports The ID s set up in the Vendor Master and the Customer Master must be added to the appropriate Branch Master record Release NGS 6 30 IC 209 Next Generation Inventory Control From the menu BRM Branch Maintenance enter BRM Branch ID 3 Branch Desc BRANCH 3 Company Name Branch BS Midwest _ Address 1 100 State Street Address 2 Address 3 City Chicago State t Postal Cd 23345 Country usa _ Attention Doe Rangers Phone Number 3124401234 FAX Number 3124001235 E mail Branch Cust Id Branch Vend Id Cycle Sort Wh Cycle Sort Bin Cycle Sort Lot Future Safe Day Web Flag Web Desc 2223000 12223000 OPTIONS Help Exit Get next record Each branch record must have a unique Branch Cust ID and Branch Vend ID When doing Branch Transfers the system will automatically price the transfer sales orders based upon the list price for each item being transferred If your branches are set up as profit centers the 9 1 should already be set up as these transactions would post the same way invoices and purchase orders currently post However if your branches are not separate profit centers then you will need to setup a price matrix in Price Matrix Table Maintenance PMT
216. ev Date Rev Cycles year Release NGS 6 30 IC 73 Next Generation Inventory Control Screen 2 IBPL Product Line Branch Details Maintenance Product Line ID Branch Screen 1 Screen 2 Season Start prd Season End prd Purch Start prd Purch End prd Season PO Value Off Seas PO Value Season PO Units Season PO Weight Off seas PO Wt Season PO Volume Off seas PO Vol Rev Cycle Season Rev Cyc Off seas Rev Days Season Update Remove Query View Help Exit Program Off seas PO Units Rev Days Off seas Add records OVR The following fields may be entered PRODUCT LINE Enter the product line ID DESCRIPTION Enter the product line description BRANCH Enter the branch ID VENDOR Enter the ID of the vendor associated with this product line at this branch Only one vendor can be associated with a given product line at a given branch BUYER Enter the ID of the buyer handling this product line P O TARGET UNIT Enter the unit in which the PO Target is expressed 1 if the PO Target is to be expressed by Value 2 if the PO Target is to be expressed in Units 3 if the PO Target is to be expressed by Weight 4 if the PO Target is to be expressed by Volume When the PO target is expressed in units it is assumed that all items in the product line have the same Stocking Unit of Measure Similar
217. f a group of three programs used to build and maintain the item master files for use in the Inventory Control application This program focuses on storing data relevant to pricing information In addition to price data the program also stores codes controlling item commissions tax discounts advertising allow ance handling insurance and several other miscellaneous fields Procedure From the menu Item List Price Maintenance OF x enter ILP item No Description ISAC 2 List Cross Ref ISAC Prod Grp ISAC aj 108 List Price COo f 12777 109 Alt Unit List X 128 Fam Price Code Exit Program 110 Alt Unit Surch 129 Price Memoi 111 Pri Matrix Cd ed rice Matrix fa 131 Sort Group 112 Auto Subst Cd z 132 Reprice Code mE 113 Auto Subst Itm X 133 114 134 Suggest Retail 135 Pricing UM CD RATE TABLE 136 Prc UM Conv 116 Commission zl Em TIA 117 Discount zl 138 118 Insurance zl t p 119 Handing If J VEL 120 Adv allow 142 121 Rebate 122 123 Release NGS 6 30 IC 132 Next Generation Inventory Control If the LIST option is selected When you select the View option from the main menu your report can be output to the Screen Printer Excel or Hold file The LIST option allows the user to enter their selection criteria and then v
218. f the Item Branch Cost Maintenance program is to focus on storing costs data for an item by branch If warehouse bin or lot serial number is active on an item the user may maintain or view these costs also Procedure From the menu f ICMB Branch Cost Details Maintenance enter ICMB OPTIONS Item ID U M Add E Alt Update Prod Line Desc Xref Duplicate Branch TE Query Miew Material Cost Base Yr Cost Help Labor Base Yr Qty Overhead 1st Recpt Cost Other es 1st Recpt Date Total Saaz Set Default Exit Program Last Branch Average Branch Standard Branch 10 14 18 11 Labor 15 Labor 19 Labor 12 Ovrhd 16 Ovrhd 20 Ovrhd 13 Outs 17 Outs 21 Outs Total Total Total Add records OVE Release NGS 6 30 IC 71 Next Generation Inventory Control IBMM Introduction ITEM BRANCH MATRIX MAINTENANCE The Item Branch Matrix Maintenance program serves the purpose of maintaining a matrix of the relationship between two branches and the rules which govern branch transfers between the specified branches Procedure From the menu enter IBMM IBMM Branch Matrix Maintenance Primary Branch Transfer Branch Allow Transfer Indicator Transfer Limit Indicator Add records The following fie
219. following Branch Transfer Requisition Detail Fields ITEM ID Enter the Item ID that is to be transferred ACCT GRP Enter a valid Item Account Group Code This field is used by the system if the account group parameter is set to Y in the GLPAR program to post records to detail general ledger accounts TRAN QTY Enter the required inventory quantity you wish to be transferred COST The system will default the transfer cost based on the ACF option settings listed previously UNIT WT Enter the Item Unit Weight UNIT VOL Enter the Item Unit Volume JOB NO Enter the job number associated with this transfer if applicable STATUS Enter 1 if you wish to create a Pending purchase order requisition Enter 2 if you wish to create an Approved purchase order requisition NOTE In order to automatically create a transfer sales order requisitions must be approved CMNTS Enter Y to maintain BTRM comments Enter N if you do not wish to maintain comments Release NGS 6 30 IC 225 Next Generation Inventory Control When you have completed the entry of an item the following screen options are available After F BTRM Branch Transfer Requisition Maintenance completing e entry of an Req Branch 3 Div Date 03 22 06 14 Buyer 1 Type tem window Frm Branch 1 Want 03 31 06 1 3 Auto So Y Group Cd will give you etails Update the following Reg No Item ID UM Tran Qty
220. for items ordered stays with the original item In the Detail Line Item record for the order being entered the substituted item replaces the original item entered and the original item entered is saved in another separate field Note Forms may need customization depending on how you wish to show this on Sales Orders Quotes Invoices etc Option oe56 controls the transaction types that the Substitute Item window will display in the Order Quote Bill Ship programs Option 0e56a controls under what condition the Substitute Item window will display when entering detail line items in the Order Quote Bill Ship programs Valid Entries Are 0 1 0 Display substitute item window ONLY if the available to sell quantity for the item is lt 0 1 Always display substitute item window AUTOMATIC ITEM SUBSTITUTIONS Automatic Item substitution can be maintained through the Item List Price ILP or Item Master IM programs This feature is useful when a product is discontinued The automatic item substitution logic works off of a matrix based on the Auto Substitution Field Field 90 from the Customer Master File and the Auto Substitution Cd Field Field 112 in the Item Master File The Substituted item id is entered in the Auto Subst Itm Field Field 113 in the Item Master File Based on how the matrix codes are set for a customer and item this feature will always substitute the primary product with the substitute product i e no window wil
221. gs to that of the Item Master field settings for the record stored in the NSIM screen If more than one record is stored in the NSIM screen the user will be prompted to choose which Template to use NOTE To enter a non stock item use a dot in the first position of the Item ID in the Detail Line record of ORDER or BILL ORDER When only one Non Stock Template Item record exists the system will automatically default all the Detail Line field information from the Item Master for the non stock item to be entered F ORDER Order Entry Add New Line Enter Item Item Info Item ID NONSTOCK C Mon Stock Desc 1 Enter Model of Buy Back Here Desc 2 Enter Description of Buy Back U M Conv 1 Pre Conv 1 Item Xref Keyword Pricing 2 Order jj EA 9 Sell Price 0000 3 Commtd Other Info 4 BekOrd 0 NetExt 0 00 When more than one Non Stock Template Item record exists the user will be prompted to select which template they wish to use for the non stock item to be entered Non stock Template List Template ID Description 1 Description 2 PARTS PARTS PHONEA PHONE TO REPAIR MODEL AAA 01 3 3 8 lock nuts 01 5 7 16 flat washer 0146 test lt Release NGS 6 30 IC 266 Next Generation Inventory Control NON STOCK ITEMS HIGHEST LEVEL VENDOR NON STOCK PROCESSING INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW Introduction At the highest level the user may maintain separ
222. h 4 oH H HB RP ORR RP UserID Trans Qty UM Old Onhand george kathy400 kathy400 kathy400 doug400 doug400 myron400 myron400 kathy400 kathy400 gary400 kathy400 kathy400 kathy400 kathy400 kathy400 leathunn New Onhand IC 301 Dow Next Generation Inventory Control If VIEW is f ITQ Item Transaction Inquiry View selected a window will Sort By Options Report Options open to choose By Item ID Transaction Qty Data the sort and By Transaction Type by Item ID Transaction Qty and Cost Data output options By Branch By Item ID Cost Audit Report By Branch By Tran Type By Item Output can be directed to any By Source By Tran Type By Ref By Lin one of these options Include Non Stock Items Include Zero Quantity Transactions Output To Options Output to S creen P rinter H old File or E X cel EXE v REMOVE is selected the e ITQ Item Transaction Inquiry Remove SEE following window will open Enter Remove Date Release NGS 6 30 IC 302 Next Generation Inventory Control IHQ ITEM HISTORY QUERY Introduction The purpose of the Item History Query program is to allow the user to query item history information by branch Procedure From the menu fr IHQ Item History Query enter IHQ Item ID ITAPE 125 YTD Sales Next Branch Item Description 125 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE Di
223. han a single item Program FMT allows the user to maintain FAMILY MATRIX TABLES where Customer and Item Family codes may be assigned to records which define FAMILY pricing for that combination Family pricing is active in program ORDER when user is in ADD mode or in program BILL when user is entering a one step invoice where no sales order was involved As each detail line is entered normal line item pricing will take place Family pricing will take place when the user proceeds to the SUMMARY screen at which time all lines meeting family pricing criteria will be repriced If a detail line were priced by CONTRACT pricing then this line will be ignored for family pricing If a detail line were priced MANUALLY then family pricing would not reprice this line However this lines quantity will be included with other lines of same family in order to ascertain a family price for other line items in the family PRICE MEMO 1 The user may enter a price memo field for miscellaneous use SORT GROUP The user may enter a line item group code used to bring similar line items together in ORDER BILL based on a group code When adding detail lines to an order invoice the user may generally VIEW the details in line number sequence With this field user may resort the details by the item line group code ACF option ar053 offers an option to display line details by the Item Line group code when doing a VIEW or MARGIN view of the details on the order i
224. hat you are allowing to do Branch Transfers There are three transaction types in program POR TR TX TM and two transaction types in program INVR TI TC When adding these records make sure that you enter the new Inventory In transit GL account as the General Ledger Posting Account GLPAR DETAIL G L POSTING ACCOUNT MAINTENANCE INVR SEQUENCE 19 Add 1 record Inventory A R Detail G L Posting Accounts for each transaction ot out _ type as follows Program Name INVR Journal Source ID 5 Sequence Number 19 7 Description COST OF GOODS Source Parameters Used General Ledger Posting Account Division Division TERNI Exit Department FP Department al Bank T G L Account No 120 15 Branch IY INVENTORY IN TRANSIT Bill Method Trans Type Item Acct Group Cust Acct Group Tax ID POS Type Cust Tax Class Sell Branch Tr From Branch Tr To Branch Get next record Please note that if you have multiple parameter fields set to a value of Y a record for each variable for each transaction type must be added Release NGS 6 30 IC 219 Next Generation Inventory Control GLPAR DETAIL G L POSTING ACCOUNT MAINTENANCE POR SEQUENCE 37 Add 1 record for f Inventory and A R Detail G L Posting Accounts SEE each transaction type as follows TR Program Name POR Journal Source ID PR TX Sequence Number a 4
225. he Excel spreadsheet you may format the data When you select mf the View option ICM Cost Maintenance SEE iol vine Sort By Options enu you report can be Item Number output to the Item Description Screen Printer Excel or Hold Item Cross Reference file User Entered Sort Field Name s a b c d e Print Format Options Select L ong or S hort Form Output To Option Output to S creen P rinter E X cel or H old File v go Print Comments Comment Type Release NGS 6 30 IC 167 Next Generation Inventory Control The following fields may be entered ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION XREF Product Group ISAC 1 ISAC 2 ISAC 3 ISAC 4 LAST COST MATERIAL LAST COST LABOR LAST COST OVERHEAD LAST COST OUTSIDE LAST COST TOTAL AVG COST MATERIAL AVG COST LABOR AVG COST OVERHEAD AVG COST OUTSIDE AVG COST TOTAL STD COST MATERIAL STD COST LABOR STD COST OVERHEAD STD COST OUTSIDE STD COST TOTAL INC MATERIAL Release NGS 6 30 Search for items based on the item ID Enter the data to search on then press Enter Search for items based on description Enter the data to search on then press Enter Search for items based on cross reference Enter the data to search on then press Enter Search for items based on Product Group Enter the data to search on then press Enter Search for items based on the item sales analysis category 1 code E
226. he entered date and the inventory usage calendar to arrive at the current period It will then work backwards from the current period and consider the immediate past sales history for each item at each branch in which the item is stocked Example If the processing date is 4 15 1992 which falls in period 4 of the year 1992 the system will use the sales history starting with period 3 of 1992 and stepping backwards for 12 prior periods Release NGS 6 30 IC 331 Next Generation Inventory Control Select the sort option f ISHR Item Sales History Report Sort By Options By Branch By Product Group By Item ID By Branch By Item Xref By Branch By Product Group By Item Xref By Item By Branch Group Totals By Product Group By Item By Branch Group Totals C Print Records with Zero Sales Output To Option Output to S creen P rinter H old File or C ron E v After selecting the sort option must determine if records with zero sales are to be printed Y Select if items with zero sales figures for all twelve periods are to be printed N Select if items with zero sales figures for all twelve periods are to be excluded Select your Output Option Release NGS 6 30 IC 332 Next Generation Inventory Control KITTING MODULE PROCESSING Introduction and Overview The Kitting Module can be used to build and maintain finished goods items and the components that compri
227. iance that exists L List Price Variance A Alternate List Price Variance B List Price and Alternate List Price Variance 1 List Price and Price Memo 1 Variance 2 Alternate List Price and Price Memo 1 Variance 9 List Price Alternate List Price and Price Memo 1 Variance This will be based on the following calculation New List Price Old List Price Old List Price 100 rounded to 5 decimal positions If the old list price is zero the variance will be set to 100 00 If the new list price is zero the variance will be set to 100 00 Release NGS 6 30 IC 147 Next Generation Inventory Control If acf option inv081 is set to zero the over limit check will not occur If acf option inv082 is set to zero the under limit check will not occur Examples Old List Price New List Price Variance Variance 1 20 00 24 00 4 00 20 00 2 50 00 45 00 5 00 10 00 3 20 00 100 00 80 00 400 00 4 20 00 5 00 15 00 75 00 5 0 00 1 00 1 00 100 0096 6 1 00 0 00 1 00 100 00 If ACF option inv081 is set to 40 00 any items with a variance over 40 00 will be flagged In the above examples item 3 and item 5 would be flagged If ACF option inv081 is set to 19 9 Instead item 1 would also be flagged If ACF option inv082 is set to 10 00 any items with a variance under 10 00 will be flagged In the above examples items 4 and 46 would be flagged If ACF option inv08
228. ice base on New List Price Entered Release NGS 6 30 IC 149 Next Generation Inventory Control The system updates the new alternate list price and leaves user at the alternate list IFLP Item Future List Price Maintenance price field Item ID EXAMPLE1 test P Item Xref e user may E override the new Control No MMM Items Exist in Control 3 alternate list price or leave it at the Product Group IFLP recalculated price Alt U M EA Al Stk Conv 6 0000 Pricing UM UM 1 00000 New List Price 17 0000 Old List Price 16 0000 New Alt Price Old Alt Price 4 33333 New Price Memo 1 10 00000 Old Price Memo 1 10 00000 variance Exception Bl List Price amp Alt List Price Variance Exceeded Release NGS 6 30 IC 150 Next Generation Inventory Control Note Once the user tabs through the fields to accept the changes the variance calculation will evaluate the new values and reset the variance flag accordingly In this example the variance flag value has changed from a B to an A Item ID EXAMPLEI IFLP Item Future List Price Maintenance Item Xref Control No MM New List Price 17 0000 Items Exist in Control Product Group uM Alt LI M Alt Stk Conv Pricing UM Prc UM Conv Old List Price New Alt Price 2 83333 Old Al
229. ide IC 35 Next Generation Inventory Control MATERIAL LABOR OVERHEAD OUTSIDE STANDARD COST Enter the Standard Costs for material labor overhead and outside MATERIAL LABOR OVERHEAD OUTSIDE INCREMENTAL MATERIAL LABOR Enter the Incremental Costs for material labor overhead and outside OVERHEAD OUTSIDE OVERHEAD CODES Enter the Item Master Overhead Codes The user may maintain overhead codes through program OVRM COST MEMO 1 Enter Item Master Cost Memo Field 1 Mass Purge Screen f IM Item Master Maintenance Purge SEE Purge Criteria Created Date lt OK Last Activity Date lt 06 24 2005 Last Sale Date lt 06 24 2005 1 1 Cancel Last Receipt Date lt 06 24 2005 Last Date lt 06 24 2005 Last Adjustment Dt lt 06 24 2005 Enter Cut off Created Date Run The Mass purge option provides a method to purge multiple items at a time based a combination of the Date Created Last Activity Date Last Sale Date Last Receipt Date Last P O Date and Last Adjustment Date Refer to ACF option inv069 Release NGS 6 30 IC 36 Next Generation Inventory Control When you select IM Item Master Maintenance EIE the View option from the main Sort By Options Item Number menu your report can be EA uu output to the Item Cross Reference Screen Printer User Entered Sort Field Name s Exc
230. ield when you uture Order click on the drop Slanker Ordar down button in Standing Order that cell a list of ose all PO s on Order 9 will appear ove a 28 669 oj ojojojojojojojojojejojojojojo jojrejojre The sequence which the branches display across the top be re arranged by placing the mouse on the column you wish to move and dragging the column to a new location The sequence can also be managed in the bxm program by setting a all record for the program iqq and placing the proper sequence in the value 1 field Release NGS 6 30 IC 298 Next Generation Inventory Control PKN Branch Program Control File determine n what order the OPTIONS branches will display You can Branch ALL also arag the Option iqq column in IQQ to Program iqq the desired moz mr 4 Previous location Desci sort seq for IQQ ties to brch Help Desc2 code in UIM UTC TC Value 1 13 3 1 2 12 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Next record Release NGS 6 30 IC 299 Next Generation Inventory Control ITQ INVENTORY TRANSACTION INQUIRY Introduction The Inventory Transaction Inquiry program is used to produce a record of all item transactions that affect the on hand balance This audit file allows the user to track all changes made to item on han
231. ield to this amount divided by the factor which would result in 151 20 in the example provided Assign Item Status Item Status Assignment Method 0 Use Item Status from Non Stock Template Item Otherwise set the Item Status defined in this field 1 Normal item 2 Item to be used on inventory reports but not sales reports 3 Item to be used with sales analysis but not on inventory reports 4 Item not to be used on either inventory reports or sales reports Creation Method Order Creation Method ORDER QUOTE SHIP BILL 1 or 2 When a Non stock Item Master record is selected during the entry of transaction 0 Always add to the transaction as a non stock item 1 Always create an Item Master record and add to the transaction as a stock item 2 Prompt the user whether to create an Item Master or enter as a non stock UPC UM UPC Unit of Measure Method 0 or 1 or 2 Release NGS 6 30 IC 272 Next Generation Inventory Control 0 Do not set the UPC Unit of Measure or Unit Quantity when creating Item Interchange records 1 Set the UPC Unit of Measure or Unit Quantity based on defaulting to the Item Master when creating Item Interchange records UPC Unit of Measure will always be set to the alternate unit of measure Unit Quantity will be set to 1 2 Set the UPC Unit of Measure or Unit Quantity when creating or updating Item Interchange records to the corresponding fields in the Vendor Non stock Item UPC
232. iew all the selected records with the most important fields listed on one screen If the user double clicks on any of the records or highlights a record and clicks the OK button the ILP main edit program is executed and gives the user access to all the fields in the ILP table e IM Item List Price Maintenance Sort By Options Item Number OK Item Description Cancel Item Cross Reference User Entered Sort Field Name s a b v c d e Print Format Options Select L ong or S hort Form 5 v Output To Option Output to S creen P rinter E X cel or H old File Print Comments Comment Type Select VIEW to choose the Sort By Options Using the Output to Option X you can send your report to Excel After you transfer your data across to the Excel spreadsheet you may format the data Release NGS 6 30 IC 133 Next Generation Inventory Control The following fields may be entered ITEM NUMBER Search for items based on the item ID Enter the date to search on then press Enter DESCRIPTION Search for items based on description Enter the data to search on then press Enter X REF Search for items based on cross reference Enter the data to search on then press Enter Product Group Search for items based on Product Group Enter the data to search on then press Enter ISAC 1 Search for items based on the item sales analysis category 1 code Ent
233. ile Name following entries Field Sequence Number will be prompted Query for Field Name Field Description View Field Length Field Type Number of Decimals Exit DIF Field Active Help Update existing records OVE This option allows the user to control the name and length of fields in the file being printed Example The user may be using item memo 1 to store a 5 character specification number The user may modify the item memo 1 field definition in this table to change the field name to read Specification No and the length to be shortened to 5 characters This will print in place of item memo 1 when input forms are printed These changes are only reflected in this output the maintenance screens will remain as the standard screen Release NGS 6 30 IC 294 Next Generation Inventory Control ILBL ITEM LABEL PRINT PROGRAM Introduction SEE THE LABELS DOCUMENTATION MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO CREATE LABEL FORMATS AND PRINT LABELS USING THESE FORMATS The Item Label Print program allows for the user to accomplish the following 1 To define the formatting of labels for output This option allows the user to create as many different formats as needed Formatting may be used to produce not only continuous form labels but rolodex cards continuous post cards envelopes etc The purpose of the formatting routine is to allow users to format label output according to the siz
234. images Location usr IBMIHS htdocs devbdl images File Name tape 125 gif File Name tape 125 t gif Get next record Functions Available This is used to Update fields in a record This will set the parameters in all the fields to the defaults for an item It will set the Allowed Flag to Y set the image to the item id with a gif extension set the thumbnail file name to the item id attaching a t to the file name with a gif extension and se the image locations to where the acf options are pointing A warning message will appear before function is performed f Default Option WARMING This option will DEFAULT ALL THE FIELDS by setting them based on the Item ID This will REPLACE the current values in these fields Do you want to proceed with this This will set the Allowed Flag to N then clear the image file the thumbnail file and the image location paths A warning message will appear before function is performed Release NGS 6 30 IC 53 Next Generation Inventory Control e Clear Option WARNING A This option will CLEAR ALL THE FIELDS on this screen Do you want to proceed with the CLEAR b Next This is used to access the next record if multiple records were chosen 4 Previous This is used to access the previous record if multiple records were chosen bret This is used to List all the records in a list format one line per record if
235. in the Item Cross Reference defined in the Item Master for the primary item DESCRIPTION 1 This field will contain the Item Description 1 defined in the Item Master for the primary item DESCRIPTION 2 This field will contain the Item Description 2 defined in the Item Master for the primary item SUBSTITUTE ITEM Enter the Item ID for the Substitute Item SUBSTITUTE XREF This field will contain the Item Cross Reference defined in the Item Master for the substitute item Release NGS 6 30 IC 67 Next Generation Inventory Control SUBSTITUTE DESCRIPTION 1 SUBSTITUTE DESCRIPTION 2 SORT BY CODE OBSOLETE DATE SUBST MEMO 1 SUBST MEMO 2 SUBST MEMO 3 SUBST MEMO 4 Release NGS 6 30 This field will contain the Item Description 1 defined in the Item Master for the substitute item This field will contain the Item Description 2 defined in the Item Master for the substitute item Enter the Item Substitution or use the drop down window Enter 1 to sort in order of Lowest to Highest Quantity Available Enter 2 to sort in order of Highest to Lowest Quantity Available Enter 3 to sort in order of Highest to Lowest Gross Profit Dollars Item List Price Item Cost Enter the date this substitution will become obsolete Enter Substitute Memo 1 Information Field length is 25 characters Enter Substitute Memo 2 Information Field length is 25 characters Enter Substitute Memo 3 Information Field length is 25 cha
236. inball xls Biinblt xls Bipicms xls Bl ipicmloadt xls vy O em imdi360 xls Ef ipicmload2 xls ipicmload3 xls Bi lipicmload4 xls ipicmload xls print xls 8 219 06 e amp Blifem620 xls Bi nifemcc xls ifcrvixm xls Sl jiflpitmist xls igm xls lt Type Microsoft Excel Worksheet Author mike Date Modified 1 12 2010 4 22 PM Size 15 0 KB EE File name Cancel DER Files of type Spread Sheet Files sls xlsx xl csv oY gle View Insert Format Tools Data Window AMEA MENE IE Ba MES Control B C G EH New Overhead New Outside New Total litem ID Description 1 Prod Grp New Material New Labor MATA DOMTEST test fi i MA251 IFCMCC test 0 15 E 0 00 MA1123 IFCMCC test 5 00 0 30 250 IFCMCC test 0 15 0 00 MA118 IFCMCC test 5 00 0 01 MA112 IFCMCC test 6 00 0 00 MAD902 IFCMCC test 1 00 0 10 MA1122 IFCMCC test 0 20 0 00 MA1310 IFCMCC test 0 15 0 00 1 MA12345 IFCMCC test 0 20 f 0 00 MA307 IFCMCC test 0 15 0 00 MA347 IFCMCC test 0 15 0 00 MA352 IFCMCC test 0 15 b 0 00 K Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheets 7 DE LESE The NEW COST ROLLOVER option allows the user to rollover the new cost into the item master and or item branch costs If Inventory to G L Interface is active and the user has selected an option to roll costs into Item Branch R
237. ined in the ILP program The Customer Master file has a field called Price Matrix which can be maintained in program CM These fields are automatically drawn in when programs ORDER and BILL are utilized The matrix lookup routine may be accessed automatically 8 ways using the following priority scheme for finding the correct matrix record Each of the 8 schemes offers another possible way by changing the keys for lookup to perform the match to find the correct matrix record The following describes the variables keys and the sequence in which they are utilized 1 CUSTOMER ID and ITEM ID In this method a perfect match on both Customer ID and Item ID are used to perform the matrix lookup 2 CUSTOMER ID and ITEM MATRIX CLASS In this method the Customer ID and Item Matrix Class are used to perform the matrix lookup 3 CUSTOMER ID and ITEM MATRIX CLASS ALL In this method the Customer ID and Item Matrix Class ALL is used to perform the matrix Release NGS 6 30 IC 113 Next Generation Inventory Control lookup 4 ITEM ID and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS In this method the Item ID and the Customer Matrix Class are used to perform the matrix lookup 5 ITEM ID and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS ALL In this method the Item ID and Customer Matrix Class ALL is used to perform the matrix lookup 6 ITEM MATRIX CLASS and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS In this method a perfect match on both fields is attempted when doing the matrix looku
238. ing fields may be entered LINE NO This field stores the line number for this kit component and is automatic COMPONENT This field stores the Component ID ITEM DESC This field stores Description 1 for this component ITEM DESC 2 This field stores Description 2 for this component ITEM XREF This field stores Item Cross Reference for this component QUANTITY KIT Enter the quantity of components required to build each kit PRICE MATRIX Enter the Price Matrix Code With Pricing Code C price components the Price Matrix Code may be overridden from the Item Master record by entering a value in this field If this field is left blank the Price Matrix Release NGS 6 30 IC 343 Next Generation Inventory Control Code from the Item Master record will be used This allows you to have different pricing rules in effect when you sell an item as a component of a kit than when you sell the same item independently ITEM FAMILY Enter the Item Family Code With Pricing Code C price components the Item Family Code may be overridden from the Item Master record by entering a value in this field If this field is left blank the Item Family Code from the Item Master record will be used This allows you to have different family pricing rules in effect when you sell an item as a component as a kit than when you sell the same item independently SALES ORDER Enter Sales Order Print Option This option determines how the component PRINT line item will
239. ion Release NGS 6 30 follow s Number of Rev Cycles Off season Total Purchases in the off Season PO Target The program ICRC may be used to compute the number of review cycles Enter the number of days between reviews during the active season The number of days between reviews is to be entered based on the following No of Days Rev Active season Number of days in the Active season Number of Review cycles Active season The program ICRC may be used to compute the number of days between reviews Enter the number of days between reviews during the off season The number of days between reviews is to be entered based on the following No of Days Rev Off season Number of days in the off season Number of Review cycles Off season The program ICRC may be used to compute the Number of days between reviews f IBPL Product Line Branch Details Maintenance View SEE Sort By Options By Vendor By Product Line ID js dui Cancel By Buyer By Vendor By Product Line ID By Branch By Product Line ID Branch By Vendor By Product Line ID Run By Branch By Buyer By Product Line ID By Branch By Buyer By Vendor By Product Line ID Output To Options Output to S creen Printer Hjold File or E xit S OVE IC 77 Next Generation Inventory Control IBTM ITEM BRANCH TRANSFER MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Item Branch
240. ion fields of the Vendor non stock item Options Override Item ID Description e Item Master Non Stock Item Selection Vendor ID ANDE30 vendor Item ID 140007 vendor Item Desc1 BEAD RAIL 5 8 Vendor Item Desc 2 E Vendor Item Size 1 Vendor Item Size 2 Vendor UPC Code Formatted Item ID Formatted Item Desc 1 AW CP2 BEAD THERRATONE RAIL Formatted Item Desc 2 THERRATONE RAIL 5 8 Formatted Item Xref 1400077 Item Generation Flag N Release NGS 6 30 IC 290 Next Generation Inventory Control The system will then prompt the user to create the item master record If the user responds Yes it will create the item master record and pull the item into the transaction as a stock item If the user responds No it will pull the item into the transaction as a non stock item Options Create Item Master record Responding No Km to create item master record the system Item ID 311400077 OK pulls the item SSS into the Desi transaction as Desc 2 BEAD THERRATONE RAIL 5 8 a non stock EA item as shown Release NGS 6 30 IC 291 Next Generation Inventory Control INVENTORY FORMS PROGRAMS IIF ITEM INPUT FORMS Introduction The Item Input Forms program provides the user with the capability to print ITEM INPUT FORMS The fields th
241. ion inv038 below inv083 The cost that will display for kit types 1 2 and 3 will 0 No Cost will be displayed be calculated based upon the quantity per kit defined 1 Item Master Last Cost for each component times the component cost The 2 Item Master Average Cost component cost selected for the calculation will be 3 Item Master Standard Cost based on the option value that is set O 4 4 Item Branch Cost Security may be placed on Displaying Kit unit cost using program SSM as follows Program Name KINQ sub window costview Type of security P assword or U ser Ring Menu option M Value is either Password or User ID Release NGS 6 30 IC 348 Next Generation Inventory Control KITWU KIT WHERE USED Introduction This program enables the user to locate where a component item is used in the Kit file Use the Query function to determine in which kit a particular component is used Enter the component ID press Accept button and all kits using that component will be listed You can also use the View option to create a report of all Kits that show the Component ID that you entered You have the option to Print this report in full or print specific pages Procedure From the main f KITWU Kit Where Used Inquiry menu enter the OPTIONS KITWU Component program Description U M Kit Details Kit Description Exit Program Query selected records Select QUERY f KITWU Kit Where Us
242. irectly by the user Kit Type 4 priced at A Bor D which are all header type pricing These kits will NEVER recalculate cost when shipped or billed Cost will remain the same as when originally exploded in order Kit Type 4 priced at H Header This pricing code should not be used for kit type 4 The cost for all detail line items will be set to zero for kit type 4 price code H This will cause the item to be billed at a 0 cost General Operation The general theory of operation for this set of programs is as follows KITM The purpose of the Kit Maintenance program is to allow the user to maintain kit structures These kits are primarily used in the QUOTE ORDER BILL programs to allow kit items to be processed This feature allows the user to enter a single KIT item and have the system process all the details associated with the kit KINQ The Kit Availability Inquiry program allows the user to review kit component availability with an indication of how many kits can be produced at a given point in time based on current on hand inventory quantities KITWU The Kit Where Used program enables the user to locate where a component item is used in the Kit file The user may query on the screen or view output to the printer or hold file KITCL The Kit Cost Listing Single Level enables the user to output a cost listing of the components of a kit KITICL The Kit Indented Cost Listing allows the user to output an indented multi level cost l
243. is file when building line items in ORDER or BILL This is the normal method for access to the family matrix price routines These codes may be entered into the Customer and Item Master records and automatically brought into the Order or Invoice files A secondary access method to the matrix is also available as described below The user may also establish pricing for Item Families for ALL customers without having to set up customer classes if ALL customers receive the same price When prompted for Customer Family enter ALL The family matrix pricing routing will first try to find a match on ITEM FAMILY CUSTOMER FAMILY to accomplish family pricing If no perfect match is found it will try a second time to find the ITEM FAMILY plus where the CUSTOMER FAMILY ALL When entering detail lines in ORDER or BILL the detail lines will have their normal pricing routines exclusive of family pricing Family pricing will occur when the user goes to the SUMMARY screen at which time all detail lines applicable for family pricing will be repriced If a detail line entered was priced using CONTRACT pricing the price will remain the contract price This line will be totally ignored in any family pricing algorithms and the quantity on the contract price line detail will not be included with other line items for family price discounting If a detail line entered was priced by the user MANUALLY family pricing will not override the user entered price
244. isting This program enables the user to create a report showing the indented costs for multi level kits The user selects all kits or selected Kit ID s The report may be sorted by kit line number or component ID The user may select cost option of last average or standard Report can be queried on the screen or sent to a printer or the hold file Additional costs for each component are also displayed on the report These include Ext Mat Ext Labor Ext Ovhd Ext Outs and Ext Total A rolled up cost for each kit will also be displayed User has the option to include current Item Master Cost for the kit header item Release NGS 6 30 IC 334 Next Generation Inventory Control KITM KIT MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Kit Maintenance Program is to allow the user to maintain kit structures These kits are primarily used in the QUOTE ORDER BILL programs to allow kit items to be processed This feature allows the user to enter a single KIT item and have the system process all the details associated with the kit Procedure The Kit Maintenance program allows the user add new kits or update remove query view and duplicate existing kits To add a new Kit you must first add the Kit ID in the Item Master IM program Then use the Kit maintenance program KITM to set up the kit header and the components NOTE Because the Kit ID for kits that are built on demand is typically not an actual physical item you may wish
245. item branch record does not exist The system WILL allow user to proceed with the transaction 4 Warning will be provided if the quantity to be transferred exceeds the current item branch available quantity based on ACF option inv010 OR if the item branch record does not exist The system WILL NOT allow user to proceed with the transaction When the option is set to 1 2 3 or 4 the system will also warn the operator if the transaction quantity exceeds the location quantity for items with warehouse bin lot or serial control but will not prevent the entry Release NGS 6 30 IC 212 Next Generation Inventory Control inv050 nexttp 061 po030 po031 po032 po033 po036 In Transit File in Use for Branch Transfer Transactions This option controls whether or not In Transit detail records will be written by BILL or POR when transfer transactions are updated Y Write transfer transactions to In Transit File N Do NOT write transfer transactions to In Transit File POE Next Transfer Purchase Order For Branch Transfers This option contains the next sequential Transfer Purchase Order number for POE TP Branch Transfer transactions Default Transaction Type for Branch Transfer Requisitions 0 TP 1 TS POE Transfer PO Assignment Method This option indicates to the Purchase Order Entry POE program how to assign PO numbers for Transfer Purchase Orders TP 1 Assign next purchase orde
246. l be displayed and the user will not have an optional list from which to choose Demand for reordering purposes for items ordered stays with the original item In the Detail Line Item record for the order being entered the substituted item replaces the original item entered and the original item entered is saved in another separate field Note Forms may need customization depending on how you wish to show this on Sales Orders Quotes Invoices etc Release NGS 6 30 IC 65 Next Generation Inventory Control SUBSTITUTION CODES The ORDER and BILL programs allow for automatic item substitution based on the codes defined in the customer and item master records CUSTOMER ITEM RESULTS IN THIS CALCULATION SUBSTITUTION SUBSTITUTION CODE CODE tf tora No substitution Item A is entered which has substitute item X pricing excluding contract pricing descriptions discounts etc will come from entered item A All inventory and cost updates will come from item X Entered item A will automatically be replaced with item X A will be saved on the line Item A is entered which has substitute item X is completely replaced with X This code is normally used when A is no longer in use and has been totally replaced by item X Item A is entered which has substitute item XS All pricing X including contract X pricing descriptions commissions discounts etc will come from
247. l no 3 To nearest 3 decimal no 4 To nearest 4 decimal no 5 Round up to the next whole no 6 Round down to the next whole no Q 7 Round to the nearest whole no 8 No rounding Item Cost Method Selection Options 1 Item Master Last Cost 2 Item Master Average Cost 3 Item Master Standard Cost 4 Item Branch Cost Selected Branch Valid entries are 1 2 3or 4 OVE Enter the desired option to automatically calculate new cost records in the item future cost file If the percentage method is utilized and the user wants to increase new cost by 10 00 enter 110 00000 If the fixed amount option is utilized simply enter the amount to be added to the old cost in order to arrive at a new cost If the user has selected the Options to Calculate NEW Cost based on old cost by using either option 2 Apply a percent times old cost to calc new cost or option 3 Apply a fixed amt to old cost to calc new cost the following entry window will open for user to have the option to adjust all cost fields e New Cost Changes Material 2 ooooo K Labor 2 00000 1 Overhead 2 00000 z Help Outside 2 00000 Release NGS 6 30 IC 171 Next Generation Inventory Control The system will automatically default ALL costing fields to the value entered Should a user wish to change ONLY material cost by the entered value the Labor Overhead and Outside cost fields must manually be
248. lculate NEW List Price based on OLD List Price i OK 2 Apply a percent times old list price to calculate new list price Cancel 3 Apply a fixed amount to old list price to calculate new list price Help Enter Percentage New List Price Percent X Old List Price rr Enter Fixed Amount i New List Price Amount Old List Price Calculated New List Price Rounding Options 1 To nearest 1 decimal no 2 To nearest 2 decimal no 3 To nearest 3 decimal no 4 To nearest 4 decimal no 5 Round up to the next whole no 6 Round down to the next whole no 7 Round to the nearest whole no 8 No rounding Release NGS 6 30 IC 138 Next Generation Inventory Control Alternate List F IFLP Item Future List Price Changes Automatic Select Options Price Processing User Options To Calculate NEW Alternate List Price based on OLD Alternate List Price Note Option 4 is Apply a percent times old alternate list price to calculate new alternate list price controlled by acf Apply a fixed amount to old alternate list price to calculate new alternate list price option 080 Calculate new alt list price based on new list price when applicable based on ACF inv080 otherwise new alt list price will equal old alt lilst price Click radial button Enter Percentage Yo New Alt List Price Percent X Old Alt List Price to mark selected Enter Fixed Amount New Alt List Price Amount O
249. ld Alt List Price options and click Calculated New Alt List Price Rounding Options OK to execute 1 To nearest 1 decimal no 2 To nearest 2 decimal no 3 To nearest 3 decimal no 4 To nearest 4 decimal no 5 Round up to the next whole no 6 Round down to the next whole no 7 Round to the nearest whole no 8 No rounding Note The user has the capability to calculate the new alternate list price based on the new list price This would be controlled by ACF option 080 When importing records either ASCII or Excel file if the alternate list price is included it will use the alternate list price from the import file and ignore the value in acf option linv080 Following are examples of how the new alternate list prices would be calculated based on Item master settings and the value in acf option inv080 Examples AItU M Alt Stk Conv Pricing UM Prc UM Conv New List Price 1 PK EA 6 00000 PK 1 00000 25 00000 2 EA EA 1 00000 C 0 01000 25 00000 3 EA EA 1 00000 EA 1 00000 25 00000 ACF Option Inv080 Value Example New Alternate List Price 0 1 2 3 Alternate List Prices will not be processed 1 1 Old Alternate List Price 1 2 Old Alternate List Price normally would be zero 1 3 Old Alternate List Price normally would be zero 2 1 4 16667 25 00 6 0000 Calculation New List Price Alt Stk Conv Rounded based on acf option ar050a Release NGS 6 30 IC 139 Ne
250. ld enter 25 00000 in the price adj amount The standard cost is derived from the item master record This number will then be increased by the number multiplied by the price adj amt To have the selling price be 10 over the number the user would enter 10 00000 in the price adjustment Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts The quantity break will determine the price adjustment not the price adj amount This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Enter the dollar value for the selling price Enter the dollar value for the alternate unit list price Enter the dollar value for the price adjustment Enter the value for the price adjustment Enter a 2 character pricing unit of measure description If L is entered it would indicate LOT pricing is applicable The price conversion factor is utilized when user wishes to price an item in a different unit of measure than it is stocked For example an item may be stocked by the EA but priced per hundred In the example listed below the stock U M would be EA and the price U M could be C with the pricing conversion factor set to 010000 Quantity Ordered 2500 Stock U M E
251. lds may be entered PRIMARY BRANCH TRANSFER BRANCH ALLOW TRANSFER INDICATOR ALLOW TRANSFER LIMIT INDICATOR Release NGS 6 30 Enter the Primary Branch The primary branch is the branch which will receive a transfer Enter the Transfer Branch The transfer branch is the branch which will transfer merchandise to the primary branch Enter the Allow Transfer Indicator 1 Transfer between the transfer branch and the primary branch is allowed 2 Transfer between the transfer branch and the primary branch is not allow ed Enter the Transfer Quantity Limit Indicator 0 Transfer Up to Surplus Level 1 Transfer Up to Available Quantity 2 Transfer Up to Line Point 3 Transfer Up to Order Point 4 Transfer Up to Safety Allowance Quantity IC 72 Next Generation Inventory Control IBPL ITEM BRANCH PRODUCT LINE MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Item Branch Product Line Maintenance program is to define product line information for a particular branch This file controls line buying targets and review cycle processing Procedure From the menu enter IBPL IBPL Product Line Branch Details Maintenance Product Line ID Branch Screen 1 Screen 2 Vendor m Rev Cycle days Buyer A Annual PO Value Target Unit Annual PO Units Target Annual PO Weight Annual PO Volume Last Rev Date Seasonal Indic Next R
252. lid item id BRANCH Enter a valid branch id MONTH amp DAY Enter the month and the day that the values in this file should be moved into the Item Branch table this is controlled by setting up the IBPOM MISCRON EFFECTIVE Enter the starting and ending effective dates FROM AND THROUGH DATE PROCESS TYPE Defaults to N for normal STATUS Defaults to O for open Release NGS 6 30 IC 80 Next Generation Inventory Control SPECIAL CUSTOMER S ITEMS CROSS REFERENCE MAINTENANCE CICR CUSTOMER ITEM CROSS REFERENCE MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Customer Item Cross Reference Maintenance program is to allow the user to define records which define a customer the customer s part number and the corresponding Item ID to which the customer s part number refers Programs ORDER and BILL allow the user to enter the customer s part number in order to find our item ID Procedure From the menu P f enter CICR CICR Customer Item Cross Reference Maintenance SEE OPTIONS Customer ID Customer Name Update Customer Xref Remove Customers Item Id Customers Desc Our Item ID Our Item Desc Duplicate Query View Import Our Item Xref Help Memo 1 Exit Program Add records QVE Select from the Menu options Use the Add button to add a new record Use the Update button to update existing records Use the Remove button to remove records Use the Duplic
253. ll set the Ship To ID field to a value of CMATRIX ID If entering a column matrix record by Option Value of 2 value of acf option 0e047a signifying entry will be based on a Customer Match Selection and acf option oe047a is set to a value of 3 the Customer Match Selection will be by 2 Customer S A Cat D the user must enter the following field Cust ID Enter a valid Customer Sales Analysis Category D Code or use the drop down selection Sold To window to search for a valid CSAC D Code Ship To The system will set the Ship To ID field to a value of CSACD _ ID The main keys for accessing the Column Matrix Table are the Customer Sold To ID the Customer Ship To ID and the Item Match Class The Item Match Class may be either the Item ID the Item Price Matrix code the Product Group code or the Item Sales Analysis category 4 code ACF option 047 determines which of the Item Match classes are used to perform the search Note You must have MT records set up on the system in order to take advantage of this feature After entering the Customer selection process the user must enter the Item Match Class for the CMT record This Item Match Class is determined by the value in acf option 0e047 06047 value 1 Enter a valid Item ID or use the drop down button for an Item selection window Item ID 06047 value 2 Enter a valid Item Price Matrix Code or use the drop down button for an Item Matrix Item Price Class selection window Mat
254. lowed by the Interchangeable Item Maintenance table IIM followed by the Item Master IM table and finally the Vendor Non stock tables VNSIM and VNSIUM to find the item you are seeking If the item is found in the vendor non stock tables you can accept the item and have it automatically entered into the order or quote as a non stock item with a period preceding the part number or you can convert this non stock item into a stock item in your Item Master file at entry time providing you have the proper security A Vendor Non Stock Item Selection button is also provided This will allow you to display and select from all vendor non stock item records for selection criteria that you enter Sales of all non stock items are written out to the Sales Analysis Files so that reviews can be done to determine if items should become stock items Importing from Excel Spreadsheets requires a WINGS license Additional Item Attributes training and consultation may be required General Operation When using this feature you must first define a default non stock record in the item master file through the program IM This record will contain values in the fields that will act as default values for the vendor items when they are being created Once that IM record is established the next step is to set up a vendor non stock template record with the program VNSITM using that Item ID as the Template Item ID Once this has been done use the program VNSIM
255. ly if weight or volume is used to express PO Targets it is assumed that the PO Weight or PO Volume for all items of the product line is being expressed in the same weight or volume unit respectively P O TARGET Enter the Purchase Order Target for this product line as stipulated by the specified vendor The target should be expressed in the unit defined in the PO Target Unit field Release NGS 6 30 IC 74 Next Generation Inventory Control FUTURE USE FUTURE USE SEASONAL INDICATOR REVIEW CYCLES YEAR FUTURE USE FUTURE USE REVIEW CYCLE DAYS ANNUAL P O VALUE ANNUAL P O UNITS ANNUAL P O WEIGHT ANNUAL P O VOLUME LAST REVIEW DATE NEXT REVIEW DATE Release NGS 6 30 Enter the Seasonal Indicator Y if this is a Seasonal product line Seasonal Product Lines require information regarding the Start and End of the season as well as the Start and End of Purchasing for the season N if the Product Line is not seasonal Enter the number of Review Cycles for the year for the product line Program ICRC may be used to compute this The number of Review Cycles for a product line is derived by the following formula Rev Cycles per Year Total Annual Purchases for the Prod Line PO Target The review cycle in days for this product line Enter the Annual Value of Purchases made of all items forming part of this product line If sufficient purchase history has been built the program ICPH may b
256. m quantity Column Matrix Pricing The CMT program is a preprocessing step that takes place prior to the PMT pricing logic in the system It ONLY substitutes the customer matrix class field in the item detail record for any matching combination that is met in the table ALL SYSTEM PRICING IS STILL PERFORM ED BASED ON THE PMT HIERARCHY The Quote Order Ship and Bill programs will check to see if a CMT record exists for a particular customer match class and item match class The customer match class may be a customer id customer type customer matrix class or customer sales analysis category D code depending on how the CMT is coded The item match class may be an item id item matrix class product group or item sales analysis category 4 field depending on how the CMT is coded The item match class is defined by ACF option oe047 The customer match class is defined by ACF option 0e047a If a match is found the transaction s Customer Matrix Class for this item is overridden by the class from this record Whether a record is found or not the system then proceeds with the next step This is accomplished by entering records in the Column Matrix Table Maintenance Program CMT The CMT program works in conjunction with the PMT This table gives the user the ability to choose from multiple prices for different product mixes e g if an item has 3 different prices defined as price matrix 1 2 and 3 A p
257. m Picture Maintenance program is used to maintain images for an item in the WINGS version of the Next Generation Software These images can be displayed in various programs throughout the system such as IM IPAI ORDER etc In addition to maintaining images for the WINGS version this program is also used to maintain items and images that you sell on the WEB if you are properly licensed for those products ACF option sys016 determines what method to use in locating the directory where the images are stored The WINGS product uses the same logic as the WEB products in determining where and how to display these images From the F IPICM Item Picture Maintenance menu enter OPTIONS IPICM or Item ID Update use the Description EEE program IM m Mass Update and click on Product Group e jd Maintain E E Images button or dic use the Thumbnail B2BM Spec File program JavaScript using option Block Qty Input Image Thumbnail Location Location File Name File Name Release NGS 6 30 IC 51 Next Generation Inventory Control Menu options Update This is used to Update fields in a record Query This is used to query items Mass Update You can select groups of items by using the product group ISAC codes item ID or the Description 1 fields You can utilize the Next Generation wildcard and from thru features The Allowed on Web field must have a value of
258. m the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 19 The price memo 1 in item master for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over price memo 1 the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The price memo 1 is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 20 The price memo 1 in item master for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 00 over price memo 1 the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The price memo 1 is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 21 The total last cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over last cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The last cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion fact
259. m will utilize the list price in the item file The system s hierarchy for item sell price in the ORDER and BILL program highest to lowest User manual override Contract Pricing CPM Matrix Pricing PMT and List price IM Procedure Release NGS 6 30 IC 96 Next Generation Inventory Control From the F CPM Contract Pricing Maintenance menu enter OPTIONS CPM n Item ID Customer ID Contract ID Remove Screen 1 Screen 2 Query Duplicate Price Method Cd Sales Agent 1 Contract Price Sales Agent 2 view Contract Alt Price Duplicate Mass Effective Date Remove Mass Expiration Date Contract Dup Contract Qty Comments Help Ordered To Date Contract Cost Meth Remaining Qty Exit Program Customer Item No Update existing records OYK Release NGS 6 30 IC 97 Next Generation Inventory Control Use the MENU OPTIONS buttons to perform one of the following functions ADD UPDATE REMOVE QUERY DUPLICATE VIEW DUPLICATE MASS REMOVE MASS CONTRACT DUP HELP RUN EXIT PROGRAM Release NGS 6 30 To ADD new records To UPDATE existing records To REMOVE an entire existing record To QUERY existing records To DUPLICATE existing records to new records User has an option to duplicate from another Order OR from Invoice History To VIEW existing records The Duplicate_Mass feature of this program provid
260. mation Costs and rebates entered in this record will override the same fields normally brought into sales orders from the item and customer tables 2 Same as 1 except cost fields ARE NOT used from this record Costs will come from the normal branch If the f CPM Contract Pricing Maintenance Contract Cost Method is 1 or 2 the Item ID BUYBACK Desc Enter Model of Buy Back H following Customer ID ALL2000 Name SEASON SUPPLY CORP screen will Contract ID 12 U M 4 m b Next appear Screen 1 Screen 2 4 Previous Help Material Cost Item Rebate Cd Labor Cost Itern Rebate Rate Exit Overhead Cost n Other Cost Cust Rebate Cd ds Total Cost Cust Rebate Rate Contract Vendor Contract Plan Cd Update current record QVE If the VIEW P AA f CPM Contract Pricing Maintenance View option is selected the following output options are available Customer ID by Item ID Sort By Option F Print Comments Comment Type Output To Option Output to P rinter S creen or H old File s M Release NGS 6 30 IC 100 Next Generation Inventory Control Duplicate Contract Pricing records If Dis f CPM Contract Pricing Maintenance entered from the Menu the CPM prompts Item ID LETTUCE 6PK Desc Update for the user Customer ID ALL2000 Name ALL SEASON SUPPLY CORP to search for Contract ID
261. methods of transferring inventory listed above Typically if using a method that creates a transfer sales order transfer purchase order the sell price on the transfer sales order would be 0 This would cause no general ledger posting to occur for accounts receivable or sales The material cost on both transactions should be the same General ledger postings should be set up to post the cost of goods portion of the transaction to inventory in transit accounts as described below It is important that the total item cost on the transfer sales order and the purchase cost on the transfer PO are the same If they are different this will cause amounts to be left in the inventory in transit accounts User should also note that the purchase order program does not allow entry of labor overhead or outside costs User has an option to roll all these costs up to material cost on a branch transfer PO However if you need to maintain these costs on the item in the transfer to branch you will need to use the ITE branch transfer procedures Typically a receipt of goods whether via a branch transfer receipt or a regular stock receipt will update the last cost in the item cost maintenance program For users whose inventory is valued on either an average or standard costing method ACF option inv084 will control whether or not the system will maintain the last cost for branch transfer receipts of goods This ACF option will be utilized by both the Purchase Or
262. mum margin If the item OE Margin 96 is found to be zero then a global ACF option called 06012 allows the user to define the margin minimum value rate Any detail lines entered in ORDER or BILL program falling below that minimum margin level will prompt and advise the user of the margin exception NOTE User has an option to use a different COST than the detail line item cost to calculate margin violations Review the settings in acf options 0e009 0e009a 0e009b for the cost that may be used ACF option oe104 will control the transaction types in the order and bill programs that will be omitted from the margin check capabilities described above IC 31 Next Generation Inventory Control OE DEL FUTURE USE FUTURE USE LENGTH LEGTH UM WIDTH WIDTH UM THICK THICK UM FUTURE USE OBSOLETE INSPECT DRAWING REFERENCE DRAWING SIZE FUTURE USE FUTURE USE OE MARGIN ITEM REVISION RTG REV LOW LVL SCRAP ITM SRC IMC CODE FUTURE USE Release NGS 6 30 This field stores the percent of completion for an item This field is utilized in determining whether or not a backorder should be written if the item quantity shipped is XX XXX percent complete All other backorder codes must be in affect as well as this percentage which usually will default to 100 00 percent The item length This is an informational field only The unit of measure for length This is an informational field only The item width This is
263. n Inventory Control COMPONENTS is active for kit types 1 2 or 3 Kit type 4 has a different set of controls for reviewing kit details Enter Y to always review each Line Detail in QUOTE ORDEH BILL Enter N not to review each Line Detail in QUOTE ORDER BILL Enter P to be prompted to review each Line Detail in QUOTE ORDER BILL SALES ORDER Enter Sales Order print option This option determines how the kit line PRINT item will appear in the output of the Sales Order Print program The following codes may be entered 1 Do not print the kit header line 2 Print description quantity price and extension 3 Print description price and extension 4 Print description and extension 5 Print description and quantity 6 Print description quantity and extension 7 Print description only INVOICE PRINT Enter Invoice print option This option determines how the kit line item will appear in the output of the Invoice Print program The following codes may be entered 1 Do not print the kit header line 2 Print description quantity price and extension Print description price and extension Print description and extension Print description and quantity Print description quantity and extension Print description only AC 1 PICK TICKET PRINT Enter Pick Ticket print option This option determines how the kit line item will appear in the output of the Pick Ticket Print program The following
264. n be done by using the automatic replenishment programs PRGEN POGEN 2 They can be done by creating manual transfer orders in programs POE PO entry and ORDER sales order entry 3 They can also be done through order entry by using the standard Branch query screen or the standard Purchase query screen 4 They can be done as on demand transfers through the Branch Transfer Requisition Maintenance BTRM program 5 They can be done as on demand transfers through the Inventory Transaction Entry ITE program using the On Hand Quantity Transfer option You will have to decide if you are running your branches as profit centers This decision will impact the set up and method of transferring inventory If you run your branches as profit centers each branch will maintain gross profits If this is the case then you will need to transfer inventory under a method that creates a transfer sales order with a sell price greater than zero and a material cost The material cost on the transfer sales order should be the same as the cost on the transfer purchase order Methods 1 through 4 will work for this type of transfer With this method Inventory Cost of Goods Sold Sales and Accounts Receivable postings would post the same as to any other customer The only difference is you may want to set up some type of inter company sales cost of goods sold posting accounts If your branches are not run as profit centers then you can typically use any of the
265. n the first level occurrence of a PMT record in field 29 memo2 in order for it to search the subsequent levels listed in field 29 Example If you have the Price Matrix Table set up as follows Customer 1234 orders 15 pieces of item 123 It will match on the first record being there is nothing coded in the Memo field on this PMT record It will not search any further in the table and use the first Matrix record it matches on Item Matrix Customer Price Quantity Quantity Memo2 Class Matrix Class Price item 123 cust 1234 22 item123 ALL 25 10 20 7 ALL ALL 30 12 25 If the DUPLICATE mode is selected the user is able to duplicate an entire customer or item class to another customer or item class Prompts will guide the user through the DUPLICATE mode Release NGS 6 30 IC 124 Next Generation Inventory Control Duplicate Duplicate Duplicate by tem Matrix Customer Matrix Option Duplicate Option Selection Window Duplicate FROM Item Matrix Class Customer Matrix Class Screen 1 Screen 2 01 Description 16 Sell Price 02 Pricing Usage CD 17 03 Selling Price 18 Qty Break Option 04 Alt Sell Price 19Qty Break Value 05 Price Adj Amt 06 Price Adj Amt 07 Pricing U M LVL Qty Break 08 Pricing U M Conv F 1 09 Promo Usage CD 10 Promo Start Date 11 Promo End Date
266. nch must have AT LEAST xx xx of 100 in surplus to initiate the transfer where xx xx is user defined value in this ACF option Procedure GENERATING BRANCH TRANSFER REQUISITIONS To being the process the user would first have to generate branch transfer purchase requisitions From the menu enter PRGEN to go to the purchase requisition program There are 6 windows that you will have to select options on Release NGS 6 30 IC 239 Next Generation Inventory Control Ra OE Fe f PRGEN Auto generate Purchase Transfer Requisitions SEE Requisition Type Options Purchase Requisitions Only Both Auto create Sales Order for all transfer requisitions Create Non Stock Requisitions e Drop Ship Requisitions On the 1 window select Branch Transfer Requisitions Only Auto create sales order for all transfer requisitions should be checked Click OK button to proceed to next window PRGEN OANE Auto generate Purchase Transfer Requisitions Window 2 Selection Criteria for Demand Action Items Branch Product Line Item ID Item Desc Cancel Item Xref Item Type Commodity Code Product Group Item SAC 1 Item Status Item SAC 2 Buyer Item SAC 3 Primary Vendor Item SAC 4 IMC Code Last Activity Date Control Number Enter Order Search Criteria Sales Order Number On Hold Flag Sales Order Line No On Hold Reason Customer ID Ship To ID
267. nding PO Req Hel D Review Purchase Req E Change Default Value Default Values Tran Type ITP Date Wanted 03 25 2006 ZZz1000 Quantity 10 EA Create SO Vendor If desired user may complete branch transfer purchase requisition and or purchase order from this screen Prior to creating the branch transfer purchase requisition and or purchase order check to be sure the transaction type is TP and the vendor is the branch transfer vendor ID If this is not the case select option E Change Default Value Change information in the default value screen A transaction type of TP signifies the item will be replenished from a Branch Transfer If the transaction type is not TP this signifies the item is being replenished from an outside vendor If user selects Purchase Requisition the system will display the following window Release NGS 6 30 IC 261 Next Generation Inventory Control Purchase Requisition option will display the following Generate P O P O Requisition Options NOTE selections of A B C D E are controlled by E values ACF options B Generate Approved PO discussed above Cancel C Generate Pending PO Req Hel D Review Purchase Req E Change Default value Run Default Values Tran Type TP Date Wanted 03 26 2006 Vendor ZZZ1000 Acct Group Quantity Create SO Prior t
268. ned for the user POGEN Transfer Sales Order Selling Branch Default Method This option defines the method to use in the setting of the selling branch in the transfer sales order generated 0 Allow Order Entry logic to define the selling branch in the same manner that is used when the transaction is entered directly through ORDER 1 Always set the selling branch to the branch defined for the customer 2 Always set the selling branch to the branch defined for the user 3 Always set the selling branch to the purchase order branch Release NGS 6 30 IC 215 Next Generation Inventory Control po064 POE Transfer PO Restrict Update Remove amp Close This option defines whether the PO Entry program will allow the user to update purchase order detail fields remove a purchase order detail record or close a purchase order detail record for transfer purchase orders where a corresponding sales order exists 0 Allow the user to update remove and close transfer purchase order detail records where a corresponding sales order exists 1 Prevent the user from removing or closing transfer purchase order detail records where a corresponding sales order exists Also prevent the user from updating the purchase order quantity cost cost conversion factor or po quantity to stock conversion factor where a corresponding sales order exists If your branches are set up as profit centers your General Ledger is already set up to handle
269. ng price be 25 00 over standard cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The standard cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 17 The total standard cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over standard cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The standard cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 18 The total standard cost for this line item will be increased IC 116 Next Generation Inventory Control Release NGS 6 30 by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 00 over standard cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The standard cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived fro
270. nit of measure the system will set the new material unit cost to 15000 price per EA since the assumption is that since the pricing is per hundred the costing would be per hundred as well Example 2 Item Master field settings for item id XYZ100 IM Field Field Description Field Contents 6 U M PK 7 ALT UM EA 21 ALT STK CONV 6 135 PRICING UM PK 136 PRC UM CONV 1 Sample of Excel sheet being imported item_id_itfptm p nmatcst_ifcsttmp Release NGS 6 30 IC 179 Next Generation Inventory Control XYZ100 15 00 If the cost will be converted from the pricing unit of measure to the stocking unit of measure the system will leave the new material cost as 15 00 Cost per pack Selection 6 IFCM Item Future Cost Changes Automatic Upload Options options Message Click radial The System Will Proceed To Upload Records From The Specified Directory button to mark And File Names Into The Item Future Cost Table selected options and click OK to From PC 3sie From Main System Item Selection Criteria Prime Vendor Match Upload Item To Field Options 1 Item ID 2 Item Cross Reference 3 Item Description 1 4 Item Description 2 5 Item Memo 1 6 Item Memo 2 7 Item Memo 3 8 Item Memo 4 9 UPC Interchange ID 10 Vendor Part ID VIXM Proceed Enter the CONTROL NUMBER Division Department Enter PROCEED to begin ITEM FUTURE COST Ascii File U
271. nt costs at each branch It is important to note that programs ORDER and BILL utilize the cost from the branch record for an item depending on the branch utilized in the ORDER or BILL transaction The cost in the item master is the last cost and average cost of all branch activity The user needs to maintain the branch level costs for an item if the ORDER and BILL programs are to arrive at the correct cost for an item If warehouse bin or lot serial number is active on an item the user may maintain or view these costs also User has the option to open branch or item location cost windows once an item has been selected Procedure From the menu F ICM Item Cost Maintenance f amp f enter ICM Main Menu Item No Description Update Cross Ref Last Cost Average Cost Standard Cost 146 Mat 151 Matl 156 Matl 147 Labor 152 Labor 157 Labor x 148 Ovrhd 153 Ovrhd 158 Ovrhd 149 Outsd 154 Outsd 159 Outsd TOTAL TOTAL TOTAL 161 Incr Material 166 162 Incr Labor 167 179 163 Incr Overhead 168 164 Incr Outside 169 dI INCR TOTAL 182 183 173 Overhead Codes 184 174 Cost Memo 1 185 Update existing records OVR Release NGS 6 30 IC 166 Next Generation Inventory Control Select VIEW to choose the Sort By Options Using the Output to Option X you can send your report to Excel After you transfer your data across to t
272. nter 1 to generate separate Purchase Orders for items required for each Grouping Option product line Enter 2 to generate a single purchase order for a vendor by grouping together items across product lines Typically for a BTRM process this option would be a value of 2 PO Date Enter the date you wish to create the transfer PO for Print PO Report Enter Y to print a PO report immediately after generating the Purchase After Process Orders Enter N not to print a PO report immediately after generating the Purchase Orders The Report may be printed subsequently by choosing the corresponding menu option Release NGS 6 30 IC 229 Next Generation Inventory Control Page Break After Enter Y to page break on the PO Report after each Purchase Order prints Each P O Enter N if you do not wish to page break Starting Transfer The system will assign a starting PO number for the selected requisitions If Order No ACF option po031 has a value this value will proceed the number from ACF option nexttp System will then prompt for report output selection as follows f Print report A Output report to Select desired report output Upon completion of the transfer purchase order and transfer sales order the system will display the following window Processing Requisition No 56222 Vendor 2221000 Branch 3 Product Line Item 2013444 No Of Reqs Processed d Transaction Type TP Purchase
273. nter Y to allow sales analysis category to display on the WEB Memo 1 Alpha numeric field with a maximum of 30 characters Memo 2 Alpha numeric field with a maximum of 30 characters Memo 3 Alpha numeric field with a maximum of 10 characters Memo 4 Numeric field only Memo 5 Numeric field only Memo6 Date field only format is mm dd yy Release NGS 6 30 IC 11 Next Generation Inventory Control Memo 7 Date field only format is mm dd yy Release NGS 6 30 IC 12 Next Generation Inventory Control OVRM OVERHEAD MATERIAL RATE MAINTENANCE Introduction The Overhead Material Rate Maintenance program is one of the programs on the Item Validation Code Menu and is used for maintaining the Overhead Material Rate codes file Procedure From the menu f enter OVEM OVRM Overhead Material Code Maintenance SEE OPTIONS Overhead Code Overhead Description Overhead Rate Calc Method Add records OVE These fields may be entered to maintain the Overhead Material Rate codes OVERHEAD CODE Enter the code for overhead in this field OVERHEAD Enter the description designated by the Overhead code DESCRIPTION OVERHEAD RATE Enter the overhead rate for the overhead code in this field CALC METHOD Enter the method to be utilized in calculating overhead for an item 1 Apply overhead rate against material cost 2 Apply overhead rate against labor cost Release NGS 6 30 IC 13 Next Gene
274. nter the data to search on then press Enter Search for items based on the item sales analysis category 2 code Enter the data to search on then press Enter Search for items based on the item sales analysis category 3 code Enter the data to search on then press Enter Search for items based on the item sales analysis category 4 code Enter the data to search on then press Enter The last material cost The last labor cost The last overhead cost The last outside processing cost The system will calculate the total last cost The average material cost The average labor cost The average overhead cost The average outside processing cost The system will calculate the average total cost The standard material cost The standard labor cost The standard overhead cost The standard outside processing cost The system will calculate the standard cost total The incremental material cost for this item IC 168 Next Generation Inventory Control INC LABOR INC OVERHEAD INC OUTSIDE INC TOTAL OVERHEAD CODES COST MEMO 1 If the LIST option is selected If the VIEW option is selected the following s screen will appear Release NGS 6 30 The incremental labor cost for this item The incremental overhead cost for this item The incremental outside processing cost for this item The system will calculate the incremental total cost The user may enter up to three valid overhead codes assigned to this
275. ntory Control Item Future List Frice IFLP Item Future List Price Maintenance Maintenance option Item ID Item Xref Update Remove E u M Alt Stk SSS New List Rollover Control No Iterns Exist in Control Pricing UM Help Pre UM Cony New List Price Old List Price New Alt Price Old Alt Price New Price Memo 1 Old Price Memo 1 Variance Exception Add records Note If the user updates the New List Price and acf option inv080 is set to a value of either 2 or 3 and the alternate to stock conversion factor is not set to a value of 7 or the pricing conversion factor is not set to a value of 7 for the item The user will be prompted to Recalculate New Alternate List Price based on New List Price f the user responds Y the system will recalculate the alternate list price and re display the recalculated alternate list price f the user responds N the system will proceed to the alternate list price prompt without recalculating it to allow the user to manually override it if desired Price Variance Exception Logic The user has the ability to flag records that are over or under a user defined variance limit compared to the old prices This is controlled by acf options inv081 and inv082 The variance flag will be displayed in the Item Future List Price Maintenance Screen The variance flag field may contain one of the following values based on the var
276. nvoice Enter the Discount Table Code to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Handling Code to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Handling Rate to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Handling Table Code to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Insurance Code to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Insurance Rate to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice Enter the Rebate Code to be used with this transaction The value entered here will override the corresponding value from the Customer Master file used for this Order Invoice IC 110 Next Generation Inventory Control REBATE RATE MEMO 1 MEMO 2 MEMO 3 MEMO 4 MEMO 5 START DATE END DATE Release NGS 6 30 Enter the Rebate
277. nvoice The user may also opt to modify output print programs to sort by this item line group code if desired REPRICE CODE Enter the reprice code Valid entries are NULL No repricing of transaction 1 Repricing the transaction Programs Order and Bill utilize this code to determine if the transaction should be repriced Certain transactions will allow for repricing based on this code in conjunction with the item reprice code on each line item Both the customer reprice code and the line item reprice code must be set in order for the transaction to be repriced FO Future Order Releasing may reprice the order SO Standing Order Releasing may reprice the order OR Normal Order may be repriced when billed SI Standing Invoice Release Option in BILL program may reprice SUGGESTED This field stores the suggested retail price for the item RETAIL Release NGS 6 30 IC 136 Next Generation Inventory Control PRICING UM Enter the pricing unit of measure This may be a 2 character pricing unit of measure description If there is a LOT price for this item for sale enter a price unit of measure of L to indicate LOT price In this example the selling price is the total lot price for this sale regardless of the quantity entered or price conversion factors PRICE UM Enter the price conversion factor The price conversion factor is utilized CONVERSION when an item is to be priced in a different unit of measure than it is stocked
278. o creating the branch transfer purchase requisition and or purchase order check to be sure the transaction type is TP and the vendor is the branch transfer vendor ID If this is not the case select option Change Default Value Change information in the default value screen A transaction type of TP signifies the item will be replenished from a Branch Transfer If the transaction type is not TP this signifies the item is being replenished from an outside vendor User should note not ALL options displayed in this document may be displayed on YOUR system ACF options described above control the selection options you have determined to display The following options may be selected from this window E Change Default Value This option would be selected if user wishes to make a change to any field in the Default Values displayed Default value changes if needed must be done prior to creating any other transaction s A Generate PO Req and PO This option would be selected to generate an approved branch transfer requisition and the corresponding branch transfer purchase order B Generate Approved PO Req This option would be selected to generate an approved branch transfer requisition If user selects this option they will have to run the POGEN process to create the branch transfer purchase order C Generate Pending PO Req This option would be selected to generate a pending branch transfer requisition If user selec
279. o indicate whether these are items customer may or may not order The Sales Order Entry program will validate against any records set up in this table to see if customer is allowed or not allowed to purchase these items Enter the customer name Enter the customer cross reference The Customer Valid Item code will automatically display from the Customer Master Valid Item field This field controls whether these items can or cannot be ordered Enter our item ID Enter our item description Enter our item description 2 Enter our item cross reference Enter a free form memo 1 Enter a free form memo 2 f CVIM Customer Valid Item Maintenance View SEE Sort By Options O By Customer Name By Our Item ID By Our Item ID By Customer ID Number of Lines to skip between records 0 Enter the Order By selection criteria OYE IC 88 Next Generation Inventory Control CVPGM CUSTOMER VALID PRODUCT GROUP MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Customer Valid Product Group Maintenance program is to establish and maintain a database of valid product groups for each customer The table has a flag that controls whether these product groups are for items user may or may not order The Sales Order Entry program will validate against any records set up in this table to see if customer is allowed or not allowed to purchase these items Procedure From the menu enter CVPGM e CVPGM Customer Valid
280. o the purchase order being received for the cost to be updated Y Update Transfer PO Unit Cost From Invoice Total Material Labor Outside Overhead Unit Cost M Update Transfer PO Unit Cost from Invoice Material Unit Cost N Do NOT Update Transfer PO Unit Cost inv012 ITE Option to Prompt Display Cost During ITE Entry This option is used in the Inventory Transaction Entry ITE program to control whether or not to display and or prompt for cost during entry 1 Display and prompt for cost in ITE program 2 Do NOT display and prompt for cost in ITE program ITE Option 1 and Option 3 1 Display and prompt for cost 2 Do NOT display and prompt for cost ITE Option 2 and Option 4 1 Display and prompt for cost 2 Display cost Release NGS 6 30 IC 211 Next Generation Inventory Control inv012a ITE Transfer From Branch Unit Cost Default This option is used in the Inventory Transaction Entry ITE program Option 4 only to determine what cost to use in the Transfer From Branch portion of the entry L Use Item Master Last Cost IM ICM A Use Item Master Average Cost IM ICM S Use Item Master Standard Cost IM ICM X Use From Branch Cost IM ICMB N Use No Cost On Record inv012b ITE Transfer To Branch Unit Cost Default This option is used in the Inventory Transaction Entry ITE program Option 4 only to determine what cost to use in the Transfer To Branch portion of the entry L Use
281. ol Proprietary Notice This manual contains information which is proprietary to Munics Information Systems Inc and all rights are reserved No part of this manual or its contents may be used or reproduced by any means without the express written permission of Munics Information Systems Inc Disclaimer of Warranty The material contained herein is subject to change without notice Munics Information Systems Inc makes no warranty express implied or by description regarding the information set forth herein Munics Information Systems Inc does not guarantee warrant or make any representation regarding the use of or the results of the use of the programs in terms of correctness accuracy reliability currency or otherwise and the purchaser relies on the programs and the results solely at his her own risk NEXT GENERATION is a registered trademark of Munics Information Systems Inc Copyright 1987 2006 Munics Information Systems Inc Release NGS 6 30 IC 4 Next Generation Inventory Control ICINTRO INVENTORY CONTROL INTRODUCTION Introduction The Inventory Control application covers the preparation of item master information files daily operation of the inventory management system and the production of inventory reports The Inventory Control application has been designed to simplify the maintenance of inventory and to produce reports that provide critical management information required for proper control of inventor
282. ol The following fields may be entered OUR ITEM ID Enter our item ID ITEM DESCRIPTION Item description will display ITEM DESCRIPTION 2 Item description 2 will display INTERCHANGEABLE Enter the interchangeable item ID The data entered here is not validated ITEM against the item master This entry allows the user the ability to set up any interchangeable ID user requires and have it point to the correct item ID which must be a valid item The sales order program will check this table to see if an interchangeable item has been entered in the ITEM ID field of the order detail and then insert the proper ITEM ID which this interchangeable item points to INTERCHANGEABLE Enter the interchangeable item description DESCRIPTION MEMO 1 Enter a free form memo 1 MEMO 2 Enter a free form memo 2 COMPATIBILITY Enter the compatibility percentage VENDOR ID Enter the vendor ID OBSOLETE DATE Enter the obsolete date Select VIEW to choose the output options OE Interchangeable Item Maintenance Our Item ID OK Item Description Cancel Item Description 2 Help Interchangeable Item Interchangeable Desc Memo 1 Information Memo 2 Information Compatibility Vendor ID Obsolete Date gn Enter Our Item ID or Press Zoom For Item Lookup Release NGS 6 30 IC 60 Next Generation Inventory Control IVCM ITEM VALID CUSTOMER MAINTENANCE Introduction This program allows the
283. on Code VALIDATION CODE 1 Indicates user MAY order only if records have been defined in program CGVPGM for the customer and product group being ordered 2 Indicates user MAY NOT order any records that have been defined in Program CGVPGM for the customer and the product group being ordered OUR PRODUCT Enter a valid Product Group ID Product groups are maintained in program Release NGS 6 30 IC 85 Next Generation Inventory Control GROUP PGM OUR PRODUCT This field is system maintained GROUP DESC MEMO 1 Enter Memo 1 information Field length is 20 characters MEMO 2 Enter Memo 2 information Field length is 20 characters MEMO 3 Enter Memo 3 information This is a decimal field MEMO 4 Enter Memo 4 information This is a decimal field Release NGS 6 30 IC 86 Next Generation Inventory Control CVIM CUSTOMER VALID ITEM MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Customer Valid Item Maintenance program is to establish and maintain a database of valid items for each customer The file can contain a list of items the customer can or cannot order This file works in conjunction with the Valid Item Check field in the Customer Master The Sales Order Entry program will validate against any records set up in this table to see if customer is allowed or not allowed to purchase these items Procedure From the menu enter CVIM e CVIM Customer Valid Item Maintenance Customer ID Customer Name
284. on based in the pricing unit of measure conversion factor see acf option inv089 for the defined calculation methods Item Cost The program will automatically default this field to the user s inventory costing Release NGS 6 30 IC 178 Next Generation Inventory Control Method Selection method in use based on acf option inv003 This field may be overridden If a user Options has multiple branches and wishes to update the branch costs this selection should be based on Option 4 Item Branch Cost Note the item branch cost is the cost used for billing inventory adjustments etc Note Imported Cost Unit of Measure Options Acf option inv089 defines whether the cost imported from an ASCII or Excel file is in the Pricing unit of measure rather than the stocking unit of measure Costs in the system are stored in the stocking unit of measure This option allows the user to import a spreadsheet from a vendor where the vendor is providing the costs in the pricing unit of measure The system will convert the costs from the spreadsheet to the stocking unit of measure Examples Example 1 Item Master field settings for item id ABC100 IM Field Field Description Field Contents 6 U M EA 7 ALT UM EA 21 ALT STK CONV 1 135 PRICING UM C 136 PRC UM CONV 01 Sample of Excel sheet being imported item id itfptm p nmatcst_ifcsttmp ABC100 15 00 If the cost will be converted from the pricing unit of measure to the stocking u
285. ons Include Positive Balance Items Include Negative Balance Items C Include Zero Balance Items Output To Options Output Report to S creen P rinter H old File C ron Print Format Ljong Form or S hort Form Release NGS 6 30 IC 322 Next Generation Inventory Control Enter the selection criteria CEJ IVR Inventory Valuation Report Selection Cirteria Item Number Description Description 2 Item Xref Branch ID Branch IMC Code Item Type Code Item SAC 1 Product Group Item SAC 2 Item Status Code Item SAC 3 Commodity Code g Item SAC 4 Item Price Matrix Item IMC Code Enter Item ID selection Release NGS 6 30 IC 323 Next Generation Inventory Control ICRAR ITEM COST ROLLOVER AUDIT REGISTER Introduction The Item Cost Rollover Audit Register provides the user with an audit trail of changes made to item cost data The register is designed to output the old cost data the new cost data and any inventory valuation changes that were changed as a result of the costs being modified from the item future cost maintenance IFCM program new_cost_rollover function Procedure From the menu enter ICRAR From Branch Master From Item Master Select the sort options The user may sort by Branch or by ltem Master Branch by Item ID H Cancel Item Xref by Branch Branch by Item Xref
286. ons will be collected by control number sequence number the order in which they were actually entered Cancel summary of transaction types will be given at the end of each control number Help GULE Inventory Transaction Register Control Date 09 29 2005 Control No 923 Division 2 Department 3 Enter the amount of lines between details ol C Page Break on new Control Output To Option Output Register to S creen Printer H old File or E xit S If option Exit without Processing is selected the following window will open e Warning No Transaction Updating will occur Upon Exiting Without Processing ALL Current Inventory Transactions will be purged Are you sure you want to exit Release NGS 6 30 IC 199 Next Generation Inventory Control ITRM ITEM TRANSACTION ENTRY REASON MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Item Transaction Entry Reason Maintenance program is to maintain a table of transaction entry reason codes that could be applied to an inventory transaction that is being done in the ITE program Procedure From the menu enter f ITRM Item Transaction Entry Reason Maintenance Reference Reason Code Transaction Type Reference Reason Description Memo 1 Memo 2 Memo 3 Memo 4 Memo 5 Add records QVI The following fields may be entered REFERENCE Enter the Reference Reason Code REASON CODE Fiel
287. ontrol Screen 4 f IM Item Master Maintenance Item No 125 Update o Duplicate Description Tape 125 new item desc 1 4 STREAMING TAPE M First 4 Previous Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 Screen 4 b Next Last Cost Average Cost Standard Cost 146 Matl 101 37357 151 Matl 99 53150 156 Matl Last 147 Labor 0 41014 152 Labor 0 41016 157 Labor S comments _ oS L So A Comments 148 Ovrhd 95 00000 153 Ovrhd 94 93102 158 Ovrhd 149 Outsd 0 41014 154 Outsd 0 41016 159 Outsd SHEL etus TOTAL 197 19385 TOTAL 195 28284 TOTAL B Item Notes Help 161 Incr Material 0 00000 162 Incr Labor 0 00000 163 Incr Overhead 0 00000 164 Incr Outside 0 00000 INCR TOTAL 0 00000 173 Overhead Codes 1 174 Cost Memo 1 0 00000 Update current record The following fields may be entered ITEM NUMBER The unique item ID assigned to this record The item ID may not contain a space or an asterisk It should not begin with a period Every item record is required to have a unique ID When in ADD mode user may use the drop down window to search and display a list of existing items DESCRIPTION This field stores the primary item description Field length is 30 characters DESCRIPTION 2 This field stores a secondary description for this item Field length is 30 characters ITEM XREF This field stores a cross reference for this item This field is useful when an item h
288. ontrol Item ID mm EXAMPLEl mm EXAMPLEZ EXAMPLES lt Development Database Item Future Price View Description 1 test IFLP test IFLP test IFLP Prod Grp New List 25 0000 25 0000 25 0000 New Alt List 4 16667 10 00000 15 00000 New Prl Memo 10 00000 20 00000 30 00000 Page 1 Old List ol 16 0000 25 0000 25 0000 Page Control Print Find Text Prev Next First Last Exit Small Print All Printer Ihpnike Copies 1 Browser View Clea Page i of 1 Jumpto Print Pages from i Save to PC Next Prev Open File Look in My Documents v e ea My Data Sources E ako201 xls 4 My eBooks B3 ak xls My Recent Pictures Ebart xls Documents WatchGuard BD bw1 xls Reflection Et bw120809 xls G WebEx BI bwaddorg xls Desktop 20 6 20wedipold xls BI bwcommdif xls E 2009BGPL xls BI bwcomopn xls se My Documents My Computer My Network gt 8832010 01 08 22 44 xls 20 2010 01 13 22 14 1 0 2010 01 16_01 05 5 20 2010 01 18 23 37 xls 20 2010 01 29 23 24 xl 20 2010 02 03 _03 31 16 B xls BI bwcompay xls E bwitmadd1 xls BI bwitmupdt xls BI bwng xls bwnot3 xls bwok xls BI bwsahdr1 xls i File name sls v Files of type Spread Sheet Files xls slt dtu csv IC 153 Next Generation
289. or Customer Match Class Method This option is used in the Column Matrix Table Maintenance CMT program to define what selection will be available at the Option field when adding records This option is used by the Order Ship and Bill programs to determine what the column matrix table should match when calculating sell price It is also used when calculating the sell price for a customer in the Price Book IPBK and Item Price Availability Inquiry IPAI programs 0 Customer Match Class is Sold to Ship to only 1 Customer Match Class is Sold to Ship to if OPTION field is set to 1 Customer Ship to Customer Match Class is Customer Type Code if OPTION field is set to 2 Customer Type 2 Customer Match Class is Sold to Ship to if OPTION field is set to 1 Customer Ship to Customer Match Class is Customer Matrix Code if OPTION field is set to 2 Customer Price Matrix 3 Customer Match Class is Sold to Ship to if OPTION field is set to 1 Customer Ship to Customer Match Class is Sales Analysis Code D if OPTION field is set to 2 Customer S A Cat D For example the XYZ company sells widgets gadgets and gizmos XYZ has multiple price levels for each of these products Depending upon the customer sold or customer match class any of the three products can be sold at any of the different price levels The CMT program handles this logic for the user Procedure Release NGS 6 30 IC 106 Next Generation Inventory Control From the men
290. or the item and customer being sold to 2 Indicates customer CANNOT order any records that have been defined in program IVCM for the item and customer being sold to 3 Indicates customer CANNOT order this item if it is outside of the date ranges specified CUSTOMER ID Enter a valid Customer Code CUSTOMER NAME Use the customer s name as search criteria to find a valid customer record CUSTOMER XREF Use the customer s cross reference as search criteria to find a valid Customer record MEMO 1 Enter Memo 1 information Field length is 20 characters This field will display in IVCM only MEMO 2 Enter Memo 2 information Field length is 20 characters This field will display in IVCM only MEMO 3 Enter Memo 3 information This is a numeric field This field will display in IVCM only MEMO 4 Enter Memo 4 information This is a numeric field This field will display in IVCM only START DATE Enter the Start Date for this record Format is mm dd yyyy END DATE Enter the End Date for this record Format is mm dd yyyy In the ADD mode the user must first select an Item Master code then choose a validation code After entering a valid Customer Master code the user is prompted for optional Memo fields The program will prompt a Correct Y N flag The user must answer Y es to save the record If they answer N o they will be re prompted for a Customer code After the record is added the program will re prompt for an additional Customer Mas
291. or will also be multiplied against the extension Code 22 The total last cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 00 over last cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The last cost is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 23 The list price for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over list price the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The list price is derived from the item master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 24 The list price for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount IC 117 Next Generation Inventory Control
292. oup 1 1 Product Name 2 Material Content 3 Size B Create By 4 Color Update Date 5 Prod CI 15 Other 03 6 Prod CI 16 Other 04 23 Memo 01 91910 7 Prod 17 Other 05 J 24 Memo 02 8 18 Other 06 25 Memo 03 9 Prod LC 19 Other 07 s 26 Memo 04 01 01 1980 10 Prod LC 20 Other 08 J 27 Memo 05 01 01 1980 3 11 Prod LC 21 Other 09 28 Memo 06 0 00000 Hoe e 12 Prod LC 22 Other 10 29 Memo 07 0 00000 30 Memo 08 13 Other 01 31 09 14 Other 02 32 Memo 10 33 Source Item ID OVE The following fields may be entered to build or maintain the Item Product Master table Product Name Enter a Product Name Material Content Enter the Material Content Size Enter the size Color Enter the color Prod Cl Enter a valid Product Care Instruction 1 Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Prod CI Enter a valid Product Care Instruction 2 Code codes may be defined through Release NGS 6 30 IC 38 Next Generation Inventory Control Prod Cl Prod LC Prod LC Prod LC Prod LC Other 01 Other 02 Other 03 Other 04 Other 05 Other 06 Other 07 Other 08 Other 09 Other 10 Memo 01 Memo 02 Memo 03 Memo 04 Memo 05 Memo 06 Memo 07 Memo 08 Memo 09 Memo 10 Source Item ID Release NGS 6 30 program IPMMSC Enter a valid Product Care Instruction 3 Code codes may be defined through program IPMMSC Enter a valid Pro
293. owance Auto Recorder Code Order Point Freeze Indic Date Created IC 329 Next Generation Inventory Control Average Usage Report Selections Release NGS 6 30 e IMR Inventory Management Reports Selection Criteria Item ID Item Desc Item Desc 2 Item Xref Item Type Branch Product Group Item Status Item SAC 1 Item SAC 2 Item SAC 3 Item SAC 4 Primary Vendor Ld Available Inventory Calculation Enter No of Lines to Skip between details Em v IMC Code Safety Allowance Auto Recorder Code Order Point Buyer IC 330 IV 2 Next Generation Inventory Control ISHR ITEM SALES HISTORY REPORT Introduction The purpose of the Item Sales History Report is to allow the user to output sales quantity information for items Procedure From the menu f ISHR Item Sales History Report enter ISHR Selection Criteria Item ID Item Desc Item Xref Item Type Branch Product Group Item Status Buyer Primary Vendor IMC Code Commodity Code Item SAC 1 Item SAC 2 Item SAC 3 Item SAC 4 Last Activity Date Enter the Processing Date 09 22 2005 12 Year 2005 Period 9 Enter Search Criteria For Item ID K After determining the selection options the processing date must be entered The system will use t
294. p 7 ITEM MATRIX CLASS ALL and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS In this method program will take the CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS present and automatically set the ITEM MATRIX CLASS ALL to try to find a valid matrix record 8 ITEM MATRIX CLASS and CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS ALL In this method program will take the ITEM MATRIX CLASS present and automatically set the CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS ALL to try to find a valid matrix record Sequence 1 is attempted first if no matrix record is found then sequence 2 is tried if no record is found then 3 is tried etc Once the appropriate matrix record is found the program will check the pricing usage code to determine what to utilize to calculate the correct price The pricing usage codes are defined below The following fields may be accessed ITEM MATRIX CODE Enter the Item Matrix Class Code The code may be up to 18 characters When CUSTOMER MATRIX CLASS DESCRIPTION PRICING USAGE CODE Release NGS 6 30 not in ADD mode user will be permitted to search for matrix records based on either matrix file data or fields from the item master file A window will display user search options Enter the Customer Matrix Class Code The code may be up to 10 characters Enter a brief description for this table entry Enter the matrix pricing usage code The system offers several pricing usage codes that can be utilized to arrive at a selling price The following codes and routines may be utilized by
295. phanumeric Free Form Memo Alphanumeric Enter the Source Item if this item is being made from another inventoried item This is information only and can be used by custom programs which are designed for you For example if this is a screening process where a name or number is being entered onto some piece of apparel and you are making that item out of something else you stock you would enter the item id of the material that is going to be used to create this item A custom report could be created to include this information IC 39 Next Generation Inventory Control IPMMSC Introduction ITEM PRODUCT MASTER MAINTENANCE STANDARD COMMENTS Standard Item Product Comments for the Item Product Master table records may also be created These records can be entered through the program IPMMSC This maintenance program will maintain standard records in the tables ipmhcomt Product Item Std Hdr Comment Table and ipmscomt Product Item Std Detail Comment Table Procedure From the menu enter IPMMSC Add new records or Update existing records Select the Comments Button to enter in comments Release NGS 6 30 e IPMMSC Item Product Comment Maintenance ITEM PRODUCT COMMENT MAINTENANCE Item product Comment ID Item product Comment Description Press to Add records IPMMSC Item Product Comment Maintenance ITEM PRODUCT COMMENT MAINTENANCE Item product Comment ID CIPMMSC Item produ
296. play C E A and user may optionally create a record Example 2 C B E 3 This will display C B E and requires an entry Release NGS 6 30 IC 253 Next Generation Inventory Control 0e023b 0e024 Example 3 C 999 This will automatically generate pending PO req without opening window NOTE User should include E Maintain Default Value when using options 1 2 This will prevent requisitions from being created where vendor is NULL ORDER Create Drop Ship PO for Kit Component Lines This option is used by the ORDER program when a Drop Ship item is entered that is the component of a KIT which has exploded This option will define the PO transactions to generate The Following 3 Options Are Valid A 999 Generate PO req and PO B 999 Generate approved PO req C 999 Generate pending PO req Any other value entered will generate NO Purchase Order transaction ORDER Display of PO Window for Non Stock Items Entered This option is used by the Order program when a Non Stock item is entered It controls whether or not the optional PO window will display AND what options are displayed in the window itself Value may store 1 or several display parameters separated by commas One of the following values MUST be entered 1 DO NOT display PO window User may manually open the PO window 2 Auto display PO window User may optionally enter PO Options selected A B C D E will display 3 Auto display PO window User must ente
297. pload 19 472 From PC If the user is loading an Excel file click on the lookup button in the From PC section and select the excel sheet to be loaded From Main f the user is loading an ASCII file enter the directory path and the file name in the System From Main System section Prime Vendor To restrict the items that will be uploaded from the sheet to a specific Vendor Release NGS 6 30 IC 180 Next Generation Inventory Control When a value is entered in this field the system will only select Item Master records where at least one of the corresponding Branch records exist and the Primary Vendor in at least one of the branch records matches the value entered If there is no match the input record will not be loaded Example If a vendor item id is stored in one of the item master fields for example cross reference where different Vendors use the same id to reference different items The system will limit the selection to items where there is at lest one item branch record for the Vendor selection criteria entered Note the system will include an item even if the user selects the cost from the branch table and that branch record does not have a vendor matching the selection criteria but another branch does Match Upload Enter the appropriate field that item id ifcsttmp of the ASCII Excel file should Item to Field be matched to e g If the value in item id ifcsttmp of the ASCII Excel file Options repres
298. ponding Item Master record The user can override the Description 1 field from the Item Master record by entering a new value Normally if you change the Description 1 field in the Item Master for this item this field will automatically be updated to reflect the change If you have overridden the Description 1 value in KITM and wish to retain this overridden value you must set the Description Override flag to Y KIT DESC 2 The default value is the Description 2 field from the corresponding Item Master record The user can override the Description 2 field from the Item Master record by entering a new value Normally if you change the Description 2 field in the Item Master for this item this field will automatically be updated to reflect the change If you have overridden the Description 2 value in KITM and wish to retain this overridden value you must set the Description Override flag to Y KIT XREF The default value is the Item Xref field from the corresponding Item Master record The user can override the Item Xref field from the Item Master record by entering a new value Release NGS 6 30 IC 336 Next Generation Inventory Control Normally if you change the Item Xref field in the Item Master for this item this field will automatically be updated to reflect the change If you have overridden the Item Xref value in KITM and wish to retain this overridden value you must set the Description Override flag to Y
299. r Process C Page Break after each P O Starting Purchase Order No Starting Drop Ship Order No Starting Transfer Order No 73317 OVE On the 3rd window you need to select grouping options Select Branch Grouping option Enter 1 to group requisitions within a branch This will generate one purchase order for each branch for all items required in that branch Enter 2 to group requisitions across branches This will generate a single purchase order for a vendor by grouping together items for all branches Select Product Line Grouping option Enter 1 to group requisitions within a product line This will generate a separate purchase order for items required for each product line Enter 2 to group requisitions across product lines This will generate a single purchase order for a vendor by grouping together items across product lines Starting Transfer PO number will be displayed Enter transfer purchase order date At the Print PO Report after Process prompt Click to mark to print the Purchase Order Report immediately after generating the purchase orders Click to unmark not to print the Purchase Order Report immediately after generating the purchase orders The Report may be printed subsequently by running program GPR Generated PO s Report Click OK button to proceed to next window If you choose to print the Generated PO s Report the system will prompt as follows Release NGS 6 30 IC 251
300. r a PO Options selected A B C D E will display The optional PO window can display options labeled A B C D E A Generate PO req and PO B Generate approved PO req C Generate pending PO req D Generate and maintain pending PO req E Maintain default values User may control which of these options display and in which order Multiple values may be which are broken up into 3 segments as follows Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 A B C D E 2 3 999 works with A B C The following are 3 examples of how a user can utilize this ACF option Release NGS 6 30 IC 254 Next Generation Inventory Control 0e030 Example 1 C E A 2 This will display C E A and user may optionally create a record Example 2 C B E 3 This will display C B E and requires an entry Example 3 C 999 This will automatically generate pending PO req without opening window NOTE User should include E Maintain Default Value when using options 1 2 This will prevent requisitions from being created where vendor is NULL ORDER Display of PO Window for Stock Items Entered This option is used by the Order program when a Stock item is entered It controls whether or not the optional PO window will display AND what options are displayed in the window itself Value may store 1 or several display parameters separated by commas One of the following values MUST be entered 1 DO NOT display PO window User may manually open the PO window 2 Au
301. r number as recorded ACF option nextpo 2 Assign next purchase order number as recorded in ACF option nextpo Prefix this number with value found in ACF option po031 POE TP Transfer Purchase Order Prefix Character This option stores a 1 character prefix that can be inserted in front of the Purchase Order number to arrive at a unique order number for transfer purchase orders The prefix of T is suggested REQM Default Value for Auto Create Sales Order on Transfers This option stores the default value in REQM which controls whether or not a sales order will be created on a branch transfer requisition User may override this value at the time of entry Y Auto create sales orders on branch transfers N Do NOT auto create sales orders on branch transfers POGEN Transfer Order Unit Cost Sell Price Default Option POGEN can optionally create PO s and Sales Orders for branch transfers This option controls method to derive the selling price on the sales order 1 PO system will calculate PO Cost as it normally would Sales Order will calculate sell price as it normally would 2 PO system will calculate PO COST and pass that to the SELL PRICE on the sales order POE TP Unit Cost Default Option for Branch Transfers This option contains the default cost to be used when adding a PO branch transfer Release NGS 6 30 IC 213 Next Generation Inventory Control po037 po042 po043 po047 detail line L
302. ract record EXPIRATION DATE Enter the expiration date for this contract record An automatic purge of expired records is available through program miscron In miscron program name is cpm parameter 1 is PURGE ACF option ar148 determines the number of days to keep expired records on file CONTRACT Enter the maximum quantity permitted under this contract Once the QUANTITY contract quantity is reached the contract is considered completed and no longer in effect ORDERED TO DATE ORDER and BILL programs will update the quantity ordered under this contract REMAINING This is a system maintained field It the Contract Quantity minus the QUANTITY Ordered To Date Quantity CUSTOMER ITEM Enter customer s item ID for our item This field is optional It may be NUMBER used for printing on Sales Order and Pick Ticket forms COMMENTS Enter Y if comments are required for this contract otherwise enter N SALES AGENT 1 Input at this field is available in the VIEW option This will enable a user to view print contracts by selected sales agent 1 ID s SALES AGENT 2 Input at this field is available in the VIEW option This will enable a user to view print contracts by selected sales agent 2 ID s CONTRACT COST NULL Not applicable METHOD 1 Contract Cost is applicable User will be prompted for 2 screen where they may enter cost item rebate and customer Release NGS 6 30 IC 99 Next Generation Inventory Control rebate infor
303. racters Enter Substitute Memo 4 Information Field length is 25 characters IC 68 Next Generation Inventory Control BRANCH MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS BXM BRANCH XREF CONTROL MAINTENANCE Introduction The Branch XRef Control Maintenance program can be accessed by programs to determine associated branches The program has been set up to be a generic control table that programs can access where Branch ID controls the program Example IQQ displays branches in sequence With this control file IQQ reads the UIM record for the user which tells the program what Branch to use Then the program reads the BXM control record to find out in what order and what branches should be displayed when in the Query mode By typing ALL in the Branch field of this record the record will affect all branches that DO NOT have an individual record established In the example below Branch 3 would be displayed on way and all other branches would be displayed another way Procedure From the menu Branch Program Control File enter BXM OPTIONS Branch mp Update Option 7 Program iqq 4 Previous Desc 1 sort seq for IQQ ties to brch Desc2 code in UIM UTC TC Value 1 3 2 1 CANADA Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Previous record Release NGS 6 30 IC 69 Next Generation Inventory Control From the menu Branch Program Control File enter BXM OPTIONS ee upda
304. rams ORDER and BILL have several methods of automatically calculating a handling charge Customer and Item fields control the usage of the feature Refer to the Appendix at the end of the Order Management section Enter the Item Master Handling percentage Enter a valid Item Master Handling Table The user may define handling table records in program HTM The ORDER and BILL programs allow the user to calculate an advertising allowance amount Refer to the Appendix at the end of the Order Management section for further information Enter the Item Master Advertising percentage Rebate codes are required in order to properly calculate rebate amounts on the transaction Refer to the Appendix at the end of the Order Management section for further information Enter the Item Master Rebate percentage Enter the Item Family code associated with this item Programs ORDER and BILL allow the user to employ pricing to items based on a family of items rather than a single item Program FMT allows the user to maintain FAMILY MATRIX TABLES where the user may assign Customer and Item Family codes to records which define family pricing for that combination Family pricing is active in program ORDER when user is in ADD mode or in program BILL when user is entering a one step invoice where no sales order was involved As each detail line is entered normal line item pricing will take place Family pricing will take place when the user procee
305. ransaction type has an effect on sales or N if it does not Release NGS 6 30 IC 18 Next Generation Inventory Control BRANCH TRANSFER Enter Y if this transaction type is considered a branch transfer N if it is not INDICATOR Select Generate Default Records GENERATE to create usage rule Message records This function will automatically create usage rule records for the various inventory transaction types which are considered for usage history purposes Cancel The usage may either choose to Skip existings records or to Overwrite existing records Options Overwrite existing records Enter S or O Release NGS 6 30 IC 19 Next Generation Inventory Control ITEM MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS IM ITEM MASTER MAINTENANCE Introduction The Item Master Maintenance program is one of a group of programs used to build and maintain all item masters in the system Data such as descriptions cross reference units of measure conversion factors item depth control and weight as well as several other informational fields is entered using this program Every item record is required to have a unique ID and may not contain a space or an asterisk It should not begin with a period In the ADD mode a user may use the drop down window to search and display a list of existing items When in ADD mode of IM the user will optionally be chained into programs ILP and ICM Using the View option an option to o
306. ration Inventory Control BUYER BUYER MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Buyer Maintenance program is to establish and maintain a database of buyers Procedure From the menu z enter BUYER BUYER Buyer Maintenance OPTIONS Buyer ID Buyer Mame Exit Program OVE The following fields may be entered BUYER ID Enter the ID associated with this buyer Field length is 2 characters BUYER NAME Enter the Name of the Buyer Field length is 20 characters Release NGS 6 30 IC 14 Next Generation Inventory Control IUFC ITEM USAGE FREEZE CODE MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose of the Item Usage Freeze Code Maintenance program is to maintain a table of freeze codes or disqualification codes that could be applied to items at branches on usage history data Procedure From the menu enter IUFC e IUFC Freeze Code Maintenance Freeze Code Freeze Code Description Add records The following fields may be entered FREEZE CODE Enter the Item Usage Freeze Code ID Field length is 2 characters FREEZE CODE Enter the Item Usage Freeze Code description Field length is 20 characters DESCRIPTION Release NGS 6 30 IC 15 Next Generation Inventory Control IUPM ITEM USAGE PERIOD MAINTENANCE Introduction The Inventory Usage Period Maintenance program serves the purpose of defining the periods to be used for accumulation of inventory usage history While most organi
307. rds Refer to the online help for further information This field stores the substitute item id for this item It is used in conjunction with the item substitution code field Commission Codes are utilized to determine the proper method of calculating commission for that transaction Refer to the Appendix at the end of the Order Management section for further information Enter the Item Master Commission percentage The order entry invoice system calculates discounts based on a combination of discount codes stored in the customer master as well as codes stored in the item master Refer to the Appendix at the end of the Order Management section for further information Enter the Item Master Discount percentage Enter the Discount Table ID assigned to this item The user may define discount codes in program DTM The system allows for calculating an insurance amount automatically when using the ORDER or BILL programs Customer and Item Insurance Codes control which method is utilized Refer to the Appendix at the end of the Order Management section for further information IC 33 Next Generation Inventory Control INSURANCE RATE HANDLING CODE HANDLING RATE HANDLING TABLE ADVERTISING ALLOWANCE CODE ADVERTISING ALLOWANCE RATE REBATE CODE REBATE RATE FUTURE USE FUTURE USE FAMILY PRICE CODE PRICE MEMO 1 FUTURE USE SORT GROUP Release NGS 6 30 Enter the Item Master Insurance percentage The prog
308. reak Option 04 Alt Sell Price 19 Qty Break Value Miew Duplicate 05 Price Adj Amt Mass Remove 06 Price Adj Amt Help 07 Pricing U M Qty Break 08 Pricing U M Cony Default Record 09 Promo Usage CD 10 Promo Start Date 11 Promo End Date 12 Promo Rate 13 Memo Price 1 14 Memo Price 2 15 Run Exit Program co o wm Qo m H Add records Release NGS 6 30 IC 112 Next Generation Inventory Control Screen 2 of f PMT Price Matrix Table Maintenance PMT Options Item Matrix Class Customer Matrix Class Update Screen 1 Screen 2 Remove Query 28 Memo 1 29 Memo 2 SAE 30 Memo 3 Duplicate 31 Memo 4 Mass Remove 32 Memo 5 33 Memo 6 Help 34 Memo 7 Default Record Run Exit Program Add records OVR The two main keys to accessing the price matrix table are the Item Matrix Class and the Customer Matrix Class The user has the option to access matrix records based on fields in the matrix or item files A window will open asking which technique user desires to utilize when selecting records in the matrix table The Item Matrix Class field can be utilized to store either an Item Class Code defined by user or a specific Item ID The Customer Matrix Class field can store either a Customer Class Code defined by user or a specific Customer ID The Item Master file has a field called Price Matrix Code This field can be mainta
309. rect Ship Cross Reference TAPES YTD Receipts Branch 1 YTD Adjustments Help Product Group PGM4 Prev Branch Screen 1 Screen 2 Year Period Sales Direct Ship Receipts Adjustments 2005 0 2005 0 2005 0 2005 2005 2005 2005 2005 2005 2004 2004 2004 2004 of C 4 amp OAs D e co N H H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n m N gt OYK Release NGS 6 30 IC 303 Next Generation Inventory Control Screen 2 f IHQ Item History Query Item ID TAPE 125 YTD Sales Next Branch Item Description 125 MEG TAPE CARTRIDGE YTD Direct Ship Cross Reference TAPES YTD Receipts Branch 1 YTD Adjustments Help Product Group Prev Branch Screen 1 Screen 2 Last Sale Date 08 03 2005 Last Sale Qty 1 Last Adj Date 07 08 2005 _ Last Adj Qty 1 Last P O Date 09 02 2005 Last P O Qty 500 Last Rect Date 03 18 2005 Last Rect Qty Last Phys Date 03 01 2000 Last Phys Qty 100 f VIEW is selected enter the sort options f IHQ Item History Query View Branch by Item ID Item Xref by Branch Branch by Item Xref Product Group by Branch by Item ID Output To Options Output to S creen Pjrinter or H old File S
310. ribed above If you do not wish to allow an update to the costs set ACF option inv012 to a value of 1 ACF option inv012b controls the transfer to branch unit cost DEPARTMENT Enter the department you wish to post the receiving branch inventory to If you are posting records to an inventory in transit general ledger account costs in the from and to branch should be the same This will allow this account to be at a zero balance when the transaction is complete Release NGS 6 30 IC 234 Next Generation Inventory Control When all items have been entered that you wish to transfer click exit accept Then click cancel The following window will be displayed Select f ITE Inventory Transaction Entry Exit and Process to continue with Division 1 ER Trans Date inventory transfer Department z Control Number 979 Authorization Transaction Type Reference Em Item Number Stk UM J B Help Description Alt UM ene Cross Reference Exit and Process Branch Adj Qty UM Mat Cost Add records OVH The system will display the following window e Process Current Transactions Options Exit without Processing To continue Click on Continue with the Inventory Transaction Updating bullet Once this is with transfer highlighted click OK This option will continue with the inventory transfer On hand quantity in the from branch will be reduced On hand quantity in the
311. rint Cost Rollover Register Exit without Updating Item Files Enter control number Release NGS 6 30 IC 187 Next Generation Inventory Control The following conditions should be noted 1 User does not have the ability to roll only specific items from a control ALL items ona control must be processed Should a user wish to process only selected items they must remove the items they do not wish to process on this control prior to running the New_Cost_Rollover option 2 If acf option inv001 Inventory to G L Interface is Active is set to a value of Y the user must Print the Cost Rollover Register prior to selecting the Update Option The system will display the following upon selecting the P rint option Ouput to S creen P rinter H old File or E xit User must print to either the Printer or Hold File in order to be able to Update a control 3 If acf option inv002 Inventory to G L Interface is Active is set to a value of N the print option is optional Further the user will be prompted to Purge records 4 Acf option inv091 controls whether a control batch may be rolled over more than once f any of the items in the gt are over 0 Marius or under the var ance 1 Caste limits defined acf options 086 087 the following Warning window will Proceed with Rollover of ALL Items Anyway display Click No to return and update items in the Maintenance section or Click Yes to
312. rix 0e047 value Enter a valid Product Group Code or use the drop down button for a Product Group Product Group selection window 0e047 value 4 Enter a valid Item Sales Analysis Category 4 ISAC 4 Code or use the drop down Release NGS 6 30 IC 108 Next Generation Inventory Control S A Category 4 button for an Item S A Category 4 selection window 0e047 value 9 Enter a valid Item ID Item Price Matrix Class Product Group Code or S A Category Any of the 4 Code or use the drop down button for a Code selection window above Select Item ID to open the Item ID selection window Select Item Price Matrix Code to open the Item Matrix Class selection window Select Product Group to open the Product Group selection window Select Item S A Category 4 to open the Item S A Category selection window The system uses an hierarchy to determine the proper sell price for an item as follows 1 Manual entry by user 2 Contract Price CPM 3 Column Price CMT Sell price will be based on the Customer Matrix Override code designated in CMT in the following order 8 Sold To ID Ship To ID based on Item Match Class in acf option 0e047 b Sold To ID Ship To ALL based on Item Match Class in acf option 0e047 C Sold To ALL Ship To ALL based on Item Match Class in acf option oe047 d Customer Match Class found in acf option oe047a based on Item Match Class in acf 06047 4 Price Matrix PMT 5 List Price 6 Family Price FMT The ORDER
313. rnate unit of measure fields This field stores the product group code for this item Define the product group codes through program PGM Enter the product line Define product lines in program IPL Enter the PO Product Family Code Define product families in program POPF This field stores the Item Account Group Code which is optionally used for G L Posting Item Master Web Active Flag This field stores a code to indicate whether the item is available to be sold on the WEB Enter Y to indicate item is Active on the WEB Enter N to indicate item is Not Active on the WEB Enter the item tax class This field stores the stocking weight for this item This field stores the stocking volume for this item This field stores a commodity code that the user may assign to this item IC 30 Next Generation Inventory Control BRANCH CONTROL WAREHOUSE BIN CONTROL LOT SERIAL NO QUANTITY SERIAL 2 ITEM MEMO ITEM S A CATEGORIES 1 4 PACK QTY PACK TYPE OE LN CTRL Release NGS 6 30 This field indicates that inventory control on this item will be maintained at the branch level This flag may only be a Y If this part is stored in multiple warehouse locations enter Y If this part will not be stored in multiple warehouse enter N If this part is stored in multiple bin locations enter Y If this part will not be stored in multiple bins enter N If there is lot control active on this item enter L If th
314. rom records of the itu table with Transaction Code Z2 Procedure From the menu enter IAR Inventory Analysis Report Selection Options From Item Master From Branch Master Cost Method Options Average Cost Standard Cost Branch Cost Product Group Include Inactive Items Current Period No of Periods of Past History Include Current Period History From Period Thru Period View or print selected records Release NGS 6 30 IC 315 Next Generation Inventory Control ISS INVENTORY STOCK STATUS REPORT Introduction The Inventory Stock Status Report permits the user to obtain information pertaining to quantity balances of inventory items Extensive selection and sort criteria are available when running this report Procedure From the menu enter ISS 155 Inventory Stock Status Report Item Quantity Break Level Options From Branch Master Show Lowest Level Location Detail Select the report option 1 This option will get all item information and quantities from the Item Master level 2 This option will get all item information and quantities from the Branch Master level If this option is selected then the user has the further option to select the information and quantities from the lowest detail location by answering the question below this option Release NGS 6 30 IC 316 Next Generation Inventory Control f Option 1
315. ry Usage Rules Maintenance program serves as the maintenance program for Inventory Usage Rules for the different transaction types applicable to the user The records in this program control the effect that different inventory transaction types will have on the inventory usage statistics When program GIU is run it reads this rules table to determine the impact of a transaction on usage and sales history Procedure From the menu IURM Item Transaction Usage Rule Maintenance enter IURM OPTIONS Transaction Type Transaction Type Desc Update Computation Rule Code Remove Usage Flag uery Sales Flag Branch Transfer Indicator View Generate Help Run Exit Program Add records OYA Enter the following selection criteria TRANSACTION Enter the inventory transaction type TYPE TRANSACTION Enter the inventory transaction type description TYPE DESC COMPUTATION Enter l if this transaction type increases or D if it decreases usage or sales RULE CODE Leave this field blank if this transaction type has no effect on usage or sales Enter X to have the following happen if the quantity on the transaction is a negative value it will increase Usage or Sales if the quantity on the transaction is a positive value it will have no affect on Usage or Sales USAGE FLAG Enter Y if this transaction type has an effect on usage history or N if it does not SALES FLAG Enter Y if this t
316. s Sort By Options Window 7 User must select By IMC Code By Item sort option Click OK button By Branch By Product Line By Item to proceed to By Requisition No next window M By Requisition Date By Item By Requisition Date By Branch By Item By Buyer BY Product Line By Item By Buyer By Xref By Item By Buyer By Branch By Product Line By Item By Buyer By Vendor By Product Line By Item Q By Branch By Buyer By Product Line By Item By Vendor By Product Line By Item By Vendor By Xref By Item By Vendor By Item By Requisition No By Vendor By Customer By Item By Requisition No Heview individual CF APR Approve Purchase Transfer Requisitions requisitions m Window 2 E En ions No 56358 Req Date 03 29 2006 PO TT TP Approve Item Id 10218 Reg Sre prgen Buyer 1 Desc CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUE U M Branch on 4 Previous Xref 28550441112 From Brech 1 Prod LN 6 b Next User may scroll through requisitions and selectively approve them one at a time Usage History Mendor Comparison Click Exit button Sug Vendor ZZz1000 Els ESSI CUI when done Qty per Pack 1 00 Product Line Summary Sug Buy Qty L 15 Vendor Cost 10 00 PO Costing U M EA PO To Stock Cnv 1 00 Cost Cnv Fac Item Quantity Query Date Wanted 04 03 2006 174 Ext Cost 150 00 Status
317. s field will not be automatically changed on subsequent updates or imports Item Desc 1 Format Description 1 Format Method 0 User assigned leave blank when initially created 1 Set to Vendor Item Description 1 2 If the Vendor Item Description 2 is blank set to the Description Prefix follow ed by blank follow ed by size parameter 1 followed by blank follow ed by size parameter 2 Otherwise determine the total description based on the Description Prefix follow ed by blank follow ed by size parameter 1 follow ed by blank follow ed by size parameter 2 follow ed by blank follow ed by vendor item description 1 followed by blank followed by vendor item description 2 The system will set the set description 1 to the first 30 characters of the total description Note that the total description will be based on the actual data and not on the maximum size of the fields in other words if the vendor item description is only 25 characters of a 30 character field only 25 characters will be included in the total description Note that if the Formatted Item Description 1 field was previously manually overridden by the user in the U pdate ring menu option this field will not be automatically changed on subsequent updates or imports Release NGS 6 30 IC 270 Next Generation Inventory Control Item Desc 2 Format Description 2 Format Method 0 User assigned leave blank 1 Set to Vendor Item Description 2 Note this works in conjunction
318. s involved Windows to choose additional item s will display to help the user choose the item s or groups of items involved Release NGS 6 30 IC 103 Next Generation Inventory Control The Remove_Mass feature of this program provides the ability to remove all items from all contracts OR all customers who have contracts or all selected contract ID s PRENOVE A CPM Contract Pricing Maintenance MASS option allows for Mass Item ID Hemoval of Customer ID NN records Contract ID Screen 1 Screen 2 Price Method Cd Sales Agent 1 Contract Price i Sales gent 2 Contract Alt Price Effective Date Expiration Date Contract Qty Comments v Ordered To Date E Contract Cost Meth Remaining Qty Customer Item No Enter Item ID or Click Button For Lookup NOTE THIS IS AN EXTREMELY POWERFUL FEATURE CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN USING THIS FUNCTION SO VALID CONTRACTS ARE NOT INADVERTENTLY REMOVED FROM THE SYSTEM The Contract Dup feature of this program provides the ability to duplicate an entire contract for the same customer The Contract Dup F Contract ID Duplicate option allows Prete ayn are for one contract to be duplicated to another for New Contract ID the same customer Enter a Current Contract ID Current Contract ID Information ga YD 3 Record Duplicated Release NGS 6 30 IC 104 Next Generation
319. se NGS 6 30 Next Generation Inventory Control If customer 1234 orders 5 pieces of item 123 it will locate a match on customer and item id search sequence 1 with a price of 22 cents If the same customer ordered 15 pieces of the same item it would still use the 22 cents figure being that once a match is found in search sequence it will stop and not look any further The lowest price is found in the second PMT record which would be found on search sequence 5 item matrix class and customer matrix class ALL If the user wishes to utilize the lowest price comparison The user may code the memo2 field field 29 on the 2 screen in the PMT record with the search sequence it looks at next to compare prices and determine the lowest one Example Item Matrix Customer Price Quantity Quantity Memo2 Class Matrix Class Price item 123 cust 1234 22 5 7 item123 ALL 25 10 20 ALL ALL 30 12 25 Using the same example we used previously If customer 1234 orders 15 pieces of item 123 It will find it s first match on sequence 1 which would have a sell price of 22 It will now look at sequence 5 which would have a sell price of 20 Then it will look at sequence 7 which would have a sell price of 25 The system compares all three prices selected and will use the lowest one which would be search sequence 5 with a sell price of 20 Important note the sequence to search must be set up o
320. se those finished goods This module is fully integrated to the General Ledger and Inventory control modules of Next Generation software This feature applies to items that are built and sold as a finished good as a result of a customer s order but are inventoried at the component level During order entry as the finished good is entered all component items will be committed from inventory As the kit is invoiced components will be reduced from inventory Kit type codes determine whether or not component substitutions are allowed Kit pricing may be at the finished good or component level and print codes determine whether component prices extensions or quantities should print on orders or invoices Components may be suppressed from printing entirely Bill of Material vs Kits Unlike the BOM module the Kit module does integrate with the Order Entry program BOM is used when the customer is building finished or semi finished goods to stock inventory as opposed to building f nished goods to an order as done with the Kit module The inventory on a BOM item is kept on a finished goods as well as a component level with KITS the inventory is not kept on the finished goods just the component level KIT RECOSTING Kit Type 1 or 2 Priced at the Header These kits will recalculate cost when shipped or billed if acf option ar161 is set to a value of 1 Kit Type 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 Priced at the Component The value of Field 57 in the IM OE
321. set to zero 0 Next enter the Rounding Options Several options are displayed that will allow the user to select the desired method for rounding the result of the calculated new cost It will automatically default to No Rounding Next the system will prompt for the Item Master Cost Method Selection The program will automatically default this field to the user s inventory costing method in use based on acf option inv003 This field may be overridden If a user has multiple branches and wishes to update the branch costs this selection should be based on Option 4 Item Branch Cost Note the item branch cost is the cost used for billing inventory adjustments etc Enter the selection criter a Division Department Item ID Description Description 2 Item xref Item Matrix Class Item Memo 1 Item Memo 2 Item Memo 3 Item Memo 4 Control No Enter PROCEED to begin ITEM FUTURE COST file updating Enter a valid Division ID Note Prime Vendor selection field To restrict the items that will be selected to a specific Vendor When a value is entered in this field the system will only select Item Master records where at least one of the corresponding ltem Branch records exist and the Primary Vendor in at least one of the branch records matches the value entered If there is no match the item will not be selected Item Source Code Product Group S A Cat 1 S A Ca
322. should be set to a value of 2 0 No check to be performed 1 check amp issue a warning as follow The corresponding sales order has not been billed Continue Y N There is no corresponding sales orders for this line Continue Y N 2 Do acheck amp issue an error as follows The corresponding sales order has not been billed You may not receive this line Contact your system administrator Press C to continue BTRM REQM Transfer Requisition Division Department Default Value Method This option will define the method that the Division and Department will be assigned when adding transfer purchase requisitions R2 0 Set requisition division and department based on the values in the Vendor Master Table for the Vendor 1 Set requisition division and department based on the users UIM record If the field is not valued in the users record it will be based on the values in the Vendor Master Table for the vendor Transfer Sales Order Control Setting of Division and Department This option defines the method to use in the setting of the division and department in the transfer sales order generated 0 Allow Order Entry logic to define the division and department in the same manner if the transaction was entered directly through ORDER 1 Always set the division and department to the division and department defined for the customer 2 Always set the division and department to the division and department defi
323. son Start Period dod I Season End Period I Seas Purch St Period 113 I Seas Purch End 11 Season StartPer SIGE ee II Season End Period 11607 IISeasPurchStPer 0 dde II Seas Purch End Per S Status Update current record Record Updated You will also need to create records for each branch es in both the Customer Master CM and Vendor Master VM files These records must be the Customer and Vendor ID S you would use when creating the Transfer orders The ID s set up are then put into the Branch Maintenance BRM program Release NGS 6 30 IC 208 Next Generation Inventory Control From the menu enter CM From the menu enter VM A CM Customer Maintenance Customer ID 2222000 Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 Address 01 Name WEST COAST BRANCH 2 02 Addr 1 200 WEST MAIN STREET 03 Addr 2 BUILDING 7 O4addr3 California 05 City FRANCISCO 06 State CA 07 Postal 041555 08 Country US 22 Division 1 23 Sales1 1 24 Terms N30 25 Territory 1 26 Ship Via BWAY 27 Fob P 28 290 lt Next record A YM Vendor Maintenance vendor ID 2223000 Screen 1 Screen 2 Vendor 01 Name MIDWEST BRA United States 31 Branch 1 F Ach 33 Cust Type 1 34 Department 1 35 Acct Group 1 N BRANCH 2222000 2222000 09 Attn KEN JONES 13 xref WEST 55 16
324. t lt lt lt lt WIL1000 2000 4RM1000 WIL1000 WIL1000 WIL1000 WIL1000 2000 2000 2000 1000 1000 1000 apciann 1 1000017 10 02 04 1999 1 4 10 29 1999 3 E 12 03 1999 50 49 12 17 1999 12 22 1999 01 12 2000 01 12 2000 03 14 2000 03 14 2000 03 29 2000 04 11 2000 04 11 2000 04 11 2000 nasa Jona Qty in out Available ITQ View Comments o v Exit OVE User may enter the following selections from the availability screen To go to program IPAI Item Price Availability Inquiry go to program IQQ Item Quantity Query To go to program CISI customer Item Sales Inquiry To go to program CS Customer Service Screen To go to program VS Vendor Status To go to program ITQ Item Transaction Inquiry E To go to First line To go to Last line To view comments To Exit program me um opooco Release NGS 6 30 IC 314 Next Generation Inventory Control INVENTORY REPORT PROGRAMS IAR INVENTORY ANALYSIS REPORT Introduction The Inventory Analysis Report will generate a report of cumulative figures for total sales and total inventory value for all items from either the Item Master or the Branch Master taking into consideration the follow ing Last Years Annual Sales Unit Cost of the Item Extended Cost On hand quantity Extended cost of on hand quantity Sales figures are obtained f
325. t Price New Price Memo 1 Update current record The LIST option allows the user to enter their selection criteria and then view all the selected records with the most important fields listed on one screen Note acf option Sys032 controls the maximum number of records to be displayed in the LIST function IFLP Item Future List Price Program Control Item ID EXAMPLEL EXAMPLEZ EXAMPLES Description 1 lt Item ID EXAMPLEl test 10 00000 variance Exception Alt List Price Variance Exceeded New Alt List Prod Grp New List 17 0000 30 0000 25 0000 10 00000 15 00000 Old List Price Item Xref Alt Stk Conv 3 Items Prc UM Conv Product Group IFLP Control No Old Alt Price 6 00000 PK EA Old Price Memo 1 1 00000 PR Record 1 of 3 Var Exception la Old Price Memo 1 Record Updated New PriMemo Old 16 0000 4 33333 10 00000 Alt List Price Variance Exceeded E E IFLP n 6 00000 1 00000 16 0000 4 33333 10 00000 10 00000 20 00000 30 00000 Update List Update One Remove One rint excel Exit OV Release NGS 6 30 IC 151 Next Generation Inventory Control If the user highlights IFLP Item Future List Price Maintenance a record and clicks on update one button the IFLP Item ID EXAMPLE1 o Maintenance Program Item Xref l is
326. t 2 S A Cat 3 S A Cat 4 Item Type Code Commodity Code Prime Vendor Records Exist in Control f IFCM Selection Screen To Automatically Select Items for Future Cost Changes DEOK OVE The system will include an item even if the user selects the cost from the branch table and that branch record does not have a vendor matching the selection criteria but another branch does Release NGS 6 30 IC 172 Next Generation Inventory Control The program will prompt for a control number This control number permits the user the option of grouping cost changes into different controls or of putting all changes under one control User should note however the ENTIRE CONTROL must be selected when executing a new_cost_rollover Release NGS 6 30 IC 173 Next Generation Inventory Control Once records for ari itt a control have been selected the user may User may now proceed to ADD new records UPDATE existing records exit the program REMOVE records VIEW records or initiate the NEW COST ROLLOVER routine which will actually move data from the Item Future Cost File into the or go directly into ltem Future Cost Maintenance current Item Master Cost These options may be accessed by entering the Item Future Cost Maintenance screen available in this program Item Future Cost Maintenance Exit Program Release NGS 6 30 IC 174 Next Generation Inventory Control Forma
327. t Line Numbers are generated automatically during the explosion process The user can insert new lines in between existing lines When components are added to kits during Order Entry the quantity field must be an even multiple of the kit header quantity Type 3 kits permit pricing at the component level only With type kits the user gets all of the functionality described above for type 2 kits plus the ability to alter the component quantities During the review process the program will calculate the proper component quantity based on the quantity in the kit header record At the prompt for the calculated component quantity the user will have the opportunity to change it Note that if the user changes the quantity of a component sub line such that it is not an even multiple of the kit header quantity then the program may not be able to recalculate the component quantity properly if the kit header quantity is changed Release NGS 6 30 IC 337 Next Generation Inventory Control 4 Type 4 kits permit multi level kits to be established Lower level kits added to type 4 kits must also be type 4 kits Any other kit types can not be added to a kit type 4 This kit type allows for configuring the kit through a series of prompts and various option types Any item created in kit header or detail must first be created in the item master Prompts options modular items must all be set up as items before they may be added to a kit Codes
328. t List New Pr1 Memo Old List Old Alt List OI 10 00000 16 00000 20 00000 25 00000 30 00000 25 00000 4 33333 0 25000 15 00000 IC 154 Next Generation Inventory Control The user will has the option to update the Suggested retail price in the item master file fr New List Rollover Enter Y to update or Enter Control No OK N not to update the 3 Records Exist in Control Cancel suggested retail price Then type proceed Update Item Suggested Retail Price As Well As List Price v to process the control Proceed Enter PROCEED or EXIT Upon completion of the rollover the user will have the option to purge the control recoras used to create the new list price Click Yes to purge the records or No to keep the records in this control f VIEW is selected enter the sort options f IFLP Item Future Price Maintenance View Sort By Options By Control ID BY Product Group By Item ID By Control ID By Item Xref By Control ID By Product Group By Item Xref Help By Item ID By Item Xref 7 By Product Group By Item 8 By Product Group By Item Xref C Include Alternate Unit List Price C Include Price Memo 1 Output To Options Output to S creen Printer or H old File 5 Release NGS 6 30 IC 155 Next Generation Inventory Control Release NGS
329. t not exist on any open purchase order with a quantity gt 0 POE podet The item must not exist in the inventory transaction in process file as a non updated transaction ITE it hold The item must not exist in the Sales Analysis Warehouse Lot Bin Serial file In this case the system will provide a warning but will allow the deletion saship The item must not exist in the Item Cost Rollover Table IFCM icrar The item must not exist in the Item Future Cost Table IFCM itfutcst The item must not be a bill of material header item BOMM bomhdr The item must not be a bill of material component item BOMM bomdet The item must not have interchangeable items defined IIM cixref The item must not be defined as a customer valid item CVIM cixref The item must not be defined with related items RIM cixref The item must not be defined with valid customers IVCM cixref The item must not be defined as a non stock template item NSIM cixref The item must not be defined as a substitute item for another item IM item The item must have zero quantities in the following fields in all item branch records for the item Quantity on hand unless item status is 3 Quantity on purchase order Quantity in transit Quantity on direct ship purchase order Quantity on direct shipment sales order Quantity on future orders itembrch The item must have zero quantities in the following fields Quan
330. table it will change the flag in the vnsim table to a G Generate Item Based on the number of Non Stock Item Master records with the item generation flag set 1 Item Master records will be generated Proceed with Item Master Generation INVENTORY UPDATE FUNCTION The Inventory Update function allows the user to update certain fields in the item master table for items that have already been generated i e they must already exist in the item master table in order to be updated This function does not create item master records When you select this option you will first enter the your selection criteria Next you have a series of boxes that you can choose from You may update the Item Descriptions the Item Volume UPC codes Future Price records Future Cost records Release NGS 6 30 IC 282 Next Generation Inventory Control After entering the required fields click on the OK button to begin processing C Update Item Volume C Update UPC to Item Interchange Table Inventory Update C Generate Item Future Price Record Enter Control Number ER C Generate Item Future Cost Records Enter Division RE Enter Department L 8 Enter Item Cost Method 34 1 Item Master Last Cost 2 Item Master Average Cost 3 Item Master Standard Cost 4 Item Branch Cost Branch L9 Enter Costs to Select From Non Stock Item Material Labor Overhead Outside Enter Control Number Enter PROCE
331. tables above the Quote Order Ship and Bill programs will use the List Prices located in the Item Master File as the selling price List Prices are entered into the Item Master file through the program IM or the program ILP Manual Price Override If a manual price is entered by the user this price is what the Quote Order Ship and Bill programs will use as the selling price This will This is accomplished by overriding the selling price field directly in the Quote Order Ship or Bill Programs Release NGS 6 30 IC 95 Next Generation Inventory Control override the price calculated by the system based on the pricing hierarchy CPM CONTRACT PRICING MAINTENANCE Introduction The Contract Price Maintenance Program allows the user to define the selling price for a specific customer for a specific item during a specified time frame A contract number is assigned to each customer item contract price record combination When pricing is calculated in the ORDER and BILL programs it will check to see if there is a contract record in effect for the customer and item being entered If yes the contract record will control the method for calculating the selling price If there is no contract record found the program will read the price matrix file next to see if any matrix record pricing condition will be used for the customer and item being entered If no matrix record is found the progra
332. ted completion exit the program or Message go directly into User may now proceed to ADD new records UPDATE existing records Item Future List REMOVE records VIEW records or initiate the NEW LIST ROLLOVER routine Price which will actually move data from the Item Future List Price File into Cancel Maintenance the current Item Master List Price These options may be accessed by entering the Itern Future List Price Maintenance screen available in this program Options e Exit Program Release NGS 6 30 IC 142 Next Generation Inventory Control Formatting of ASCII Excel Files The upload ASCII option allows the user to utilize an external ASCII or Excel file and upload that file into the item future list price file The Input file definition and ASCII and Excel file requirements are listed below Note The user is responsible for providing an ASCII or Excel file using the following field definitions and rules regarding the ASCII file Input ASCII File Definition The following fields may be imported Note if the user is only loading the new list price then the only fields required on the input file is the item identifier and the new list price Field Header Field Description Field Type Maximum Field Size item_id_itfptmp Item Identifier Character 30 nlistprc_itfptmp New List Price Decimal 10 naltlist_itfptmp New Alt List Price Decimal 10 nprimemo_itfptmp New Price Memo 1 Decimal 10 Input ASCII File Req
333. ter code the previous Customer code is already a saved record This allows different entry of many customers for a single Item code If the user does not want to add additional Customer codes or wants to add a different Item code press OK and you will be prompted for an Item Master code Press OK again and the cursor will return to the Menu In the UPDATE mode the user can enter selection criteria on every field Press Enter to find the record to be updated The user can only update the Item Validation Code Customer Master Code and each Memo Information field The Item Code cannot be changed Release NGS 6 30 IC 62 Next Generation Inventory Control In the DUPLICATE mode the following screen appears f IVCM Item Valid Customer Maintenance Dupl SEE From Our Item ID From Customer ID To Our Item ID Proceed Enter PROCEED or E xit Enter Our Item Id Enter the From Our ltem ID for the records to be Duplicated to Enter From Customer ID if you wish to limit duplicate process to specific customer or leave blank for all customers Enter To Our Item ID Enter PROCEED to duplicate records or E for exit Release NGS 6 30 IC 63 Next Generation Inventory Control UPCLOAD UPC UPLOAD PROGRAM Introduction The purpose of the UPC upload program is to allow the user to initially build the interchangeable item cross reference table which associates a barcode with an item id in yo
334. the Interchangeable Description Enter UPC Interchange Unit of Measure Enter Conversion Factor between UPC UM and Our UM Enter a free form Memo 1 Enter a free form Memo 2 Enter the Compatibility Percent Enter the Obsolete Date Enter Memo 1 IC 284 Next Generation Inventory Control Memo 2 Enter Memo 2 Memo 3 Enter Memo 3 Memo 4 Enter Memo 4 Memo 5 Enter Memo 5 Memo 6 Enter Memo 6 Memo 7 Enter Memo 7 Release NGS 6 30 IC 285 Next Generation Inventory Control PROCESSING VENDOR NON STOCK ITEMS IN ORDER QUOTE AND BILL PROGRAMS If the item entered is a vendor non stock item based on the value set in acf option oe107 and it is not already a regular inventory item the user will have the ability to override the formatted item id and descriptions and optionally create an item master record and the corresponding Item Planning Item Branch and Item Interchange records based on the following options The create field in the VNSITM non stock template record VNSITM that was utilized to create this vendor non stock item id will control how the item will be processed in the Order Entry Quote Entry and Billing Entry programs as follow s Create field options 0 Non Stock After the user accepts the item and any overrides the program will pass the data to Order Entry insert a period before the formatted item id and use the data in a non stock line The system will assign applicable transaction detail fields based on th
335. the Item Future Cost Maintenance Screen This will be based on the following calculation New Cost Old Cost Old Cost 100 rounded to 5 decimal positions If the old cost is zero the variance will be set to 100 00 If the new cost is zero the variance will be set to 100 00 If acf option 086 is set to zero the over limit check will not occur If acf option inv087 is set to zero the under limit check will not occur Examples Old Cost New Cost Variance Variance 1 20 00 24 00 4 00 20 00 2 50 00 45 00 5 00 10 00 3 20 00 100 00 80 00 400 00 4 20 00 5 00 15 00 75 00 5 0 00 1 00 1 00 100 0096 6 1 00 0 00 1 00 100 00 If ACF option inv086 is set to 40 00 any items with a variance over 40 00 will be flagged In the above examples item and item 5 would be flagged If ACF option inv086 is set to 19 9 Instead item 1 would also be flagged Release NGS 6 30 IC 183 Next Generation Inventory Control If ACF option inv087 is set to 10 00 any items with a variance under 10 00 will be flagged In the above examples items 4 and 6 would be flagged If ACF option inv087 is set to 9 90 then item 2 would also be flagged Note this logic will be used to set the variance exception flag when importing records generating records adding records or updating records Th e LI ST o pt io n f IFCM Item Future Cost File Maintenance al low S th e user to
336. the Screen a Printer a Hold File or to an Excel file As a separate menu option there is also the ability to output the price book to an ASCII File Procedure From the menu OMS LETS enter IPBK Click on the Customer Selection MI 1 View Option The Customer Selection will be Selection Criteria Customer Matrix Selection selected by Customer ID Matrix Code default Click on Customer Name gun the check box to Customer Xref use the matrix Customer Type selection Cust Matrix Cd Division Enter your Department selection Branch Criteria Sales Agent 1 Sales Agent 2 Territory Cust SA Cat A Cust SA Cat B Cust SA Cat C Cust Cat D View or print selected records QVE Release NGS 6 30 IC 161 Next Generation Inventory Control Enter the item md e Selection selection Item ID Description 1 Description 2 Item Cross Reference Product Group Item Matrix Code Item Type Item Status Commodity Code Item S Category 1 Item SA Category 2 Item S Category 3 Item S Category 4 Enter Search Criteria for Item ID Select the pricing parameters that are required e Pricing Parameters Selection Print Suggested Retail Price Print Cost Average Cancel Branch ID For Cost 1 EJ Include Inactive Item Include Current Contract Pricing _ Replace Selling Price Include Current Promotion Prices
337. the Substitute Codes Table in the Appendix following the Order Management section for Substitute Code definitions AUTO SUBSTITUTE This field stores the substitute item id for this item It is used in conjunction ITEM with the item substitution code field When updating this field with a item that is already a substitute item you have the option of updating all the other records with the change COMMISSION Commission codes are used to determine proper method of calculating CODE commission Refer to the Commission Codes Table in the Appendix following the Order Management section for Commission Code definitions COMMISSION Certain commission routines will utilize this rate to calculate commissions Release NGS 6 30 IC 134 Next Generation Inventory Control RATE FUTURE USE ITEM DISCOUNT The order entry invoice system calculates discounts based on a combination CODE of discount codes stored in the customer master as well as codes stored in the item master Refer to the Item Discount Codes Table in the Appendix following the Order Management section for Item Discount Code definitions DISCOUNT RATE Certain discount routines will utilize this rate to calculate discounts DISCOUNT TABLE Certain discount routines will utilize this table to calculate discounts INSURANCE CODE _ The system allows for calculating an insurance amount automatically when using the ORDERor BILL programs Customer and Item Insurance Codes control which method
338. this key This number is used for items set up with L or S lot serial control in the item master field 38 These types of items record serial lot numbers for both inbound and outbound transactions The following control keys are to be used in determining this pattern Enter to match any character or number Enter 4 to match any number between 0 and 9 Enter to match any character Enter to drop that character number when writing the serial number Enter Letter A Z to match the specified letter Enter Number 1 9 to match the specified number The field length for serial pattern matching is 40 characters However the MAXIMUM number of characters that can be writen to the serial number field is 12 The hierarchy to find serial number patterns is 1 Item ID ISAC1 2 3 4 ISAC3 5 ISACA 6 Product Group Enter the total number of characters in the serial pattern recorded Enter the pattern of the 2nd serial number for this key This number is used for items set up with L or S Lot Serial Control in the item master field 38 AND with O Serial 2 Control in the item master field 40 These types of items record lot serial numbers for both inbound and outbound transactions and an additional serial number on outbound transactions The following control keys are to be used in determining this pattern Enter to match any character or number Enter 4 to match any number between 0 and 9 Enter Q to match any chara
339. tilized if entered and qty qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 27 The total branch cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over branch cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The branch cost is derived from the item branch master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price conversion factor will be derived from the matrix file if NOT zero otherwise it will come from item master The same price conversion factor will also be multiplied against the extension Code 28 The total branch cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 00 over branch cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj amt The branch cost is derived from the item branch master record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts This number will then be divided by the price conversion factor to arrive at a selling price The price
340. tion Alt UM Cross Reference Branch Whse Bin Loc Lot Serial Adj Qty UM Mat Cost To Branch Release NGS 6 30 IC 196 Next Generation Inventory Control On Hand Quantity Replacement If option 3 Is selected the following window Will open On Hand Quantity Transfer If option 4 is selected the following window will open ACF option inv084 will control whether or not last cost is updated for on hand quantity transfers if inventory costing method is average or standard cost Release NGS 6 30 Inventory Transaction Entry Division Department Control Number Transaction Type Item Number Description Cross Reference Branch Whse Bin Loc Lot Serial Add records F ITE Inventory Transaction Entry Division Department Control Number Transaction Type Item Number Description Cross Reference Branch Whse Bin Loc Lot Serial Add records In all of the options the user has ability to open up a display window to view the item cost breakout The user can update the following costs fields in that window Adj Qty OPTIONS Trans Date Update View Authorization Reference Stk UM Alt UM Run Exit and Process UM Mat Cost OPTIONS Trans Date Authorization Reference skuM Alt UM Exit and Process Adj Qty UM Mat Cost IC 197 Next
341. tity on hand unless item status is 3 Quantity on purchase order Quantity in transit Quantity on direct ship purchase order Quantity on direct shipment sales order Quantity on future orders Future use fields quantity mrb consigned floor stock wip itemplan ACF Options inv069 Default Purge Days OPTION DESCRIPTION VALUE inv069 IM PURGE Default Purge Days 30 for Create Date inv069a IM PURGE Default Purge Days 60 for Last Activity Date inv069b IM PURGE Default Purge Days 90 for Last Sale Date inv069c IM PURGE Display Number of Y Records Considered for Purge inv069d IM PURGE Default Purge Days 90 for Last Receipt Date inv069e IM PURGE Default Purge Days 90 for Last P O Date Release NGS 6 30 IC 23 Next Generation Inventory Control invO69f IM PURGE Default Purge Days 90 for Last Adjustment Date Release NGS 6 30 IC 24 Next Generation Inventory Control Procedure From the menu enter IM Release NGS 6 30 Item Master Maintenance Item No TAPE 125 Description Tape 125 new item desc 1 4 STREAMING TAPE Screen1 Screen2 Screen 3 Screen 4 Maintain Image 1 Description Tape 125 new item desc 2 Description 2 1 4 STREAMING TAPE 3 Item Xref TAPES 6 U M 7 Alt U M 8 9 10 Taxable Cd 11 Backorder Cd 12 13 14 Priorit
342. tivated to interface Sell Branch in Use to G L Tr From Branch in Use Tr To Branch in Use z Release NGS 6 30 IC 217 Next Generation Inventory Control 2 In the GLPAR program select GL Control Parameters Maintenance option Update the POR program seq 37 Set flag to a Y in field Tran Type in Use GLPAR G L CONTROL PARAMATERS MAINTENANCE POR SEQUENCE 37 GLPAR G L Control Parameters Maintenance Inventory A R Control Parameters Maintenance Program Name POR Sequence Number 37 Description PURCHASE RCPTS b Next i 4 Previous Division in Use Activate This Program Dept in Use N To Interface To G L Help Bank in Use Exit Branch in Use i G L Recap Print Option Bill Meth in Use G L Post Update Trans Type in Use Journal Source Code PR Item Acct Grp in Use Inventory to G L Interfaced Cust Acct Grp in Use Tax ID POS Type in Use Global Flag setting by Application Cust Tax Class in Use Ez Module must be activated to interface Sell Branch in Use te G L fie IZ Tr From Branch in Use N Tr To Branch in Use Update current record Record Updated Release NGS 6 30 IC 218 Next Generation Inventory Control 3 In the GLPAR program select Detail G L Posting Account Maintenance option and add records for both the INVR Sequence 19 and POR Sequence 37 programs for all the branches t
343. to display PO window User may optionally enter PO Options selected A B C D E will display 3 Auto display PO window User must enter a PO Options selected A B C D E will display The optional PO window can display options labeled A B C D E A Generate PO req and PO B Generate approved PO req C Generate pending PO req D Generate and maintain pending PO req E Maintain default values User may control which of these options display and in which order Multiple values may be which are broken up into 3 segments as follows Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 A B C D E 2 3 999 works with A B C The following are 3 examples of how a user can utilize this ACF option Example 1 C E A 2 This will display C E A and user may optionally create a record Example 2 C B E 3 This will display C B E and requires an entry Release NGS 6 30 IC 255 Next Generation Inventory Control 0e030b 0e040 040 0406 Example 3 999 This will automatically generate pending req without opening window NOTE User should include E Maintain Default Value when using options 1 2 This will prevent requisitions from being created where vendor is NULL ORDER Create PO for Kit Component Lines This option is used by the ORDER program when a Stock item is entered that is the component of a KIT which has exploded This option will define the PO transactions to generate The Following 3 Options Are Valid A 99
344. to import manually enter or maintain the vendor s non stock items Once the vendor s non stock items are entered or imported they then become available to programs like order ship bill and ipai Various reports and inquiries are available The functions of the individual programs follow Release NGS 6 30 IC 267 Next Generation Inventory Control VNSITM This program is used to define a template for vendor items The templates are stored in table vnsitmpl for each Non Stock Template Item entered These templates are used by the VNSIM program when creating or importing vendor s items It is a way to assign prefixes to items manipulate descriptions and generally control how they get created Fields are provided for the vendor id item prefix item id assignment method description 1 prefix description 1 assignment method description 2 assignment method item cross reference assignment method item price matrix assignment method cost calculation method cost calculation factor cost calculation rounding method price cost import factor transaction creation method item status method and the UPC Unit of Measure assignment method VNSIM This program is used for adding updating and removing records in the vendor non stock item master table vnsim Records may be added manually or they may be imported from an MS Excel spreadsheet by using the Data Import function A mass remove option based on your selection criteria has been provided
345. to set the Item Status Code Field 15 in program IM to a value of 3 or 4 This will prevent the item from appearing on the inventory and or sales reports Several important key fields will be automatically defaulted The user must then determine which Kit Type Code 1 2 3 or 4 to use see different codes below or you may use the on line Help button to distinguish between the Kit Type Code options At the Pricing Code field you must enter a value of H C A or B This field determines how price and cost values will be calculated for the kit This field works in conjunction with the Kit Type field The pricing codes have the following meaning H Price at Header C Price at Component A amp B are used in Kit Type 4 kits For definition of the Pricing Code see chart below or use the on line help button The user then enters a value Y N or P in the Review Components field This field is active only for Kit Types 1 2 amp 3 The Print Option fields 13 thru 16 are used to determine how the kit line will appear when printed There are 7 options available in each field use the on line Help button to find which option you want The Sales and Usage fields are Y N fields they are geared to feeding sales quantity history to the automated replenishment and related programs These fields have NO impact on standard actual sales analysis history which stores sales information as it occurred The Control Flag 1 field is utilized in type 4 kits
346. trol No Division Department Enter the amount of lines between details Page Break on new Control Output To Option Output Register to S creen P rinter H old File or E xit Enter Search Criteria for Control Date f you entered a Pto the Output Option this window will open Enter Printer ID e Set Printer Enter Printer ID Return for bigjet Release NGS 6 30 IC 201 Next Generation Inventory Control Has the Inventory Transaction Register printed A Has the Inventory Transaction Register printed correctly correctly Y N e Confirmaton Clear the Inventory Transaction Register file If the user again enters Y G L is optionally updated and the file register is purged If output is directed to printer The window Enter Printer ID will appear followed by the question Has the Inventory Transaction Register printed correctly If user enters YES then another window will appear with the question Clear the Inventory Transaction Register file If the user again enters YES G L is optionally updated and the file register is purged If the answer to any of the above questions is negative the system will return to the menu Release NGS 6 30 IC 202 Next Generation Inventory Control BRANCH TRANSFER PROCESSING BRTRN BRANCH TRANSFER PROCEDURES Introduction Within the Next Generation package Branch Transfers can be performed in different ways 1 They ca
347. ts E Branch ALL ALL in the Branch field ee l this record will Program iqq affect all branches that Desci sort seq for IQQ ties to brch DO NOT have Desc2 code in UIM UTC TC an individual record Value 1 CANADA 1 2 3 established Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Next record The following fields may be entered BRANCH Enter the control branch for this record OPTION Enter the option flag The option flag can be considered as a second part of the key to this record branch being the first part This field stores a variety of inputs depending on the program that accesses it An example entry here could be IQQ IQQ has been programmed to check for records in this table to control branches that display when running IQQ PROGRAM Enter the program name Enter the program name that will be run from menu This is what is typed from menu and allows for aliases to be set up Example IQQ DESC 1 OR2 Enter description 1 and 2 These are optional VALUE 1 5 Enter values 1 5 This value stores a parameter that will be used to drive other programs Example IQQ would expect to find branch ID s separated by a comma Example 1 5 User would see only branch 1 and 5 in IQQ Query mode Example 1 5 User would see branch 1 5 and ALL other in IQQ Query mode Release NGS 6 30 IC 70 Next Generation Inventory Control ICMB ITEM BRANCH COST MAINTENANCE Introduction The purpose o
348. ts this option they will have to run the APR program to Release NGS 6 30 IC 262 Next Generation Inventory Control D Review Purchase Req approve the requisitions and then the POGEN process to create the branch transfer purchase order This option would be selected to review the branch transfer purchase requisition that the system will generate prior to the actual creation of the requisition Once you have selected one of the above options click OK to complete the transaction The following window will display Warning Negative available will be 10 Accept Item Substitute Purchase You can select the Accept Item button to complete the process You will need to complete the order by either entering additional lines or accepting the order Once these orders are created the tracking of inventory and the POR receiving function is exactly the same procedure as the Manual Procedure If you need to check invoicing and receiving history on Branch Transfers by item use program IBTM Branch Transfer Transaction Inquiry This program will show you all the transfers that were done on the item and from which branches they were generated From the menu enter IBTM Release NGS 6 30 F IBTM Branch Transfer Transactions Inquiry Item 10218 Branch 1 Description CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUE xref 1085504 1112 In Transit Qty 0 Details Ref No TT Date From Brch From Bin Loc
349. tting of ASCII Excel Files The upload ASCII Excel option allows the user to utilize an external ASCII or Excel file and upload that file into the item future cost file The Input file definition and ASCII and Excel file requirements are listed below Note The user is responsible for providing an ASCII or Excel file using the following field definitions and rules regarding the ASCII file Input ASCII File Definition The following fields may be imported Note if the user is only loading the new material cost then the only fields required on the input file is the item identifier and the new material cost Field Header Field Description Field Type Maximum Field Size item_id_itfptmp Item Identifier Character 30 nmatcst ifcsttmp New Material Cost Decimal 10 nlabcst ifcsttmp New Labor Cost Decimal 10 novhdcst ifcsttmp New Overhead Cost Decimal 10 noutcst ifcsttmp New Outside Cost Decimal 10 nincmat ifcsttmp New Incremental Material Decimal 10 ninclab_ifcsttmp New Incremental Labor Decimal 10 noincvhd_ifcsttmp New Incremental Overhead Decimal 10 nincout ifcsttmp New Incremental Outside Decimal 10 Input ASCII File Requirements File must be in ASCII format All records must have each field delineated by a pipe sign 174 gt ASCII Character which is represented as All records must be terminated with a lt Line gt lt Feed lt 10 gt ASCII Characters ASCII file must be terminated with a lt Carriage lt Return
350. u CMT Column Matrix Table Maintenance enter CMT Option Cust ID Sold To less Update Ship To ID Remove Item Match Class 8 Query see acf oe047 View 01 Cust Matrix Override 14 Insurance Code v Help 02 Adv Allow Code 15 Insurance Rate 03 Adv Allow Rate alls gnc 04 17 Rebate Code 05 Commission Code 18 Rebate Rate Exit Program 06 Commission Rate Eom 07 20 1 08 Discount Code 21 Memo 2 09 Discount Rate 22 Memo 3 10 Discount Table xdi 23 Memo 4 11 Handling Code T 24 Memo 5 12 Handling Rate 25 Start Date 14 13 Handling Table J 26 End Date eg Add records OVER The first key for accessing the Column Matrix Table is the value in the Option field of the record This Option field may be designated as either the Customer Sold to Ship to ID or one of the Customer Match Classes Customer Type Customer Price Matrix Customer S A Category D The available Customer Match Class option for the program is determined by the value in acf option 0e047a Once the determination of the main option has been made the user may enter the corresponding Customer ID If entering a column matrix record by Option Value of 1 Customer Ship to ID the user must enter the following fields Cust ID Enter a valid Customer ID or use the drop down selection window to search for a Customer Sold To ID An entry of ALL may be mad
351. u have CAI KITICL Kit Indented Listing entered your selections on the 7 window you can enter the Costing Method Options Cancel costs Last Cost comments and IEO output method Standard Cost on this window C Print Header Comments Comment Type _ C Print Detail Comments Comment Type a Output To Option Output To S creen Pjrinter or H old File OVE After the user has selected the options press the OK button on the main menu to proceed the cancel button to exit out the Help button for on line help and the Run button to enter a new program Release NGS 6 30 IC 354 Next Generation Inventory Control INVENTORY MONTH END PROCESSING ICME ITEM MONTH END PROCESSING Introduction The Inventory Control Month End Processing program performs purging of inventory branch or location records This program is normally run at the end of the period usually a month The user is responsible for executing this program on a timely basis Once run inventory transactions may not be posted prior to the close date Procedure Fi the menu E acr f ICME Inventory Month End Closing Month End Info Last Closing Date 01 01 2001 Enter Closing Date Cancel Purge Options Hel Fl Purge Inventory Transaction Records p C Purge Zero Branch Location Records Run Enter Closing Date The user will be given the last closing date and prompted
352. uantity entered or chosen in the PO requisition window Recalculate the committed quantity to be the quantity ordered less the recalculated quantity back ordered If the quantity entered or chosen exceeds the quantity ordered the quantity back ordered will be set to the quantity ordered and the quantity committed will be set to zero ORDER Requisition Type to Generate Replenishment Trans Enter valid PO Transaction Types that the GRT exit routine should be processed for Multiple transaction types may be added separated by a comma Valid Transaction Types PO Purchase Order DP Drop Ship Purchase Order TP Branch Transfer Purchase Order TS Branch Transfer Purchase Order Note Whether you assign a branch transfer purchase order transaction type of TP or TS is defined in ACF option oe061 If you have selected the option to create an approved req and purchase order option A listed on the above ACF s and you desire to create a single purchase order for all items that have the same vendor the following ACF option must be added to your system ACF option order1x where x is a value between 0 and 9 must be added The option value on the ACF you add must be set to grt ORDER Subroutine to Consolidate Reqs to Single PO This ACF must be added with an option value of grt It works in conjunction with ACF option ar060 ORDER Default Transtype for Branch Transfer Requisitions Default PO Transaction Type for bran
353. uct group account group and ISAC code s are selected when entering a non stock item NON STOCK ITEMS INTERIM LEVEL At the interim level the user may set up non stock templates As in the above level non stock items are entered with a period preceding the part number The Non Stock Template Item Maintenance screen is designed to enhance non stock item entry in the Order Quote Bill and Ship programs by allowing a user to pre set item master fields for the type of item being entered such as product group item account group etc The NSIM screen allows an Item Master record to be used as a template for the non stock item Detail Line being entered This will speed up entering a non stock item and assure correct data entry ensuring that items will be reported under the desired categories in sales reports will be posted to the correct GL accounts etc The other benefit of using templates is the reduction of user errors ACF option oe085 controls whether the system will allow the user to bypass the selection of a non stock template when adding non stock items to transactions in the applicable programs A non stock template item must first be stored in the Item Master program IM before it can be added as a Non Stock Template Item Maintenance record If the template item is not in the Item Master record add the record to the Item Master first before you create the Non Stock Template record Any Item Master record can be entered as a
354. uirements File must be in ASCII format All records must have each field delineated by a pipe sign lt 174 gt ASCII Character which is represented as All records must be terminated with a lt Line gt lt Feed lt 10 gt ASCII Characters ASCII file must be terminated with a lt Carriage lt Return lt Line lt Feed lt 13 gt lt 10 gt ASCII Characters All character fields must be left justified Decimal fields must be in decimal format XXXXXX XX Signed numeric fields must contain the sign in front of the number Decimal point must be included and contain at least one digit to the left and two digits to the right of the decimal point i e 323 25 Blanks before any numbers are assumed to be positive Example of ASCII file item id itfptmp nlistprc itfptmp naltlist itfptmp memo itfptmp ITEMA 25 00 3 00 2 00 ITEMB 50 00 1 00 2 00 ITEMC 75 00 25 00 1 00 Excel File Requirements Decimal fields must be formatted as Numeric and the appropriate number of decimal places Character fields must be formatted as Text Example of Excel file A B C D item id itf ptmp nlistprc_itfptmp naltlist_itfptmp nprimemo_itfptmp ITEMA 25 00 3 00 2 00 ITEMB 50 00 1 00 2 00 ITEMC 75 00 25 00 1 00 Release NGS 6 30 IC 143 Next Generation Inventory Control Upload ASCII Excel Records Processing Upload ASCII Item Future List Price Program Excel File option Menu
355. ur item master table Once the interchangeable item cross reference table is built on your system the UPC codes in that table become available for scanning in programs such as order bill ship physical inventory etc The upcload program allows the user to quickly enter scan a product s UPC code and then enter your systems item id that it is to be associated with The program will also allow the user to enter unit quantities when multiple barcodes refer to the same item but with different quantities For example if the item DEERPARK in your system can be sold by the each or by 8 packs it would be set up in the Item Master with a conversion factor of 8 In this case you would set up two interchange records pointing to the same item id but with different quantities So for instance when UPC code 082657500608 is scanned the system recognizes it as one 8 pack When UPC code 082657500601 is scanned the system recognizes the item as one 1 each Procedure From the F UPCLOAD UPC Load Program menu enter UPCLOAD UPC Interchange ID Our Item ID UPC Unit Quantity User can Add Update Remove Remove or Query a UPC mc Code Run Exit Program OVE Add mode f UPCLOAD UPC Load Program Add UPC Record Scan the bar UPC Interchange ID Our Item ID UPC UM Unit Quantity Our UM code and EJ 0 0000000 EA then enter UPC Interchange ID Our Item ID UPC Unit Quantity Our the item id 039153101401 RRCH
356. us Inventory Management Controls NOTE Replenishment path code must NOT be zero IC 205 Next Generation Inventory Control REPLEN BRANCH TRANSFERS ALLOWED From the menu enter IPMB Window 2 2 This Item WILL be considered for automated Replenishment However the Item WILL NOT be considered for any of the functions which compute Inventory Management Controls such as Average Usage Lead Time Order Quantity etc NOTE Replenishment path code must NOT be zero This field may be set to a value of 1 or 2 This field stores the Replenishing Branch for this Item for this branch When the Replenishment Path for an Item is 2 which indicates the item is normally replenished by transfers from another branch this field stores the ID of the Branch which is the normal authorized branch to replenish this item for the current branch The entry in this field defines whether a transfer is allowed from this Branch for this Item 1 Transfer is allow ed from this Branch for this Item 2 Transfer is not allow ed from this Branch for this Item This field must be set to a value of 1 f IPMB Branch Planning Details Maintenance Options Item ID 10218 U M EA Update CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUE _ 28550441112 Desc Xref b Next Prod Line 6 4 Previous Branch 2 Help Exit Screen 1 Screen2 Screen 3 Screen 4 3 3 3 35 36 37 3 39 40 41 4 Period Avg
357. use the M ass Remove option to flag a group of items to be removed based on selection criteria entered The system will calculate and display the number of records selected to be flagged for removal Release NGS 6 30 IC 279 Next Generation Inventory Control the actual number of records which will be flagged for removal and the number of records which will not be flagged for removal because a corresponding ltem Master record exists The user can then proceed with flagging the records Once items have been flagged for removal an option is provided to generate an audit trail in the same format as the view report of the items flagged for removal based on selection criteria entered Once items have been flagged for removal the user may process the actual removal of the records The system will allow the user to enter selection criteria and will only select items flagged for removal The system will calculate and display the number of records selected for removal the number of records which will be removed and the number of records which will not be removed because a corresponding ltem Master record exists Once the removal is completed the system will display the number of records actually removed Release NGS 6 30 IC 280 Next Generation Inventory Control DATA IMPORT FUNCTION The Data Import function allows the user to import Vendor Non Stock Items from an MS Excel spreadsheet into the vnsim table First in the Template
358. used to select or unselect the requisition All Select This option is used to select ALL requisitions displayed Update This option is used to update both requisition header and detail fields Process This option is used to process the selected requisitions Comments This option is used to maintain comments Once all selections have been made the use must process the selected requisitions The system will prompt user as follows e Ship Via Code for Generated PO Ship Via Code EJ Enter Ship Via Code Zoom for Look Release NGS 6 30 IC 228 Next Generation Inventory Control The system will then take the user to a Purchase Transfer Order Generation window e POGEN Purchase Transfer Generation Transfer SEE Branch Grouping Options Group Requisitions across Branches 2 ui Cancel Product Line Grouping Options Group Requisitions within a Product Line Group Requisitions across Product Lines Purchase Order Date 03 22 2006 3 Print PO Report After Process Page Break after each P O Starting Purchase Order No Starting Drop Ship Order No Starting Transfer Order No 73303 Branch Grouping Enter 1 to generate separate Purchase Orders for items required for each Option branch Enter 2 to generate a single purchase order for a vendor by grouping together items in all branches Typically for a BTRM process this option would be a value of 1 Product Line E
359. user Code 1 The selling price in the matrix file will be the selling price on the order invoice If quantity breaks are in the matrix and the quantity being ordered shipped qualifies for quantity break discounts then the value or will be utilized to arrive at a selling price Code 2 The list price from the line item shall have the price adj applied against the list price to arrive at a selling price The user should enter 10 00000 to reduce the list price by 1096 The user should enter 10 00000 to increase the price by 1096 Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts IC 114 Next Generation Inventory Control Code 3 The list price from the line item shall be adjusted or by the value in the price adj amount field The user should enter 10 00000 to increase list price by 10 00 The user should enter 10 00000 to reduce the price by 10 00 Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts Code 4 The total unit cost for this line item will be increased by the price adj amount To have selling price be 25 over unit cost the user would enter 25 00000 in the price adj The total unit cost is determined by the users normal costing method in use This cost is obtained directly from the proper Item Branch record Quantity break logic will be utilized if entered and quantity qualifies for quantity break discounts
360. user to define a list of customers for a specific item The ORDER and BILL program will validate every detail line against each record set up in this program to check if the customer is allowed or not allowed to purchase the item entered The system will also compare records in the CVIM followed by CVPGM and then lastly in IVCM If a CVIM records excludes an item for a customer and IVCM includes a record the CVIM will override Valid Menu Options for IVCM ADD UPDATE REMOVE DUP QUERY VIEW HELP INPUT FORMS EXIT e IVCM Item Valid Customer Maintenance Our Item ID Our Item Desc Update Our Item Desc 2 Our Item Xref Remove Duplicate Item Validation Cd Query Customer ID Miew Customer Mame Customer Xref Help Memo 1 Information Start Date Memo 2 Information End Date 112 Exit Program Memo 3 Information Memo 4 Information Add records OVR The following fields may be entered OUR ITEM ID Enter a Valid Item ID OUR ITEM DESC Use Item description 1 as search criteria to find an Item record OUR ITEM DESC 2 Use Item description 2 as search criteria to find an Item record OUR ITEM XREF Use Item cross reference as search criteria to find an Item record ITEM VALIDATION Enter the validation code for this record CODE 1 Indicates customer CAN order only if records have been defined in Release NGS 6 30 IC 61 Next Generation Inventory Control program IVCM f
361. utput to Excel format has been added for IM ILP and ICM These programs will be detailed in other sections of the inventory operator guide Menu Functions ADD The ADD option is used to enter a new record Enter A and the program will place the user into add mode UPDATE The UPDATE option is used to change an existing record s When this option is chosen the user is required to define which record s are to be selected for update The user must enter the appropriate data by which to search the file and then click the OK button to allow the program to search the file for any record s meeting the entered search criteria If the user desires to update all the records in the file simply click the OK button immediately upon entering the screen in update mode REMOVE The REMOVE option is used to delete an existing record s When this option is chosen the user is required to define which record s are to be selected for remove The user must enter the appropriate data by which to search the file and then click the OK button to allow the program to search the file for any record s meeting the entered search criteria Prompts at the bottom of the screen will guide the user with what to enter in order to properly remove a record s from the file NOTE The system will perform a variety of verifications before a record is deleted A list of these verifications is provided under the PURGE option help QUERY The QUERY option allows the us
362. vel be fixed manually by the user After sufficient history is built on usage pattern for the item the Maximum Level can be computed by the program CMAX This field stores the Surplus Level for this Item and Branch The Surplus Level defines the point above which stock held at a branch is considered to be surplus The program ICSL may be used to compute the Surplus Level for an item Branch Planning Details Maintenance Options Item ID 10218 jum EA Update Desc CALENDAR DESKPAD BLUE Xref 28550441112 Prod Line 6 b Next 4 Previous Branch 2 Help m Exit Screen 1 Screen2 Screen3 Screen 4 Freeze Indic 77 FO Lead Time Safety Day Freeze Date 01 19 2000 213 78 Pick Lead Time Days Freeze Reason NI OU of days Frz 0 BS Frozen By SYSTEM B1 s Item Active Y vj BPS Inactive Date 01 01 1980 1 4 Date Created 01 19 2000 12 Status Update current record Record Updated IC 207 Next Generation Inventory Control From the menu f IPMB Branch Planning Details Maintenance enter IPMB Window 4 Options Item ID 10218 uM EA Update Desc CALENDAR DESK PAD BLUE Xref J85504A1L12 Prod Line 6 b Next 4 Previous Branch 2 Help Exit Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 Screen4 Trend 0 00 108 Seasonal Indicator 209 May Be Seasonal I Sea
363. way that quantities and comments are entered using the browser WEBSHOP program NOTE The java script can contain any valid java script commands you desire When the java script is finished executing it will only pass along the comment field and the quantity field back to the order The way it works is to create a java script and give it a two character filename first character must be alpha with the Release NGS 6 30 IC 54 Next Generation Inventory Control extension of js This filename must be located in the directory usr HTTPServer htdocs munics js where munics is your company name on your webserver In the B2BM program under the item option you would enter the filename of the java script you created filename only no extension it assumes js as the extension When the user selects items the WEBSHOP program reads the item file and if it detects a java script it will display the quantity to order for these items it does not display the quantity box it just displays the quantity field To order the user must click on the quantity field At this point another window will open and the java script will appear underneath the comments box An example is you may have some items that the quantity ordered is a function of other values You may want to create a script to calculate the quantity ordered from other values and prevent the person ordering from changing these calculated quantities You could for instance write
364. will ascertain whether or not backorders are allow ed The valid codes are Y Allow backorders for this item in the Order Bill or POE program N DO NOT allow backorders for this item in the Order Bill or POE program A Allow backorders for this item in the Order and Bill programs DO NOT allow backorders for this item in the POE program B Allow backorders for this item in the POE program DO NOT allow backorders for this item in the Order and Bill programs This order invoice detail field may be set based on item information or can be used in conjunction with the customer priority rules code present in the header record of an order or invoice This field assists in controlling whether or not orders or line items can be shipped when running the ORDERS AVAILABLE TO SHIP output OATS The OATS program utilizes the following order header and order detail codes to determine if a line can be reported for shipping The following is a table of how these codes work within the OATS program CUSTOMER ITEM DETAIL SHIPMENT RULES RULES CODE RULES CODE NULL O NULL O 1 Ship what can be shipped on any line NULL O 1 Ship ONLY if ALL lines can completely ship NULL O 1 Ship any lines that can completely ship NULL O Ship what can be shipped Partial ship Ship any lines that can completely ship NULL 0 1 2 3 Ship ONLY line items that can completely ship Release NGS 6 30 IC 29 Next Generation Inventory Control ITEM STA
365. will only select Item Master records where at least one of the corresponding ltem Branch records exist and the Frimary Vendor in at least one of the branch recoras matches the value entered If there is no match the input record will not be loaded Example If a vendor item id is stored in one of the item master fields for example cross reference where different Vendors use the same id to reference different items The system will limit the selection to items where there is at lest one item branch record for the Vendor selection criteria entered Match Upload Item to Field Options Enter the appropriate field that item id itfotmp of the ASCII Excel file should be matched to e g If the value in item id itfptmp of the ASCII Excel file represents the item cross reference enter a 2 in the Match Upload to Field Note If Match option 10 is chosen The user will be required to enter a valid Vendor ID The program will prompt for a control number This control number permits the user the option of grouping price changes into different controls such as different product groupings or of putting all changes under one control To begin updating the control file enter PROCEED The system will display the following window indicating the number of records successfully loaded and the number of records that failed e Warning A 3 Records Successfully Added 3 Records Failed Releas
366. wing is the procedure for Mass Purging records In the IM program enter the M ore option Enter the P urge Option Enter item master selection criteria for those items you desire to purge For example a specific product group Override default cut off dates if desired The default values of these cut off dates are determined by various acf options See below for a list of the acf options Accept Dates System will verify items to be considered for deletion based on date criteria entered the system will not incorporate the deletion verifications yet The system will display the number of items to be considered for deletion The user can accept the count of items considered for deletion The system will perform the normal deletion verifications and purge those items that pass the verifications See below for the list of verifications the program will perform The system will display the number of items actually deleted The system determines the number of items that will be considered for deletion based on the following fields The system will consider the item if It falls within the selection criteria entered The Create Date in the Item Planning Table record for the item is less than or equal to the create date entered Table name itemplan Field name datecreate ipm There are no Item Branch Table records for the item where the Last Activity Date in the Item Branch record is greater than the last
367. with the values set in Description 1 format method The description 2 format method should match description 1 format method if coded a value of 2 2 If the Vendor Item Description 2 is blank set to the Vendor Item Description 1 Otherwise determine the total description based on the Description Prefix follow ed by blank follow ed by size parameter 1 follow ed by blank follow ed by size parameter 2 follow ed by blank followed by vendor item description 1 followed by blank followed by vendor item description 2 The system will set the set description 2 to the second 30 characters of the total description however if the 31st character of the total description is blank the system will set description 2 to the 30 characters starting with the 32nd character Note that the total description will be based on the actual data and not on the maximum size of the fields in other words if the vendor item description is only 25 characters of a 30 character field only 25 characters will be included in the total description Note that if the Formatted Item Description 2 field was previously manually overridden by the user in the U pdate ring menu option this field will not be automatically changed on subsequent updates Item Xref Format Item Cross Reference Format Method 0 User assigned leave blank 1 Set to Vendor Item ID Note that if the Formatted Item Cross Reference field was previously manually overridden by the user in the U pdate ring menu
368. xt Generation Inventory Control Old Alternate List Price normally would be zero Old Alternate List Price normally would be zero 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 Price Memo 1 Processing Note The ability to process the Price Memo 1 field is controlled by ACF option inv088 Click radial button to mark selected options and click OK to execute Release NGS 6 30 4 16667 25 00 6 0000 Calculation New List Price Alt Stk Conv Rounded based on acf option ar050a 0 25000 25 00 01 Calculation New List Price Prc UM Conv Rounded based on acf option ar050a Old Alternate List Price normally would be zero f IFLP Item Future List Price Changes Automatic Select Options User Options To Calculate NEW Price Memo 1 based on OLD Price Memo 1 1 No change new list price will equal old list price 2 Apply a percent times old price memo 1 to calculate new price memo 1 3 Apply a fixed amount to old price memo 1 to calculate new price memo 1 7 ae Calculated New Price Memo 1 Rounding Options Enter Percentage New Price Memo 1 Percent X Old Price Memo 1 Enter Fixed Amount New Price Memo 1 Amount Old Price Memo 1 1 To nearest 1 decimal no 2 To nearest 2 decimal no 3 To nearest 3 decimal no 4 To nearest 4 decimal no 5 Round up to the next whole no 6 Round down to the next whole no 7 Round to the nearest whole no IC 140 Help
369. xt Generation Inventory Control Select the Sort Cost To include Print and Output Sort By Options options CF IVR Inventory Valuation Report Item Xref By Item Cancel Product Group By Item Cost To include Material Cost Labor Cost Overhead Cost Outside Cost Print Options Include Positive Balance Items Include Negative Balance Items C Include Zero Balance Items Output To Options Output Report to S creen P rinter H old File E X cel or C ron S v Print Format L ong Form or S hort Form S Enter the selection criteria e IVR Inventory Valuation Report Selection Criteria Item Number Description Description 2 Item Xref Item Type Code Item SAC 1 Product Group Item SAC 2 Item Status Code Item SAC 3 Commodity Code Item SAC 4 Item Price Matrix Item IMC Code Enter Item ID selection Release NGS 6 30 IC 321 Next Generation Inventory Control If the user selects item costing break level from branch master the following screen will be displayed for selection Select the Sort Cost To include Print and Output options OLLE Inventory Valuation Report SE Sort By Options Item ID by Branch Branch by Item ID Item Xref by Branch Branch by Item Xref Product Group By Item Branch By Product Group By Item Cost To include Material Cost Labor Cost Overhead Cost Outside Cost Print Opti
370. y Overview Inventory Control consists of the following 1 Inventory Master File preparation and maintenance 2 Inventory transactions 3 Inventory reports In order to properly implement the inventory control module it is important to understand the options the user has for storing inventory balance information There are three levels available for storing balance information 1 Item Master Level Stores the sum of all branches 2 Item Branch Level Stores the branch balances 3 Item Location Level Maintains On Hand Balances only for items using WH BIN or LOT SERIAL Control When adding new items into the system the user must define for each item what depth the user requires to store inventory balances The system always stores inventory at the item master level and the item branch level for each item These are the most commonly used options The item location level is only used when a user has lot serial warehouse or bin control required within a branch location The following illustrates how inventory is stored LEVEL 1 ITEM MASTER LEVEL 2 ITEM ITEM ITEM BRANCH BRANCH BRANCH LEVEL 3 ITEM ITEM ITEM LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION RECORDS RECORDS RECORDS Release NGS 6 30 IC 5 Next Generation Inventory Control Levels 1 and 2 are always established for each item automatically Level 3 is optional depending on the user s requirements Level 2 balances are stored at the branch levels with the sum of all branch
371. y Break 5 DEC 37 Sell Price Qty Brk Price 5 DEC 38 Sell Price Qty Break 6 DEC 38 Sell Price Qty Brk Price 6 DEC 40 Sell Price Qty Break 7 DEC 41 Sell Price Qty Brk Price 7 DEC 42 Sell Price Qty Break 8 DEC 43 Sell Price Qty Brk Price 8 DEC 44 Promotion Start Date 10 45 Promotion End Date 10 46 Promotion Sell Price DEC 47 Promotion Alt Sell Price DEC 48 Prm Price Qty Brk Price 1 DEC 49 Prm Price Qty Brk Price 2 DEC 50 Prm Price Qty Brk Price 3 DEC 51 Prm Price Qty Brk Price 4 DEC 52 Prm Price Qty Brk Price 5 DEC 53 Prm Price Qty Brk Price 6 DEC 54 Prm Price Qty Brk Price 7 DEC 55 Prm Price Qty Brk Price 8 DEC 56 Contract Price DEC 57 Alternate Contract Price DEC 58 Contract Quantity DEC 59 Remaining Quantity DEC 60 Effective Date 10 61 Expiration Date 10 62 Family Price Indicator 2 63 Gross Margin 96 DEC 64 Customer Discount amp DEC 65 Suggested Retail Price DEC 66 Price Matrix Code 2 67 Promotion Matrix Code 2 Release NGS 6 30 IC 165 Next Generation Inventory Control COSTING PROGRAMS ICM ITEM COST MAINTENANCE Introduction The Item Cost Maintenance is one of three programs used to build and maintain the item master files for use in the Inventory Control application This program focuses on storing cost data for an item Last and average costs are automatically updated whenever a receipt is entered The user may opt to maintain cost data at the branch level for each item This feature allows the user to establish differe
372. y Rule 15 Item Status 16 Item Type Cd 17 Comments 21 Alt Stk Conv 22 23 Product Group 24 PO Product Line 25 PO Product Fam 26 G L Acct Group 27 Item Tax Class 28 Web Active 29 30 Weight 31 Volume 32 Commodity Code 5 00000 ALTERNATE 2 00000 0 70000 Item Quantity Control 35 Branch Control 36 Warehouse 37 Bin Control 38 Lot Serial No 39 Quantity 40 Serial 2 Item Memo Information 431 44 2 453 464 myron memol Item S A Categories 481 492 503 514 TEST40 DER Duplicate irst 14 m evious 2 iz 19 o E x AR Last Comments Miew Comments Item Notes IC 25 Next Generation Inventory Control Screen 2 Release NGS 6 30 IM Item Master Maintenance Item No TAPE 125 Description Tape 125 new item desc 1 4 STREAMING TAPE Screen 1 55 Pack Qty 56 Pack Type 57 OE Line Ctrl 58 OE Delete B9 1 60 61 Length 62 Length UM 63 Width 64 Width UM 65 Thick 66 Thick UM 62 68 Obsolete 69 Inspect Update current record Screen 2 Screen 3 0 00 100000 00 0 000 0 000 0 000 Screen 4 73 Drawing Ref 74 Drawing Size 75 76
373. y when offering items for sale Enter Memo Information Field lengths are 20 characters IC 58 Next Generation Inventory Control IIM INTERCHANGEABLE ITEM MAINTENANCE Introduction The Interchangeable Item Maintenance program allows the user to set up a cross reference table from interchangeable items to primary items The interchangeable item need not be in the item master The primary item it points to must be in the item master The Sales Order Entry program may receive entry of an interchangeable item and will check this table to bring in the primary item ID Procedure From the menu enter IIM e IIM Interchangeable Item Maintenance Our Item ID Item Description Update Item Description 2 Remove Interchangeable Item Query Interchangeable Desc View Memo 1 Information Import Memo 2 Information Help Compatibility Vendor ID Obsolete Date Exit Program Add records OVE Select from the Menu options Use the Add button to add a new record Use the Update button to update existing records Use the Remove button to remove records Use the Query button to query records Use the View button to view records Use the Import button to Import records from an excel file Use the Help button to view help on this program Use the Run button to execute another program Use the Exit Program button to exit the program Release NGS 6 30 IC 59 Next Generation Inventory Contr
374. zations are likely to follow standard periods of calendar months this function will provide the flexibility for users to define their own periods Up to 99 periods may be entered for 1 year Procedure From the menu enter IUPM Item Usage Period Maintenance Options Year Mo of periods Period Ending Date Remove Query View Help Run Press Return to ADD record Release NGS 6 30 IC 16 Next Generation Inventory Control f the user selects Add it will determine IUPM Item Usage Period Maintenance Add Year the first year that an IUPM SUES record is not set Ending Date E First Period up for and Mo of Years cancel populate the year field with Hele that value ern thes Monthly 445 Week Period Bi Weekly Weekly OVE Ending Date Enter the ending date of the 1 period in the year No of Years Enter the number of years to set up Period Type Monthly This type will create 12 periods per year 445 Week The 4 4 5 calendar divides a year into 4 quarters Period Each quarter has 13 weeks which are grouped into two 4 weeks months and one 5 week month Bi Weekly This type will create 26 periods per year Weekly This type will create 52 periods per year Release NGS 6 30 IC 17 Next Generation Inventory Control IURM ITEM USAGE RULES MAINTENANCE Introduction The Invento

INVENTORY CONTROL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents